Professional Documents
Culture Documents
AN
GRAMMAR
ITALIAN
EXERCISES
WITH
BY
YOUNG
VANCE
MARY
"i
Languages, Mount
Professor of Romance
Holyoke College
UNIVERSITY
NEW
HENRY
HOLT
YORK
AND
1904
COMPANY
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
",
"
"
Copyright,
1904,
BY
HENRY
ROBERT
HOLT
DRUMMOND,
AND
COMPANY
PRINTER,
NEW
YORK
PREFACE.
book
This
Practical
of
lack
of
chapter
and
In
taken
the
up
the
reason
(the
chapter
are
Numerals
and
with
reading
that
Although
out,
be
rather
oral
quite
no
is
way
mentioned
book
claims
to
be
which
Regole
material
and
the
book.
in
connection
for
work
in
ed
the
to
well
as
reference.
independently
been
a
fixes
pre-
nouns,
chapter,
has
the
of
than
largely
consulted
Moise's
from
This
the
auxiliaries
of
learned
intended
before
on
dictionary
be
same
lesson)
end
the
widely
means
that
at
the
of the
grammars
Italiana,
follow
to
first
by
are
the
principal
the
exercises.
part
it in
the
nouns
conveniently
may
or
of
not
of
treated
every
Among
Lingua
does
prepositions,
on
from
modification
belong
grammar
pupil
forms
given
are
of
inflection
for
and
the
verbs
on
rather
is
chapter,
those
verbs
conjugations
tenses
first
irregular
regular,
for
verbal
regular
for
rules
after
before
the
on
the
to
suffixes
numerals
that
harmony
taken
the
in
irregular
present
the
on
and
should
that
familiar
being
placed
on
regular
auxiliaries
worked
chapter
from
separated
is
learned
thoroughly
be
given
order
be
general
being
adjectives
on
pronouns.
may
as
adjectives
than
might
the
instance,
reference.
and
use
more
what
explain
For
plan.
inflection
the
will
This
class
considered
been
has
utility
of. design.
for
intended
is
its
of
tion.
investiga-
preparation
della
Osservazioni
for
the
lists
iii
of
PREFACE.
iv
has
prepositions,etc.,
and
for
Benelli-Marucelli's
dictionaries
of
Josselyn'sEtude
the Italian
on
schen
author
for
book
in
read
the
manuscript;
chapter
to Mr.
whose
by
the
Mr.
the
and
Grandgent
a
device
certain
whose
by
Fraser
Messrs.
the
The
borrowed
material
various
sources.
history
no
few
oral
for
the
In
exercises
are
make
D. C. Heath
"
representingto
the
eye
that
adopted;
was
the
French
and
taken
been
from
facts
Italian
the
the
from
school
assumed.
is
from
sitions.
prepo-
gathered
an
furnished, since
own
on
to
nished
fur-
Grammar
chapter
on
words
English
Spanish Grammar;
has
to
paragraphs
and
in the
ployed
em-
Only
teacher
will
vocabulary
in
useful
to
exercises.
The
author
her Romanic
kindly point
hopes
fellow
out
that
this
Grammar
workers, and
that
Holyoke
may
they
be
in return
its defects.
Mary
Mount
Co.,
Grammar
seq.
the
gestions;
sug-
to
exercises
his
valuable
verbs, similar
his
that
of
most
made
Italian
190
furnished
who
read
Messrs.
responsibility for
usually prefer to
and
Squair, whose
for No.
model
der Romani-
Josselyn, Jr.,who
permission
from
and
the section
and
,
Comba,
and
for
correspondences between
been
T.
Freeman
Grandgent's
Ramsey,
have
the
Mr.
phonetics
on
irregularitiesof
Mr.
to Mr.
exercises
to
permission
in
several
Edgren,
helpful.
thanks
returns
material
the
been
of
Grundriss
in Grober's
language
hints.
given
and
phouetiqueitalienne
Philologiehave
The
also
have
Rigutini-Fanfani
la
sur
mar;
Gram-
Mariotti's
and
drawn,
certain
Sauer's, and
The
been
College,
September,
1903.
Vance
Young.
will
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Orthography,
Pronunciation,
Graphic
and
Signs
CHAPTERS
I.
II.
Articles
Principles.
First
Articles
27
Syntax
Prepositions.
with
Nouns
and
ticle
Ar-
the
of
29
III.
Nouns,
IV.
Regular
V.
VI.
Gender
their
Number
and
37
Verbs
48
Verbs
Auxiliary
56
Pronouns.
Personal
Personal
Disjunctive
nouns
Pro-
65
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
Personal
Conjunctive
Adjectives
Pronouns.
Reflexive
Verbs
72
Participles
and
82
Possessives
98
Relatives.
Demonstratives.
Interrogatives.
definites
In-
102
XT.
XII.
Prefixes
Suffixes
and
Verbs.
Irregular
111
Impersonal
Verbs.
Defective
Verbs
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
116
Dependent
Prepositions.
Infinites
Moods
Conjunctions.
Numerals
Adverbs.
and
and
123
Tenses
Numerical
142
Values.
terjections
In-
156
Irregular
Alphabetical
Verbs
by
Table
Conjugations
of
Irregular
171
Verbs
198
Exercises
207
Italian-English
Vocabulary
English-Italian
Vocabulary
244
258
Index
269
v
UNIVE
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
GRAPHIC
AND
ORTHOGRAPHY,
PRONUNCIATION
SIGNS.
i.
The
followingtables
in
used
all the
contain
narily
ordi-
sounds
spoken
to
of their production.
localityand to the manner
(a) Vowels are distinguishedwith reference to their
Consonants
(/?)
localityonly, as frontand back vowels.
classified (a) according to locality,as:
(i) biare
dentals,
labials,formed by the upper and lower lips; (2) labioformed
by the lower lip and the upper teeth;
teeth;
(3) linguo-dentals, by the tongue and upper
the
against
the front part of the hard
palate; (5) back-palatals,
by the ridge of the tongue against the back part of
the hard
palate; (6) gutturals, by the ridge of the
against the soft palate; (b) according to
tongue
the
by
(4) front-palatals,
tip
the
of
tongue
manner
liquids,which
they partake
These
into
cords
classes
differ from
more
vibrate.
the
of consonants
voiceless,in the
do
of
continuants
other
of
character
also
must
production
of
vowels,
be
vibrate, and
voiced, in which
For
instance, p
is
breath
voiceless
is
/.
as
subdivided
which
not
the
in that
the
vocal
they
do
bi-labial
stopped by
the
i'italiangrammar.
\ ," : : .;
'
"
"
b is the
and
vibrating,'
cOfds not
with
same
vibration of
cords.1
the vocal
Italian
VOWELS.
Front
1
Back
Vowels.
Vowels.
(inni)
i
(inni)
e
u
0
(fremere)
" (fremere)
a
(rumore)
popolo)
(popolo)
'9(popolo)
(fremere)
e
(una)
(ama)
(ama)
CONSONANTS,
(a) Simple
the
2
Any
This
simple
sound
work
can
on
as
Consonants.
phonetics
may
serve
tables.
Heavy-face figuresrefer
to
paragraphs.
to
further
elucidate
CONSONANTS.
(b)
Compound
Consonants.
These
are
thirty-sixsounds
graphically represented
k, w, x, and y not occurring
by twenty-two letters,
in the Italian alphabet. Otherwise
it is the same
the English.
letters of the alphabet and
their
Italian
3. The
2.
as
are
names
(a) K,
y,
x,
(b) The
w,
iccase
called cappa,
letters
the
are
in the
same
(c) The
variable,but
ending in
with
"nne
of the
names
in the
as
follows:
as
and
in
are
general
feminine
elision of the
i,0,
i.e.,
u, and
the
"
and
and
the
(lazeta, "the
"the
while
n"),
ending
consonants
are
plural
is
what
some-
consonant
z" ; l,"nne la
=
the
in
other
i,0,
or
n,
ters,
letare
masculine.
4. The
of that
1
and
These
12
number
of
sounds
sq. before
being
Italian
attempting
to
to
being
so
much
in
excess
words,
the
pronounce
pupil should
them.
refer to
ITALIAN
dent
that
one
more
than
one
character
sound.
is much
student
to
represent
Italian
howorthography, ever,
lish
nearly phonetic than is the Engwith
instruction
and
care
every
found
bear
used
should
of the
be
more
be
must
The
French, and
or
GRAMMAR.
in
useful, although
mind
the
that
to him
are
alreadyknown
only approximate, no
Italian sound
the English sound
as
beingquitethe same
most
sound
should
be
nearly resembling it. The
learned by imitation.
The teacher is therefore advised
to pronounce
the Italian key-word slowly,the pupil
noting carefullyhis pronunciation.
sounds
VALUE
OF
THE
LETTERS
Value
(a)
has
5. I
OF
of the
approximately
the
THE
ALPHABET.
Vowels.
of
sounds
English
eel
in "meet".
has
approximately
pin", or,
in
hurry
when
11
' '
"
in
called
sound
1
of
word
English
i in
(as in poi),of y
the
is
approximately
the
sound
mate".3
"open
English e
English vowels,
are
"
e", has
the
is, of
That
of
of
English a
E,
end
sounds
E, called "close
of
the
at
the
in
"
e", has
approximately
the
met".
This,
Italian
as
all
vowels
pure.
2
the
The
pupil may
will in the
3
i's will
two
That
learn
meantime
is,of
the
not
be
them
graphically distinguished
by ear and by imitation.
all purposes.
firstpart of the sound.
in this
The
book;
first i
answer
Cf.
above, foot-note
1.
VALUE
has
is
LETTERS
approximately
a
pupil may
between
the
THE
OF
the
neutral
more
these
in
difficult to
himself
apportunity of hearing
father".
"
The
distinguish
to
his ear,
Italians
describe.
not
Later
sounds.
two
ALPHABET.
of
sound
first content
at
THE
OF
if he
speak, will
has
detect
the difference.
o", has
9, called "open
is
sound
the
between
in
English equivalent.
no
"
"
paw
the
and
in
"
It
1 "
pop
t "
"
Between
the
close o, there is
subtle
shades
6. Attention
intermediate
an
detect
may
and
open
ear
and
of sounds
not
by
is called
to
and
which
sound
and
the
the
dent
stu-
learn
by imitation, such
tion.
being capable of defini-
the
fact
that
in the order
the
given in
vowel
graph
para-
rounded.1
Mr.
Josselyn (Etude
calls
reason
the
name
our
back
the
a-o-u
of anterior.
series.
la
ITALIAN
7. All
vowels
as
in
GRAMMAR.
well
all consonantal
as
sounds
in
quicker,more
energeticmanner
Italian than in English (althoughthe former are somewhat
less energeticthan
the French
vowels). One
must
reallywork harder in pronouncing them.
vowels
do
The
tend to become
never
neutral, nor
produced
are
the consonants
is the
as
This
take
ever
in
case
is what
after
them
English.
gives to spoken
neutral
Italian
its
vowel,
peculiarly
effect.
staccato
8. The
is the
only
real
distinction
In words
offered
difficulty
of open
and
close
the
by
and
vowels
o.
of
uo
are
that
accented
and
in the
Latin
e, the
groups
ie
open:
have
godere,
(" capillum) ;
buQno, good
("b6num).
capello, hair
enjoy ("gaudere);
loro, their ("illorum); volto, face ("vulto
tum).
MORE
SPECIAL
9. E
RULES
THE
FOR
QUALITY
OF
THE
is close:
In
syllables.2
(2) In monosyllables,3whether
standing
composition with other words:
(1)
in
1
The
VOWELS.
unaccented
first element
in these
alone
or
not
being a consonant, they cantable
also
of conso28, Rem.
diphthongs.
(1),
nants,
where
the i is registeredas j, the u as w.
2
This e is really medium
close,but for practical purposes
may
be regarded as close.
3
which
not
Words
are
normally monosyllabic but which have
be
called
groups
See
Me,
with
meco,
me;
LETTERS
THE
OF
VALUE
prepositioncon);
e,
THE
OF
ALPHABET.
of
(a compound
me
i tre
and;
the
re,
7
and
me
the
kings; che,
three
that, which.
Exceptions:
in
ending
by the
(3) In oxytones
regularlymarked
sheep).
vowel,2 which
vowel
(see 32 a) :
accent
grave
feared.
he
teme,
of
bah
re,
Moses;
Mos",
as,
Exceptions: (a) Proper names;
Giosu",Joshua.
of foreign origin3; as, caff",coffee;
(b) Nouns
canap",
sofa.
interjectionsahime,
is,that is to say".
imm", ohim";
(c) The
"that
In the
accented
indicative
and
(4)
indicative
In
(5)
of
the
Mostreremo,
(6) In
of '-ere verbs.
endings
adverbial
the
ending
temerete,
ending
-mento
(See 67 (2).)
of verbs
-rete
-remo,
shall show;
we
become
Ex.:
1
so
But
These
Notice
In
not
cases
fear.
the
stantive
sub-
contraction
by
that
for
this
naturally
sfi,
has
in
"
thou
the
and
jugations:
con-
going, gait.5
is close:
s"' (notse'),
Notice
of all
shall
you
-mente
cio",4
and
-ere
also
never
the
not
to
compounding
covered
accent
by
form
of
under
come
to
conjunction
verbal
pi|, contraction
conform
not
the
rule.
distinguish it from
does
not
pi"de.
e,
rules
take
the
note
rule.
with
this
".
art
grave
the
do
"is".
the
is open.
to
(2).
grave
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
(i) In unaccented
syllables.1
monosyllablesending with
(2) In
Con, with;
But
11.
not.
non,
accented
vowel, i.e.,where
is open
ending
in oxytones
monosyllablesand
in
consonant2:
ends
that
word,
in
o
S9, I know;
hg, I have;
mostrerg,
Lo, definite
Exceptions:
article
I shall show.
and
also
pronoun;
contractions.
(1) and
e's and
paragraph
P, b, f,v,
12.
in
as
m,
the
in the mouth.
T and
into
1,and
and
cated
quality indiindicatingthe close,
their
pronounced approximately
stops being, however, more
1 being made
farther forward
q3 are
"
are
so
different
n,
graph
(para-
Consonants.
of the
Value
English,the
and
explosive,4
13.
have
signs,e and 0
pronunciation.
(b)
first rule
(1)),i.e.,all accented
10
diacritic
9 the open
the
by
by
" and
covered
not
farther
much
forward
They
sound-category.
as
to
come
not,
are
as
in
the tip of
linguo-dentals,
back of the teeth in producing
English, post-dentals,but
the tongue
touching the
them.
Cf. 9 (1). Not
heart".
cupre,
1
where
the
is
contraction
of
uo
in
cQr, for
"
not
Notice
Q is
the
not
to
difference
be
found
between
in
the
and
table
o.
of consonants
never
represents k.
"Cf. 7-
it is
because
w.
in
The
Italian
"quick".
It
VALUR
and
14.
THE
OF
Before
LETTERS
voiceless, somewhat
Canto,
But
(a)
the
as
in
as
in
that
of
voiced, somewhat
' '
in
sing (c as
gola, throat
15.
back
the
MET.
ALPHA
two
represent
THE
OF
(g
in
as
English "can");
English "go").
represents
sound
vowels,
i:
like
somewhat
into
passes
and
the
category of
pound
com-
consonants:
like ch
for
(b)
also becomes
corresponding
'chain'*); cercare,
second
the
compound
voiceless
and
as
in the
as
in
k).
consonant,
represents
English 'gentle",but
in
legislatura(g
voiced
the
to
like that
sound
in
ble:
forci-
more
cognate "gentle");
corresponding English
the
word).
Remark.
as
Cc,
simple
the
stop stands
inserted
Chiave,
to
(cc
or
before
one
indicate
key
like tch
like g in
c
and
i have
the
sound
same
only prolonged:
consonant,
Caccio, I hunt
16.
before
gg
the
in
"sage",
'catch", but
but
prolonged).
representing the
of the
front
voiceless
(the initial
sound
prolonged);
back-palatal
vowels,
an
is
pronunciation:
in
the
as
English
word).
Ghirlanda, garland (the initial sound
word).
Ch
17.
never
has
the
sound
Ng is like the
given
English
to
as
it in
sound
in
English
the
English
"
chin".
ITALIAN
io
GRAMMAR.
Vengo,
(pronounced
come
after
(litiggua).
This
same
the stop
before
or
sound
ng
is
given
to
alone
an
before
Ancora,
8.
the sound
like
(u almost
Ucjmo, man
of
Englishw
in
"woman");
which
19.
might
be written
S has
two
the
it in
given to
English "museum",
"mew".
(1) it is voiceless
in Italian:
sounds
the
in "maze".
like
(2) it is voiced
'hearse";
English "see",
in "hears", or
in
as
sound
has the
never
general
The
rule is:
S initial followed
consonants
by
f, p, q, t;
c,
also
voiceless consonant,
Santo, saint;
vowel
by
less
of the voice-
one
followed
medial
voiceless
are
ss,
spiare,to
stone;
sasso,
or
as
in
by
"
see":
fresco, fresh;
spy;
asfalto,asphalt.
S medial
voiced
the
vowels,2
between
Sgridare,to scold;
But
intervocalic
(a) After
(where the
1
Accented
''two"
due,
2
the
This
s
is
is
(u
as
rule does
are
voiced
as
museum.
is voiceless:
by
in the
pre,
pro,
re,
ri, tra
vowel
retains
its vowel
sound.
Ex.:
English "duel").
apply
not
=
1, r,
:
reallyinitial)
really initial,
the
n,
followed
museo,
s
the
s
m,
initial before
or
/.
-^-^
use
b, d, g,
consonants
""
""
in
medial
to
si dice.
is also initial.
cases
In
like dicesi,
compounds
"they say",
like
where
flower",
girasole,"sun-
Mu
Pisa
parastto
'
'
Mussulm.-nnv
MM
pi
susmo
befoi
Sc
"
"
S*ic'.'::i
"\\
"
'
"""'"'
s"
"
ic4toU
ik
'
"
"
"
""..-..""
\n
Kch
cl
'
"
i
'
"
"
""
"
r
;
CHI-
tS
a"ut,
"
'":" ..'
to.
.
"4"fctt*
"
24.
what
" "
i.in
THB
OF
VALtJB
(ii
indicates
1i1"i
that oi
LETTERS
THE
OF
xi.i'ii \iu.
1, a
usuallythe Liquid
in in "brilliant",
or oi
sound
in
ii
[3
some
Brazil
'
'
and
In-idle;
Brij"lia,
^li (article
pronoun),
"to neglect",and its derivativi
(./) But in tieglfgere,
the k' ,:; sounded as
English,also in Angli,Anglicano,
in
that
1 "i
French
nj; in
'
montagne
lamb.
VergQgna,shame; agngllo,
;iikI zz usuallyrepresent 8 ti very energeti
26. z
the corresponding
callyenunciated, but sometimes
voiced sound
In
dz.
generala
derived
from
Latin t, ct,
from
one
Latin
pt has
or
"i or
(deck
no/.zc,
But;
gratiam); azione,action
f.-ivor (
ju-.k-c,
w"-"
rozzo,
l"Inn; (
rude
Is
"
iOUnd.
with
/one
ai
dz
sound.
The
rule:; may
following
The
s"
Thia
licelessi
comparison,as
Inadequate.
the middle
and
makes
tion
near
'*
helpful.
it is initialor
when
it
is medial
consonant:
very
1.
v"
Generallywhen
(a)
after
lund is
also be
1 he
as
sounds
Tin-
oi the tongue
the
See note
well
given below
.in-
ww/"/r
foi the
In
liquido,
forming them
lies almost
ordinary a,
bacl" 1 ii 1 he uppei
to 24.
thai
teeth.
ITALIAN
14
i
Zio, uncle;
GRAMMAR.
"
remainder.
avanzo,
it is followed
(6) When
by
plus a
vowel
(a)
-izzare
X
of
verbs
^
than
more
four
syllablesending
in
",
Armonizzare,
Attizzare,
have
compounds,
utilizzare,to utilize.
harmonize;
to
Exceptions:
stizzare
Their
contrary the voiceless z.
in dirizzare,keep this voiceless sound.
the
on
such
as
(b) In z"lo,"zeal",
compounds; in azzurro,
'azure"; bazar, "bazaar"; dozzina, 'dozen"; m"zzo,
'middle", and its compounds; orizzonte, "horizon";
'dinner";
ribrezzo, "shivering"; zeffiro,
pranzo,
words.1
rare
'zephyr"; zona, "zone", and some
initial only
It is found
as
27. H is silent in Italian.
in the
verbal
forms
its
and
hg,
"I
hai, "thou
have";
hast";
ha,
each
one
has";
hanno,
Vowel
in ahi.
as
Groups.
triphthongsexist apparently in
in realityfew
in Italian,but there are
great number
of the
diphthongs and no triphthongs at all,many
vowels
value, and
thongs
diphhaving consonantal
many
in appearance
being reallydissyllables.
28.
For
under
Diphthongs
which
(b) either
sec
and
Moise.
have
the
"
It will be
Latin
noticed
("z)
or
are
that
of
the
words
given
foreign extraction.
VALUE
THE
OF
OF
LETTERS
THE
ALPHABET.
In
consonant
(=w),
(cf. 24).
In
bugi the
In
other
3, i is
foot-note
mere
the
and
is
i after
gl is
combinations
before
u
a
15
is
part of the 1
given under
22,
sign.
and
consonant
the
final i forms
syllable.
A real diphthong is two vowels produced by one
and
of which
the same
receives the
breath-impulse,one
A diphthong in which
the second
element
accent.1
is called a rising diphthong,one
is the accented
in
which
the first bears the accent
a falling
diphthong:
(c7)Rising diphthongs:
Ex.:
paese,
country;
paura2,
fear.
(i)
In
first member
the
all
is i
or
u, that
first member
is
in
sonantal:
con-
(2)
from
the
i.e.,the
compounds where
diphthong, that
two
vowels
form
principalaccent is removed
diphthong becomes
dissyllabic,
each
a
separate syllable,thus
the
dissolvingthe diphthong:
Paese
(ae diphthong) paesano
,
(ae dissyllabic);paura,
pauroso.
Syllabication.
With
the
few
1
2
Cf.
Hempl,
Care
is not
aw
German
sound
ITALIAN
in such
that
way
GRAMMAR.
each
begins with
In
consonant.
division
the
(i) A
between
consonant
vowels
two
with
the
divided
into
goes
second1:
I
A-mo,
love;
zo-na;
Exceptions:
mal
(2) Double
consonants
two
with
doz-zi-na.
in medial
with
goes
divided:
are
mez-zo;
(3) Usually
or
Ex.:
parts.
year;
one
are
Mal-a-ge-vo-le,"difficult",
agevole; ab-u-sare, "to abuse"
(ab+usare).
and
An-no,
words, which
Compound
their component
from
119-mo.
of two
or
groups
the preceding, the
more
sonants
con-
other
one
following:
the
(i) In
Exceptions2:
continuant
1
or
plus
n) both
Ma-dre,
groups
of
liquid (i.e.,
members
go
composed
of
stop
p, b, t, d, c, g, f, v,
plus
a-cri-mo-ni-a, acrimony;
mother;
or
te-a-tro,
se-gre-to,secret.
is difference of usage:
of c-\-q there
(2) In the case
a-cquistareand ac-quistare.
consonant
Groups of 5 followed by one more
(5 impura)
are
usually said also to make
exception; but while the
question is scarcely decided, it is probable that they are
divided
The
resist
in the usual
be
sharply divided, and
syllables must
between
tendency to attach a consonant
first.
the
cine, the
to
more
the
same
2
way
He
has
been
accustomed
belonging decidedly
the
word
second
thus:
than
to
to
the
to
the
say,
the
He
must
vowels
two
to
first syllable,the
third.
pupil
must
(5 sound)
in Italian
divide
me-di-ci-na.
the following
liquid n and / being simple sounds
go with
Ex.:
syllableaccording to the general rule.
i-gnu-do,"naked";
The
bri-glia,"bridle".
VALUE
OF
THE
LETTERS
"dark"
os-cu-ro,
OF
THE
(not o-scu-ro)
ALPHABET.
17
riKjs-tro,"I
show"
(not 1119-stro).
Accentuation.
largemajority of Italian words are stronglythe penult (that is, the syllablebefore
on
The
30.
accented
the last):
mano,
hand
There
are,
accent
a
however,
the
on
castigo,punishment.
antepenult or even
number
bearing it
considerable
Mostr^,1he
showed;
siderano, they
words
many
are
bearing
farther
they
mostrarono,
tonic
back;
last
the
on
the
also
syllable:
showed;
con-
property.
Accents.
Graphic
Three
la
Mostrera
He
bonta.
sua
monosyllables by
(b) On
ending in a vowel:
Gia, already; piu, more;
his goodness.
will show
nature
or
by
contraction
foot.
pie,de),
from
(i) A
Exceptions:
words
the
different
1
in
Receives
same
in appearance
meaning),
the
grave
of
number
such
accent.
and
(that is,
in sound, but
homonyms
often
as:
See
following paragraph.
ITALIAN
and,
e,
to
GRAMMAR.
distinguishit from
if,
se,
la
di, day;
" "
it,
neither;
ne,
la,there
(dcf.art.),
"
li
self;
si,yes;
di,of,
of
is;
se,
n
si,self,one,
ne,
e,
li,there
da, from,
(2) Certain
;
;
da, he gives,
verbal
forms
,
as
va, he
*
sta, he stands
goes;
(c) Also
(1)
them
often
as
Shortened
from
; sa, he
a
forms
knows;
of the
can).
infinitive:
mostrar
he
on:
distinguishingmark
of the preteriteto distinguish
forms
shortened
(but PU9,
(for
mostrar
mostrare), to show.
(fortemerono), they feared;
temer
(for temere),
temer
fear.
to
par-
tire),to depart.
(2) Other
verbal
forms
which
have
homonyms2:
dai, thou
(3) The
two
accented
This
and
the
are
of
polysyllablesending
in
This
is
usage
accent
Accented
of the
following (corresponding) forms
the antepenult:
accented, in speaking, on
other
trarono,
mos-
partirono.
temerono,
acute
penult
vowels:
conjugations
2
optional
in
these
on
the
and
arbitrary.
Some
writers
cases.
penult according
to
the
general
rule.
use
the
ITALIAN
20
(b) Sometimes
the
on
ending
GRAMMAR.
i, plural of the
jective
ad-
and
noun
-io1:
and
(b), and
some
this
In
151^
usage.
lack
that
there
is
of
unanimity
of the graphic accents.
use
exceptions,and 34 (a) cover
the
to
as
observed
It will be
35.
book
the
acute
good
of
deal
Italians
among
Sections
the
(a),
ordinary
32
will be
accent
(pronominal),the preposition
che5
are
conjunctions se and
regularly
and
di
elided
before
vowel.
-10.
of words
A
vowel
The
whether
3
For
Which
acute
the
which
vowel
follows,6or
should
in
No
ending
-io, -ia.
be
will also be
i be
see
becomes
stressed
41
of
words
Special attention
All
unaccented
an
if another
'-io not
si
ne,
syllableending in
vowel
(article3),
lo, la, gli,
una
be
rule
one
may
elide that
truncate
it before
paid
to
be
can
the
ation
accentu-
given for
it.
the
guide.
placed on all words
or
than
more
ending
in -ia, -io,
unstressed.
only before
Elision is much
more
and
i, since
it would
Cf. 14.
sound.
and
i.
frequent
in
poetry
than
in prose.
wise
other-
VALUE
THE
OF
LETTERS
initial consonant
any
but
consonant;
except
which
a'
as
conjunctions
(a) The
often
(b)
a
before
add
the
the
vowel,
word
Capitalsare
(a) The
conjunction che,
only oxytones
('on tractions
such
common.
and
and
preposition a
preposition su adds r:
the
of
the
Capitals.
employed
'I", is
io,
pronoun
in
as
English save
libro
]"ccoun
He
(c) The
is
is
Here
italiano.
written
not
whereas
that:
with
Lei, Ella,
written
not
nouns
are
Italian
with
usually
|)
book.
Italian.
an
of months
names
usuallywritten
signor, Mr".1
are
by another
preceded by
beginning with s impure, when
in school.
school; in iscugla,
prefixesi: scugla,
Use
Italiano.
21
sur.
consonant
37.
ALPHABET.
followed
are
vowel;
THE
of
compounds
giacche, benche,
dacche,
as
OF
with
of
"
as
(Exercise I.)
Correspondence
38. There
are
between
Italian
in
Greater
Italian
than
individual
in
freedom
English.
Italian and
in
English.
large number
in form
may
the
be
use
of words
and
meaning to
easilyrecognized
of
capitals exists
in
ITALIAN
22
terminations
The
pupil.
by the
GRAMMAR.
will aid
Nouns.
(The letter / or
at
f ade becomes
the
ata
m.
age becomes
m.
al becomes
the
gender.)
brigata,cascata.
metallo).
cristallo,
m.
alt adds
m.
an
m.
ant
m.
arian becomes
m.
ate
m.
ator
adds
asfalto,cobalto.2
o:
veterano.
cristiano,
o:
adds
diamante, instante.
e :
becomes
adds
ario
ato
centenario, unitario.
carbonato, stato.
creatore, oratore.
e:
becomes
ce
culo) or
m.
cio
becomes
ct
tto
f. cy becomes
ent
m.
zia:
adds
intelle,tto.5
contatto, eff"tto,
aristocrazia,
pot"nzia.
age,nte,ori"nte;or
accid"nte,
e:
adds
o:
ge becomes
m.
gen
are
adds
Also
Rem.
nitrogeno.6
Terminations
Also
For
etc.
the
f in
asfalto
see
p.
26,
(b).
Also
ending
the
assalto, "assault",
o:
gio, ''courage";
2
vestigio.
*gio: privil"gio,
with
an
asterisk
etc.
indicate
that
antepenultimate syllable.
prodotto, "product".
arc
accented
on
the
6Idrogeno, "hydrogen",
ossigeno,
"oxygen",
etc.
words
so
VALUE
THE
OF
LETTERS
graph becomes
m.
f. ic adds
*a:
izia
f. ine becomes
medicina.
disciplina,
confusione,religione.
e:
isan becomes
m.
isk becomes
m.
ism
m.
ist adds
m.
ite becomes
m.
wewJaddso:
m.
meter
adds
igiano: artigiano,
partigiano.2
isco
asterisco,basilisco.
despotismo, pessimismo.
0 :
artista,dentista.
a:
ito
appetito, granito,sito.
fragmento (orframmento),monumento.
becomes
*metro
becomes
monia
becomes
on
m.
or
adds
adds
f. ose
barone.
adds
despota,patri"ta(patri"tta).
a:
m.
phone becomes
m.
ry becomes
m.
scope becomes
ter
m.
or
tre
splendore,vapore.4
glucosa,rQsa.
osa:
*fono
*rio
f. sis becomes
sermone.
errore,
becomes
ot
m.
e:
ceremonia,parsimonia.
danza, intellig"nza,
sci"nza.3
nza:
e :
anemometro, gasometro.
m.
23
avarizia,malizia.
ina:
m.
f. nee
ALPHABET.
f mony
THE
aritmetica,musica, lggica.
f ice becomes
f. ion adds
OF
gramdfono, telefono.
consistgrio,
mist"rio.
scopio : microscopio,telescopic
si: crisi
becomes
(or crise),
sinopsi.5
tro
f. tion becomes
zione:
f tude becomes
*tudine
c"ntro, ministro,registro.
condizione, nazione.
amplitudine,multitudine, soli-
tudine.
1
This
(6),p.
2
Also
Also
etc.
In
ph regularly becomes
Also
filosofo, etc.
Cf.
Remark
(3)
26.
cortigiano, "courtesan",
eccellfnza, "excellence",
other
4Alsoautore,
5
cases
nee
circonferenza,
etc.
onpre,
"circumference",
provincia, "province",
"honor", etc.
gives ncia;
"author",
tesi, "thesis,"
etc.
as,
etc.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
24
f ty becomes
ta
*ulo:
ule becomes
m.
becomes
lire
etemita,
ura
m.
um
m.
us
becomes
(not otherwise
f. y
"
genio.
ce,nso,
o :
premio.
museo,
o :
becomes
societa.1
provided
for
above)
becomes
anatomia, energia,geografia,zoologia.
ia:
Adjectives.2
acious becomes
al adds
adds
an
e :
adds
ar
dominante,
e :
e :
ario
ario
ato
ble becomes
*bile :
becomes
est
tto
becomes
adds
adds
or
id adds
*o:
He remains
de,nso,imm"nso.
manifesto,on"sto.
*eo
calcareo, erroneo,
*fero
ical becomes
ique becomies
nubile,notabile,solubile.
intatto, perf^tto.
ferousbecomes
ic
prec"rio,vicario.
e:
o :
vacante.
duplicato,ornato.
enso
becomes
eous
ico
ico
:
satirico.3
misantr"pico,
antico.
valido.
rapido, s^lido,
unchanged
fragile.
fertile,
facile,
Also
cittk, "city",
Only
Also
singular of
pubblico, "public", etc.
under
al.
i^eo.
aurifero,carbonifero.
the
verace.
contrario,ordinario.
ate becomes
ent
sagace,
solare.
circolare,
ary becomes
ense
capace,
americano, pagano.
arious becomes
ct
centrale,immortale.
o :
adds
ant
ace
masculine
etc.
the
But
adjectives is given.
musicale
as
given above
Italian
THE
OF
VALUE
ine becomes
zte
diurno, et^rno.
no:
ocious becomes
oce
atroce, feroce,precoce.
preparatories2
meritQrio,
orio:
becomes
ous
or
25
viol"nto.
o :
nal becomes
ose
ALPHABET.
decisivo,definitive1
ivo:
cry becomes
THE
erudito,infinito.
ito:
ive becomes
OF
aquilino,divino.
ino:
becomes
lent adds
LETTERS
oso:
luminoso.3
tial becomes
und
ziale
becomes
ondo
becomes
ure
uro
potenziale.
:
:
moribondo,
rubicondo.
futuro,puro.
Verbs.
becomes
ate
fy
are
calcolare,investigare.
becomes
ficare:
ize becomes
izzare
often
becomes
fortificare,
magnificare.
:
are
civilizzare,organizzare.
cominciare, continuare,
curare,
etc.4
end
in
fact
(t) The
Remarks,
that
most
Italian
words
is evident.
vowel
be
observed
that
(a) English x
=ks) is replaced
simple consonant,
by c or s: eccellfnza, 'excellence"; ossigeno, oxy.gen". (6) Ou or u are often replaced by o: corraggio, "courage"; cortigiano, 'courtesan"; circolare,
(which is
not
'
"circular",
(c) In combinations
Also
Also
of
the
of two
stops assim-
used.
etc.
French
from
English e verbs are mostly derived
the first conjugation, i.e., er
verbs.
The
comparison
three languages with
the Latin
is interesting.
These
verbs
here
of
26
ITALIAN
ilation
'
'perfect";
perf"tto,
occurs:
manufacturer".
(d)
'theatre";
teatro,
GRAMMAR.
manifattore,
"
is omitted:
honor";
onore,
'rheumatism"
reumatismo,
(cf.
27).
(3) In words
(a)
becomes
grafico
(b)
becomes
Ph
' '
pn,
'pneumatic";
(4) It is
consonant
of the words
"
lead
to
out
the
to
be
may
as
understood
and
two
to
English
but
help
it is
to
of the
circulo.
beginning with
theless
English, which never-
the
words:
sviluppare,
dismount".
The
clear
made
sviare
way", etc.
corresponding in
Where
one
forms
two
or
ments
develop-
words
many
'to
ment
develop-
ation
by the consider-
and
the
older
the
two
languages, or
or
hoped
impress
will not
one,
the
that
the
the
be
word
spaced
by
disviare,
the
word
table
will
upon
the
of
vocabularies.
terminations
Italian
help
in the exercises
in the
appear
Italian
more
formed
and
in this book
find two
to
emy".
"Ptol-
Tolomeo,
of the
be
may
Psalmist"
neumatico,
p:
"to
doublets
ISir3 Words
which
the
English
to
smontare,
such
pt drop
in Italian
strange
correspond
develop";
"
in Italian
are
groups
of
termination,
same
orto-
'
palacio and
There
filosofo, "philosopher";
unusual
of the
(5)
'
tipo-
'
and
ps,
"sympathy";
simpatia,
'
salmista,
not
word:
origin:
f:
orthography
(c) Initial
same
i:
typographical
grafia,
of Greek
correspond
will
even
memory.
be
in these
given,
cases
28
ITALIAN
NLo
v
GRAMMAR.
L' 1191110,
the man;
gliugmini,the men.
the Italian;gP Italiani,
\!L* Italiano,
the Italians.
Feminine
Singularla,pluralle.
becomes
La
before
^La
before
the
R;
1' economie,
1/ economia,
the economy;
J L' epistola,
the epistle;V
The
forms
Masculine
accordinglyused
The
except impure s and z.
il and
consonant
is used
impure s
4
libro,a book;
Un
are:
any
form
economies.
the
the epistles.
epistole,
1'
le mani, the,hands.
hand;
before
become
le may
only1:
mano,
41.
vowel,
any
like it before
used
scholar;
scolare,a
uno
un
ugmo,
man.
Feminine
una,
contracted
Una
ragazza,
From
42.
the
is abstracted
number
1
2
with
the
girl;un'
gra,
y^vel:
an^Bur.
This
Strictlyspeaking
contraction
by
with
to un* before
an
ordinary prose.
the
of the
o,
apostrophe
form
when
but
since
it
seems
used
the
best
before
contraction
to
consider
vowel
is
it
never
as
is
uno
cated
indi-
identical
un.
Compare
The
use
of
=alcuni.
*"
ARTICLES
The
sign of
PREPOSITIONS
WITH
the masculine
29
singularis
of the
culine
mas-
plurali.
The sign of the feminine
nine
singularis a; of the femiplural e.
This
general rule applies to articles,nouns,
nouns,
proand adjectives.
Exceptions will be noted la}er.
{Exercises
(Read
II
CHAPTER
ARTICLES
43.
Italian
are
nouns
PREPOSITIONS.
indicated
of the
by
the
definite
are
usually contracted
the
article is used
of
use
with
into
Article.
inflected.
not
are
III.)
II.
WITH
Syntax
III.)
write
and
II
and
one
Their
tions
rela-
prepositions.When
prepositionthe two
word.
The
tions
contrac-
are:
Remarks,
the
other
(i)
Per
is less
prepositions.
often
contracted
than
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
30
forms
(2) The
written
though
dei, ai,1etc.
"
on
L*
boy's book.
sulla
tavola.
learned
print be
coarse
referred
would
abstract
class of
carita "
L' ugmo
i/GP Italiani
Before
una
title followed
re
"
II
signor Bernasconi.
Papa
1
De
il
or
The
should
be
curato
not
ma
stralunati
2
But
col
of late,
seen
are
vocative.
maestro2:
pronounced
whether
often
decides
contracted.
Ex.:
Domand^
con
1' orrecchio
ear
cuor
sospeso,
(Manzoni,
the
conte, and
re,
della, etc.
Emmanuel.
C.
title is
the
papa,
name:
proper
Victor
Countess
(a) Where
before
Often
B.
Mr.
Cesaresco.
Exceptions:
by
King
Emanu"le.
Vittgrio
music.
Italians love
la musica.
II
(b)
is mortal.
Man
amano
a
contessa
denoting
nouns
Attention
s necessary.
" necessaria.
virtu.
Charity is a virtue,
La
and
nouns
mortale.
"
it
where
Italian
in
beings as objects:
L' attenzione
(2)
English:
in
be
(1) Before
J La
mirror.
Article.
article is used
definite
not
whole
at
in the
to.
The
44.
image
Definite
of the
is advised
It
Remark.
scholar's book
The
sp"cchio.The
nello
immagine
Syntax
as
the table.
is
almost
The
be
pronounced
article
I Promessi
can
never
as
to
con
as
a
though
form
un
all' erta.-
cert'
Con
written
should
atto
or
tras-
gli occhi
omitted
before
imperatore,
"
peror".
em-
ARTICLES
In
(c)
sandro
"the
Duse
Dante,
or
of
women:
is Albina.4
rule is sometimes
given
to
men,
extended
mio
often
ptjveroEnrico!
to
vocative
diminutives:
Speak
to
me,
my
poor
Charlie.
Before
the
notice
But
that
magno
that
title,and
countries,provinces,
of continents,
names
mountains,
Carlo,
really a Latin
Alessandro,
cities c
not
word, and
adjective,
an
baptismal,
are
family
not
names.
But
gella
la
Vergine
followed
are
French
There
Maria.
by a
being
(the words
these
is in
the
Where
"
title
the
borrowed
Cesaresco, Madam
la Contessa
cases
article
from
the
an
words
that
Countess
used
article is not
where
language)
(Pellico, Le
the
given
in
as
Madama
C.
"
century
Madami-
between
adjective implied
etc.
Voltaire, Voltaire's
Madama,
comes
rule
(6), below.
Compare
Senza
aver
by good writers:
always observed
Without
Condillac.
having great knowledge
known",
The
in the
names
given
the
to
(5)
is dead.
il Dante.5
II Carlino.
persons3:
actress.
an
and
possessive,
the
Parlami, il
Henry
is
names
Here
This
preceded by
Machiavelli
Duse
of well-known
names
of well-known
given
|)cco1' Albina.
Remark.
the
morto.
the
31
Ales"Charlemagne";
Great"; Maria
Vergine,2
magno,
surnames
attrice.
"
(4) Before
PREPOSITIONS.
magno,1 'Alexander
Virgin Mary".
La
not
Carlo
titles
the
WITH
Mie
name
Neither
gran
of
C.
such
is
this
rule
cognizipne di
II
sfcolo di
Prigioni Cap
and
'well
as
the
XXI).
surname
expressed.
are
4
again
Exceptions:
cella,1' Aia.
one
il
Cairo, la Mirandola,
la
Bastia,
la
Mecca,
name.
sur-
la
Rot-
ITALIAN
32
V America
Abitiamo
del Nord.
live in North
We
penisola. Italy is
una
11 Piemonte
GRAMMAR.
"
peninsula.
una
America.
is
Piedmont
part
of
Italy.
yIlTevere
pr"sso Roma.
flume
un
"
The
Tiber
is
river
Rome.
near
But:
j
Fire.nze"
11a
be,
una
citta.
beautiful
city.
article is omitted:
The
Exceptions:
is
Florence
to
dwellingin
or
country:
a
v
in Italia.
Vado
|)ccomiin
going to Italy.
am
Here
Francia.
could
in France.
am
the
of
prepositionand name
ality
replaced by an adjectiveof nation-
di, where
(b) After
country
be
II
parlamento
d'
imperatore di Germania.
L'
II Piemonte
"
English parliament.
Inghilt"rra.The
provinciad'
una
German
The
Italia.
emperor.
Piedmont
is
an
province.
(c) Before Candia, Cipro,Corfu, Ischia,Malta.
Italian
article
is
mi"i libri. My
vLa
mother
la di cui
ragazza
Sua
mamma
Your
mano.
"
qui.
The
hand.
girl whose
is here.
I bu"mi
ragazzisono
]Jccola
mia
(7)
La
books.
After
verb
characteristics
spiritual
1
2
Compare 134,
This example
avere
Good
This
d"stra.
mano
the
studiosi.
boys
are
studious.2
is my
right hand.
descriptionsof physical or
in
135,
would
147
(a).
also
fall under
rule
(1).
ARTICLES
WITH
L' Albina
ha
Je mani
piccole.
Ernestino
ha
il
buono.
(8) Instead
cuore
of the
Io apro
la
Chiudo
M9Striil braccio
(9) Before
hands.
small
E. has
good
where
cases
heart.
is
there
no
hand.
I close my
infinitive
an
33
(1)):
my
sinistro.
has
Little
137
I open
mano.
pugni.
A.
possessivein
PREPOSITIONS.
fists.
Show
other
or
left
your
arm.
as
noun:
/L'
andare
/Il bene
il tornare.
ed
il male.
Good
The
going
and
evil.
and
returning.
dication
in(10) Before numerals
indicating the year without
of month,
etc., also before those
indicatingthe
and
1)il 13 s"ttembre.
La
It is the
lezione comincia
day:
cento
of the
hour
the
alle
of
13th
The
nove.
It
in 1800.
was
September.
lesson
begins
at
nine
o'clock.
le undid.
Sono
It is eleven
o'clock.
:
(11) Distributively
(a) In
in
definite
in-
the
English
article is used:
Bu^olire il metro.
J
Uo,va
Two
liras
soldi la dozzina.
trenta
u+J-
meter.
Eggs
at
thirty cents
dozen.
Una
volta la settimana.
Once
"
on
H9
week
una
Wednesdays
is
month
1
be
days of
used
to
week
the
indicate
where
certain
il mercoledi
and
the
on
names
il sabato.
I have
day
lesson
Saturdays.
of the
months
when
certain
indicated1:
specifically
Notice
in
lezione
(12) Before
of the
week.
the
indication
of time
in
(10), (11),and
(12).
ITALIAN
34
Nell' ottobre
mille
GRAMMAR.
In October
c"nto.1
otto
1800
definite
The
45.
article
in Italian than
begmner
in which
before
used
not
those
of countries
the
of
names
Mia
"/
Mio
mio
Good
mio
the
fratellino
than
sor"lle.My
brother
article is used
dear
my
quell'uomo.
modifiers
colla
Ho
due
braccia.
Before
mia
carta
(5) Before
1
One
also
d' ottobre
mille
otto
Compare
rule
certain
(10).
role here.
has
than
mother,
set
say:
two
He
or
possessive:
madre.
My
little
ottobre
It will be
not
seen
that
or
man.
books.
arms.
very
and
del mille
that
pens.
(2).
used
Nell
general'sense:
vague,
Cf. 136
numbers
cento, but
demonstrative
sells paper
phrases.
In
sisters.
diminutives,
the
cara
several
having
ordinal
might
He
penne.
and
with
pointing at
am
I have
nouns
In certain
(a)
My
mother.
parecchilibri.
Vende
B.
singular
possessive:
amico.
"
Ha
(4)
Mr.
relative in the
ings
mean-
friend
near
has other
noun
is with
brother
morning,
il mio
padre
But
the
modifiers
irate.Hoe le mie
where
certain
friend.
Remark.
II
of
name
other
madre,
father, and
v
the
without
before
used:
not
giorno,signor Bernardo.
amico
mio.
Listen, my
Se,nta,
and
have
we
vocative:
Before
tions
construc-
cities,or
di with
^Buon
(2)
easier for
be
may
It is, as
occur.
after in and
It is further
(1) Before
not
quent
fre-
more
it does
seen,
much
so
English,it
in
recollect
to
being
with
otto
ottobre
regard
cento,
del
for
of
names
or
Nel
mille otto
euphony
mese
cento
plays
36
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
48. This
the
sense
where
the
to
"Vuglepane? Do
x/Vugledel pane?
Remarks,
(some) bread?
want
you
Do
want
you
(i) The
(of the)
some
partitiveis
not
bread
in
used
ative
neg-
sentence:
qualche
Ha
yHg
have
della carta,
I19lapis.
non
abbiamo
fiori.
We
construction
(2) The
French.
Its
haven't
I have
some
for me?
I
paper.
is less
is seldom
use
Syntax
The
indefinite
it would
where
not
the
It is, on
would
of the
frequent in Italian
obligatory and
in
the
is
than
often
individual.
Indefinite
article
be
flowers.
any
arbitrary,varying greatlywith
49.
something
you
pencils.
no
vNon
in
Have
Articlea
used
never
in
Italian
English.
contrary, omitted
in Italian
where
it
be
expressed in English:
(1) Before a predicatenoun,
expressingoccupation,
without
and following
rank, or nationality,
qualifiers,
the verbs essere
(to be) and fare (to make, do) :
(Also divenire, diventare,
pare re, proclamare, sembrare,
J
%
^
Si
Italiano.
an
dichiarato.)
Italian.
noun
observed
is
is
e*ssere
anche
But
Remark.
or
He
morire, mostrarsi,
nascere,
answering
that
he?") takes
in the
the
accompanied by
noun
the
question "who
examples
article:
under
official.
an
is he?"
(1) all
answer
erally,
(Lit-
adjective,
(itwill
be
"what
l"un
|)un
Chi
*"
principe.
bu"m
He
| quell'1191110?"
a
doctor
(2) Before
patrioticItalian.
good prince.
me'dico.
Who
is that
man?
apposition:
pr"sso Roma.
flume
y/ II Tevere
is
37
doctor).
in
noun
is
un
is
That
NUMBER.
AND
patri^tico.He
Italiano
is
He
GENDER
THEIR
NOUNS,
The
Tiber,
river
near
Rome.
Ce"are Bgrgia,ugmo
without
man
miseric^rdia. Caesar.Borgia,
s"mza
pity.
Dante,
' '
'
'
V Sono
ce,ntou^mini. They
(5)
y
certain
In
"at
casa,
school"; in
(6)
After
there
thousand
adverbial
a
"in
the
Italian
and
(cf.39). The
are
as:
"at
iijscuola),
see
157.
VII.)
III.
GENDER
nouns
men.
bedroom".
CHAPTER
50. All
{or in
THEIR
hundred
years.
scuola
(Exercises VI
NOUNS,
are,
expressions,such
home";
camera,
In certain
are,
AND
either
gender and
NUMBER.
masculine
number
or
nine
femi-
usually
indicated
by the ending, singular o, plural i being
the
endings, singular a, plural
typical masculine
1
Cf. French
je parle en
ami.
are
Cf.
291
(c).
38
ITALIAN
feminine.
the
However,
all masculine
not
nouns
all those
do
in o, neither
end
GRAMMAR.
is masculine.
GENDER.
General
(i) Nouns
their
keep
Rules
for Gender.
denoting male
natural genders:
and
female
beings usually
y II re, the
Exceptions:
recluta,
'
'
Guardia,
recruit
"guard";
guida, "guide";
'
sentine.Ha, sentinel
mother.
' '
spia,
' '
' '
spy
in
feminine
are
' '
washerwoman.
designatemale
prevails over
.
(2) Nouns
These
the two
V L'
abito, the
UI1 naso,
v
the
II muro,
coat
The
Latin
common
(a) Feminine
Exceptions:
in
la
nose;
the
la
"/
room.
nouns
which
are
culine
mas-
ending:
masculines
and
masculine
feminines
accusative
as
rule
retain
singular
their
gender.
Nouns
singular -am"a.
from
the
neuter
usually masculine, those
singulars are
plurals
here
decisive.
feminine, the endings being
Templum
"(il) tempio,
Masculine
in
with
nouns
o
a
nants
folia"(la) f"?glia.
plural in a are remdeclension.
Cf. 63 and 64.
of the Latin neuter
feminine
accusative
'
other
few
II
Also
39
'echo", and
"co,
words:
rare
of feminine
ending:
duca, "duke",ll monarcQ,
po"ta, "poet",!l
(b) Masculine
v
NUMBER.
AND
hand".
"the
mano,1
La
GENDER
THEIR
NOUNS,
nouns
cholera"/
Alsoycol"ra,
"
arch".
"mon-
of
words
other
few
singleword).
(3) Nouns ending
in
la gru,
gioventu,3 'youth";17
"
"
crane
also
"bamboo",
few
Exceptions:
such
bambu,
as
as
as
nouns,
"fennel";
meu,
"Peru".
vPeru,
Of
51.
ending in
nouns
The
feminine.5
some
(a) Masculine
Latin
From
for
Special Rules
More
fourth
foreign words,
other
and
vilpiu,4"more";
feminine:
are
and
Gender.
of the
meaning
masculine,
are
some
word
cide.
de-
may
are:
which, though
manum,
manus,
in
form
the
feminine
masculines
of
the
of the
second.
2
Notice
ceptions.
exusually make
imperfectly Italianized
note
Cf. following paragraph, exceptions, also 24 (a), foot-
that
words
5, p. 11, etc.
these
that
Notice
nouns
are
of
names
Cf. 51
abstractions.
(b) (1).
"Cf. 51
5
(a) (2).
Since all reallyItalian
includes
"
lead
pencil ",
all but
etc.
nouns
very
end
few
in
vowel, the
substantives,
above
such
as
fication
classiil
lapis,
ITALIAN
40
V II
generallyof mountains,
of trees, metals,
(i) Names
and
months,
GRAMMAR.
days:
yIl
limone, lemon-tree.
S.
"
rame,
Salva-
II San
copper.
L'
Tuesday.
This rule is constantly crossed
Remark.
in 50
For
le
instance,
by
Alpe,
or
given
Alpi, 'the
that
or
IJtna,"Etna".
Monte
|)tna,or
except la domenica,
except la latta, tin".
masculine
are
of metals
"
(b) Feminine
positive
are:
of abstractions:
(1) Names
La
specie,the species. Ly ambizione,
ambition.
La
quiet,rest.
quie,te,
(2) Many
a
masculine
v/ II noce,
In
Exceptions:
bears
\/
La
walnut-tree.
the
masculine
of fruits,1the
names
word
certain
designatesas
tree
noce,
the
used
as
walnut,
of
number
well
word
same
nut.
the
cases
fruit
as
same
the tree
that
it :
This
rule
is also
by
being feminine
"an
mela,
apple".
well the
as
meaning
2
both
Fico
tree
and
and
crossed
termination:
But
there
tree
as
dattero, both
fruit.
by
(2), the
50
L' arancia,
exists
also
of many
names
the
"the
fruits
orange";
masculine
una
arancio,
its fruit.
masculine
by termination,
also
mean
certain
52.
masculine
GENDER
THEIR
NOUNS,
of
number
feminine;
or
pupil is
The
Remark.
with
as,
nouns
il
fine, 'end".
advised
Most
53.
learned, whether
of Compound
compound
its
exceptional,
concept.
one
Nouns.
retain the
nouns
diately
imme-
connect
to
41
indifferently
are
la
or
substantive
every
NUMBER.
AND
gender
of their
second
component:
flat piece of cloth, table-cover.
La mappa,
of
II mappamondo,
II mondo, world.
map
There
Exceptions:
explainedby
^11
capo,
but
many,
analysisof
an
the word
Salvare, to
v/
Formation
feminine
II ragazzo,
*
"
Lo
~11
in
boy^
the
padrone, the
master,
Most
beat, thresh
out;
and
some
in
form
girl.
aunt.
"
proprietor; la padrona.
e
take
essa:
arciduchessa, archduchess.
la dottoressa.
la poetessa.
profeta,prophet ;
(3)
to
the
la ragazza,
po"ta, poet
capocaccia,
a:
^11
il
Feminine.
in
in
(2) Those in a and some
L' arciduca, the archduke;
II
usually
il
-/la gente, people-/
save
of the
masculines
(1) Many
are
^ Battere,
life-preserver.
"/salva-ge,nte,
^la lana, wool; il battilana,wool-comber.
54.
they
of the hunt,
master
are
world.
the
of those
la
profetessa.
in -tore
take
emperor;
-trice
(dottorebeing
an
exception):
y
v
L'
imperatore, the
the
imperatrice,
empress.
ITALIAN
42
(4) But
certain
form
masculines
many
relation
to
another
one
feminines
and
bearing
totallydifferent
are
in
1/ u9mo,
GRAMMAR.
la
man;
dcmna,
woman.
NUMBER.
General
55.
in
for
Masculines
in
their
form
Rules
the
Formation
and
a,
of the
masculines
pluralby changing
Plural.
and
these
feminines
terminations
to i:
II
libro,i
libri ;
il
po"ta, i poe, ti ;
lo zio,gli zii; il padre, i padri; la madre, le madri; uno
scolare,gliscolari1;la lezione,the lesson,le lezioni;P ape,
un
bee, le api,bees
the
nome,
ragazzi ;
ipocrita,hypocrite,gP ipocriti
; il mio
nomi,
(i) Also
Remarks,
(2) In
; P
i nostri
name,
my
tre
ragazzo,
our
names.
la mano,
le mani.
in -io the
nouns
ii,or j. In any
be written
plural may
only one i is pronounced:
case
i, i,
in unaccented
rLa
tua
their
*""elle
tavole, some
table.
thy
penna,
form
jLe vostre
pen.
pluralin
tables.
penne,
your
pens.
accented
the last
on
Monosyllables and nouns
sonant),
syllable(whether the word end in a vowel or conalso nouns
ending in i (stressedor unstressed)
and ie, do not change in the plural:
57.
II
drink
j
Un
brindisi,the
toasts.
many
barbagianni,
the
king
These
health,
of
words
an
vUn
owl
Italy.^1
toast.
'Fare
molti
tre
being familiar
re, the
to
the
three
brindisi, to
not
d'
re
kings,
pupilare
days.
seven
Italia,
Una
translated.
me-
ITALIAN
44
which
have
nature
of
II
i in
an
the
g omit
or
GRAMMAR.
singularonly to indicate
that i in the plural1
:
L' arancio
linguaggid' Italia.
orange-tree is beautiful; gliaranci
bello,the
"
the
belli.
sono
La
guancia
Una
rosea,
le
cacce.
cheek;
rosy
le
guance,2
sue
her
cheeks.
In the
62.
of the
or
plural and
of masculines
case
sometimes
sometimes
accentuation
in
remains
-go the
the
ity
qualin the
same
changes. In most
as
a
guide, nouns
serve
may
and
-co
cases
the
stressed
the
plays.
II castigosevero,
Un
Franco,
punishment,
severe
i Franchi.
Frank;
II
castighi.
fugco,fire;i fugchi.
But:
II medico,the
il polso,doctors
tastano
physician; i m^'dici
feel the pulse. II fisiglogo,
the physiologist;i fisiglogi.
II coll"gio,
the college
; i colle.gi.
L* equivoco, ambiguous expression,gliequivoci.3
1
See
foot-note.
This
rule
of
does
apply to
in which
the
i is accented, as
il leggio,"reading-desk"
nouns
In
pi.leggii; zio, zii; la farmacia, "pharmacy",
pi. farmacie.
like pcchio, "eye", studio, "study", etc., where
nouns
the
i although
accented
is sounded, the orthographical usage
not
varies.
now
Formerly occhj,studj were
occhi, studi are
more
commoner,
usual.
2
But
22,
Occhii, studii
are
provincie, audacie
*The
also
course
not
seen.
retain
the
unnecessary
i.
in the
and
same
adjective equivoco is treated
way,
adjectives in general follow the rule as given for nouns:
pubblico,
"public", pi. piibblici, fern, pubbliche; cattplico, "Catholic",
cattolici,
cattpliche; diplomatico, "diplomatic", diplomatici,diplomatiche.
Cf.
116.
There
Exceptions:
rule.
Words
those
in
word
and
GENDER
THEIR
NOUNS,
it
more
is advised
amico,
of
friend
than
learn
each
plural forms.
exceptions:
the penult, yet forming
to
this
singular and
The
Un
45
exceptions to
uniformly1
many
student
The
-co.
are
follow
in -go
NUMBER.
AND
mine;
ngstri amici,
our
friends.
]"cco
il
nemico,
here
enemies
say
dicono, my
in
(b) Words
is the
stressed
-co
II manico
Lo
stomaco,
della gu"rra
pig;
the
the
on
mi"i
nemici
due
lo
porci.
antepenult, yet
-chi:
his charge
i carichi.
molti fondachi.
large warehouse;
the knife-handle; i manichi.
del colte.Ho,
fondaco,
gran
II porco,
so.
enemy;
the
gli
stomach;
of
civile,the historian
stomachi.
the
Lo
stgrico
civil war;
gli stcj-
richi.
(i) Gre,co as
Remarks,
adjectivechi:
Un
Gr"co,a Greek;
Un
So
vino
also
Yet
gr"co,
all those
Gr"ci,the
the
accented
noun
takes
-ci,
sense
wines.
of
takes
'wizard'
antepenult excepting
the
on
an
as
Greeks.
Greek
in
mago
della
II traffico
sparago,
the
forms
Catalogo,
Other
student
nouns.
exceptions
is advised
to
are
so
rare
consult
The
such
46
ITALIAN
it takes
men"
in the
but
plural maghi,
i tre
magi,
wise
three
'the
expression
re
magi.1
philosopher", and
cian
"musi-
musico,
chi.
or
number
certain
63. A
GRAMMAR.
plural irregularlyin
of masculines
and
become
in
form
their
feminine.
They
are:
II
centinaio,the hundred
(about
of them
delle centinaia,hundreds
thousand
thereabouts;
migliaio,a
Un
Un
forms,
in
one
in
masculines
other
64. Many
and
II
II
braccio, the
II
I19due
le
heel;
calcagno, the
cagni).
v"ngono
due
have
migliaia.2
plural
two
in i :
one
arm;
ne
coming.
are
Un
or
hundred);
braccia
(bracci).4
calcagna (le calcagne, i
le
gingcchio,the knee;
Qcchi)
II
cal-
(igingin^cchia(gingcchie)
II labbro, the
lip; le
labbra
(ilabbri).
form
that
Observe
singular only
of greco, the
so
only
the
Mile, "a
Notice
latter
is
this
the
where
plural
noun
latter
was
these
was
is the
often
oftener
used, the
used.
In
adjective
the
less
case
often,
re-formed.
takes
thousand",
that
latter
are
all
also le mila.
nouns
designating number
in
rather
seen.
Centinaj,migliaj, are sometimes
4
The plural most
commonly used is placed first. Braccia, gin^cployed
generally em(notice this latter in e) are
chia, labbra, orecchie
The
tion
terminatwo
to denote
etc., of the same
body.
arms,
Compare German
a
(e) has here a sort of collective sense.
vague
way.
nouns
beginning with
Ge.
II
AND
NUMBER.
le membra
member;
the
membro,
GENDER
THEIR
NOUNS,
47
(membrej, (i mem-
bri).
L'
orecchio,the
the
L' ugvo,
In
(gligssi).
(osse),
the
cases
some
meaning
(orecchia),(gli
orecchi).
(gliugvi).1
le U9va
egg;
Remark.
in
le gssa
bone;
le orrecchie
ear;
forms
two
entiated
differ-
are
II
profits.
frutto,fruit; le frutta,fruits; i frutti,
II
legno,wood
ships; le legna,firewood.
legni,carriages,
walls.
wall; i muri, walls; le mura, city-
II muro,
II
membro,
Le
braccia
; i
the member.
of the
members
of
The
umano.
arms
commissione
Una
body.
human
committee
membri.
del cgrpo
mgmbri
sono
di
are
sette
members.
seven
But:
del cgrpo.
membra
Le
of the
The
(allthe members)
members
body.
II
dio,god
the
article is always
gli)moglie,wife
La
L' ugmo,
man
le
mogli
gliugmini.
PLURAL
OF
NOUNS.
COMPOUND
Most
world;
of the
mappamondi.
II
mappamondo,
II
parafugco,fire-screen; i parafugchi.
There
are
map
other
many
Observe
that
plural in
a.
extended
to
such
In
such
other
are
the
words.
nouns
usually
i forms
which
Latin
arc
ma}-
take
neuters
later.
But
the two
which
the
plurals.
their
have
f" imati"
has
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
48
Exceptions
are
of which
most
many,
explained by
be
however,
There
analysis of
an
may,
word
the
(cf.53):
II
of the hunt
capocaccia,master
; i
II battilana,wool-comber
II
; i
capicaccia.
battilana.
i portalg'ttere.
the letter-carrier;
portal"ttere,
the
are
as
such, while
in other
But
in
in others
less
one
or
In other
life.
its individual
or
cases
both
lost
has
of them
more
complete:
i sordomuti.
But:
mezza-luna, crescent;
La
le mezze-lune.
and
{Exercises X
VERBS.1
REGULAR
in
irregular
are
himself
familiarize
prefer to
tenses
I and
do
so
of the
II),
Italian knows
of such
are
the
matters
placed before
first with
take
the
present
infinitive
the
auxiliaries
desirable
regular forms.
before
this
for the
The
one.
parts, moods,
given.
for
to
granted
that
the
the
who
present
Exercises
in
student
no
a,
student
Teachers
been
taken
be
because
given (Vocabulary
participialforms are also given
being
is
the
Chapter V
have
isolated
It
in
it is considered
and
auxiliaries
and
vocabularies.
may
end
vowel
regular verbs
The
latter
to
The
-re.
1
Italian verbs
XI.)
IV.
CHAPTER
67. All
1"
or
other
of
tion
explana-
VERBS.
REGULAR
(accented
the
throughout
recurs
conjugation.
Verbs
their characteristic
according to
divided
are
into:
vowel
verbs,
(i) -are
(2) -ere
Mostrare.
first conjugation.
or
conjugation.
verbs, or third conjugation:
To show, point out.
Temere, to fear.
P"r'-ere verbs,
and
(3) -ire
Partire,to
dere, to lose.
role
68. The
the
between
The
tables.
vowel
what
and
have
main
the
seen,
seen
in the
ence
differing
follow-
characteristic
follows
terminations
the
stem,
various
various
the
conjugations,is
vowel
characteristic
{alsoto divide).
characteristic
vowel,
set out
go away,
we
as
second
or
played by
constitutes,
which
The
vowel, which
This
i.
or
characteristic vowel,
the
is called
unaccented),
or
49
the
to
by adding
stem.
VERBS.
OF
TABLE
formed
are
INFINITIVE.
Mostr
are
Tern
P"rd
ere
"ndo2
Present
mostr
ando-
tern
Past
mostr
ato3
tern uto4
"to
2
Participle
Participle
Sometimes
transitive
"to
Part ire1
ere
perd
endo
part endo-'
perd
uto
part
ito
depart".
There
are
also forms
mostr
ante, tern
really representing
participles (the forms in
much
less frequent, and
which
are
being gerunds),
be regarded as
verbal
Iente for -ente
adjectives. Cf. III.
may
(=endo) appears
only in finiente, impediente, leniente, obbediente,
the
though
Latin
-ando, -endo
partoriente,sometimes
3
aperiente and
moriente.
The
etc.
For
ITALIAN
5"
GRAMMAR.
Indicative
PRESENT.
I1 show,
mpstr o1
tern
showing,
am
perd o
etc.
part
o, I
depart,or
part isce
or
part iamo
part ite
part
ono
or
part iscono
IMPERFECT.
showed,
showing,
was
etc.
mostr
ava4
tern
eva5
mostr
avi
tern
evi
part ivi
mostr
ava
tern
eva
part iva
mostr
avamo
tern
evamo
part ivamo
mostr
avate
tern
evate
part ivate
mostr
avano
tern
evano
part ivano
The
is omitted.
subject pronoun
Cf. 88.
For
the
use
of these
forms
is
of the
imperfect: io
temea,
now
It
evident
being sufficiently
much
the
more
that
numerous,
conjugation.
i.e.,most
-ire verbs
have
passed
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
52
Remarks
Regular
on
in order
ending
of the First
in
Conjugation.
and
-care
insert
-gare
to mark
the
to
forget;
dimentichi, do
non
you
in which
merely
where
the termination
Cominciare,
1
The
keep
the
vowel, which
sounded
next
to
to
c,
is a,
contains
begin,
an
drop
i
Cf. 16 and
Cf. 22,
third, the
third
59.
foot-note
3" and
61.
with
the
the
before
i is
the
this i in parts
an
e3:
comincio,
commence;
by
subjunctive present is indicated
the
first
vowel,
conjugation taking
of the
or
anything;
pay
soft
sc
g,
desidero
non
pay;
forget;
not
inserted
an
g before
or
Dimenticare,
Verbs
am
be-
teristic
change of the charac-
that
theretofore
acteristic
char-
REGULAR
VERBS.
53
(3) Verbs
before
an
in -chiare
and
only
Picchiare,to knock;
but
I shall
picchier^,
picchi(notpicchii),thou knockest,
knock.1
to counsel; conConsigliare,
let him advise.
advise; consigli,
he would
siglier"bbe,
(4) Of other verbs in -iare those retain this i:
(a) In which it has in the infinitive a secondary accent,
the secondary accent
becoming in the indicative present
first singular the principal
one:
Desiare,2to desire; io desio,tu desii. Spiare,to spy, io
spio,che spiino.
there
with
another
might be confusion
(b) In which
verb:
Odiare,
to
hate,
tu
gdii,not
90H, which
latter
"
=
thou
nearest"
(from udire).
strabilisentenziare,
(c) Appropriare,contrariare,
spaziare,
show
the ii. Others
also commonly
are
drop the i before
an
ending beginning with i, retainingit before e:
tu anngi,tu annoierai.
Annoiare,3to annoy;
lable
(5) Certain verbs having an open o in the first syldiphthongize it where it receives the accent (i.e.,
in the three persons
of the singularand third person
plural of the present indicative and subjunctiveand
in the imperative second
:
singular)
person
Giocare,4to play, io giuoco.
1
The
second
That
this
i has
is
the
verb
This
i is
Besides
that
i in
picchien) is distinctlyheard.
is evident
a
secondary accent
contracted
form
from
the
fact
of desiderare.
really a semi-consonant.
giocare,arrolare, infocare, rotare,
and
sonare
exhibit
ITALIAN
54
Remarks
on
(1) Verbs
70.
keep the
to
Regular
or
of the
in
before
latter
Second
and
-cere
g soft before
or
in which
o,
Verbs
ending
not, however,
a
GRAMMAR.
the
Conjugation.
the
an
of the past
participle,
beginning with
terminations
case
insert
-gere
g becomes
or
hard
these
forms
present,
given
in the
for
table
the
part, the
most
for the
preterit. The
in -ei, -e, -erono
are
responding
reallythe regularones, corto the -ai of the first conjugation,-ii of the
The followingverbs and their compounds
take
forms
third.
mi"tere, pascere,
prudere, rip"-
ere
change, also
this
and
provare
probably,
may
and
This
these
not
said
be
1
of this
Notare,
trovare.
to
be
and
mescere
are
Of
the
"to
with
confused
of votare
forms.
rinnovare
and
flected
frequentlyin-
tonare, and,
notice",
nuotare,
empi-
does,
never
"to
swim".
rarely,
in
The
order,
same
vuotare.
the
irregular some
exhibit
them
exhibiting
all,as,
all
crescere,
cresco,
cresciuto
conosciuto
Irregular Verbs.
2
The
entirely regular are:
battere, cedere, compftere, credere,
fendere, gemere, godere, mescere, miftere, pascere, p"ndere, pfrdere,
ripftere,splfndere,temere, tondere,vfnricevere,rifl^ttere,
premere,
of this
and
also
conjugation. See
fmpiere when
cdmpiere
dere,
later that the great majority of the irreguIt will be seen
Table.
lar
of this conjugation.
'-ere verbs
verbs are
Table
of
Many
of these
verbs
are
defective.
VERBS.
REGULAR
(3)
verbs
Some
present the
55
in
having an open o
same
phenomenon
remarked
under
(5):
69,
Cu^cere
m^vere, to
Remarks
-o,
or
of
Third
the
Conjugation.
verbs
the
Mu^vere
coceva.
irregular.
Regular Verbs
indicative
having
otherwise
are
on
Most
C119C0,
moveva.
muQVO,
move;
verbs
These
71.
cgcere, to cook;
or
the model
Capire,
understand.
to
capisco, I understand,
capiamo
capisci
capite
capisce
capiscono
capisca, I may
understand,
capiamo
capisca
capiate
capisca
capiscano
capisci,understand
(thou).1
take
followingregular verbs
(a) The
the
forms
only:
sleep; fuggire,to fly,flee;partirein the sense
sentire, to feel, hear; servire, to
depart"; pentire,2
Dormire,
of "to
to
sortire,3in
serve;
the
of
"to
the
Latin
sense
go
out"; vestire, to
clothe.
1
forms
These
their
to
are
derived
in the
use
from
present only,
"I
inchoatives, hence
understand,
"
am
haps
per-
beginning
understand".
2
Pentire
Sortire, "to
Notice
forms.
takes
is
the
reflexive verb.
draw
that
-isco forms.
lots",
in
both
as
Sec
106.
partire,"to
cases
divide",
it is the
takes
the
transitive verb
-isco
that
56
ITALIAN
followingverbs
usually take -isco
(b) The
but
Abborrire,
take
may
tion,
termina-
either
to
abhor; bollire,to boil; inghiottire,
to
languire,
low;
GRAMMAR.
languish; mentire,
to
bellow; nutrire,
lie; muggire,
to
nourish; ruggire, to
to
also
verbs
in
swalto
sorbire, to
roar;
avvertire,
-vertire,as
divertire,etc.1
72.
more
(ifexpressed) or
pronoun
Voi
is
verb
show;
mostrate, you
usually
mostrerete
voi?
Shall
your
brother
you
show?
Non
partiravgstro frat"llo?Will
not
go
away?
The
73.
that
express
which
time
which
is
finished
il libro
CHAPTER
AUXILIARY
The
the
especially
A
number
of
Cf. 226
time,
was
showing
the
Italian
are
XIII.)
V.
VERBS.
and
aver
e, "to
have".
in
Both
are
irregular,
first.
as
irregular verbs, such
aprire, coprire, offrire,
its compounds,
also belong to this class.
See
Table.
2
and
certain
quando entrg.
(Exercises XII
but
preteritto
the
he entered.
when
74.
at
ished,
unfin-
quite past2:
Io mostravo
book
was
express
228.
AUXILIARY
VERBS.
57
INFINITIVE.
l"ssere
Sieno
These
This
forms
and
These
Cf. 174
is also used.
regular.
forms
and
are
177.
are
second
plural are
regular,averfi being
regular.
contracted
into
avrei,
etc.
5*
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
IMPERATIVE.
abbi
abbiate
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Imperfect.1
abbia
abbi
75. Each
avessi
(abbia)
abbia
avesse
abbiamo
avessimo
abbiate
aveste
abbiano
avessero
of these
stato
Sono
state
Aveva
qui
le Sue
Use
76.
Following
mostrare
is
tenses
here.
sore,lle? Have
of
of all transitive
tenses
compound
had
He
your
had
the money.
AuxiliaryVerbs.
forms
past participle
+ the
Avere
been
il denaro.
avuto
its
itself.
I have
qui.
forms
verbs
by compounding with
Sono
avessi
synopsis of
the
compound
intransitive
of most
and
the
compound
verbs.
of
tenses
Infinitive.
mostrato,
avere
to
Past
participle.
ave,ndo mostrato,
Past
indefinite.
ho
Pluperfect.
Future
mostrato,
aveva
have shown.
having shown,
/ hare
shown,
etc.
etc.
,
anterior.
etc.
Conditional
anterior.
/ should
avre,i mostrato,
shown,
have
etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
indefinite,
Past
Pluperfect.
77.
Essere
tenses
1
Which
+ the
abbia
avessi
mostrato,
/ may
/
have
and
the
verbs
reciprocal
regular throughout.
shown,
etc.
past participleforms
of all reflexive
is
mostrato,
etc.
compound
and
of
some
60
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Past indefinite.
Pluperfect.
Remarks,
g'ssereis
is not
I
that
observed
the
frequent than
more
"
It will be
(i)
am
mostro.1
A
(2)
passive always
If the
with
with
verb
be
agrees with
intransitive
103
it may,
the
by
of "to
the
but
the
"ssere to form
subject of the verb.
nature
(compounding
have")
it also agrees
of reflexive
case
does
not
amata.
always,agree.
reciprocal
(Cf.
She
is much
beloved.
Ci siamo
amati.
We
have
loved
one
another.
require a
form
or
114.)
|)molto
Sono
with
past participleused
their
Verbs.
that
direct
Stare
and
andare, however,
progressive action.
Cf. 81
are
(a) and
sometimes
(J) (1).
used
to
express
the
6l
VKRBS.
AUXILIARY
desinare, to dine.
sbadigliare,to
dormire,
sonnecchiare,
sleep.
passeggiare,to walk.
to
The
79.
which
andare
to go
take
to
sternutare, to
sjumber, doze,
sneeze.
necessarilyintransitive
commonest
always
yawn.
are
"'ssere
morire
to die
.
to be
born,
arrivare, to arrive.
nascere,
avvenire, to happen.
parere, to appear.
cadere,
pervenire,to arrive.
to fall.
comparire,
cdrrere, to
rimanere,
to appear.
uscire,to
venire,to
certain
intransitive
verbs
with
sometimes
and
avere
go out.
come.
of
number
with
sometimes
the
to remain.
riuscire,to succeed.
run.
divenire,to become.
(a)
is denoted,
action
verbs
"ssere
"ssere,
when
avere
the
denotes
pound
com-
state
or
With
the verb
avere
resultingfrom action.
to complete
has usually an
object,often an infinitive,
its meaning, with "ssere it has not.
condition
Verbs
80.
to
either
take
to dwell.
fuggire,to flee.
giungere,to arrive.
invecchiare,to
grow
ritornare, to
gu"rra
"
La
gu"rra
ha
ceased
to
to escape.
scendere,
to descend.
old.
cessata.
cessato
devastate
return.
scappare,
to live.
vivere,
La
perire,to perish.
degenerare,to degenerate.
dimorare,
are
"'ssere
to pass.
passare,
cease.
to grow.
crescere,
or
avere
to depart,divide,
partire,
to walk.
camminare,
cessare,
which
the
The
war
di devastare
lands.
ceased.
has
i
paesi.
The
war
has
62
ITALIAN
Other
81.
GRAMMAR.
Other
Verbs
verbs
sometimes
Used
Auxiliaries.
as
of "ssere for
instead
used
parlando.
Come
sta ?
How
Sta male.
"to
be
are
how
you,
do you
to do
about
just going to
am
venne
L'ombre.llo
means
infinitive)
an
thing".
the formation
do?
well.
or
which
is sometimes
of the
simple tenses
The
trovato.
it.
show
umbrella
in
used
passive1:
found.
was
talking.
was
is not
He
Stare per
expresses
frequently:
state
arrestato.
Rimango
arrested
am
remain
in
of arrest).
(i) A
state
condition:
or
andate
Che
cercando
(Literally, "What
(2) Duty
Non
va
or
to express:
What
do you
go
are
looking
you
for?
seeking?")
obligation:
detto cosi.
That
must
not
be said, it cannot
be
expressed.
so
Se
aveva
well he
incorragito.If
fattob"ne,andava
ought
been
to have
he
had
dene
encouraged.
"
Venire
venuto
2
the
expresses
the
Notice
action
stato
indicated
trovato, would
present participle.
when
be barbarous.
it expresses
state
takes
AUXILIARY
L' amicizia
1/
amore
coltivata
va
63
VERBS.
tutta
con
la
possibiledelicatezza.
superato cgllaforza.
va
with
all
must
Frienclsliip
must
possibledelicacy. Love
tivated
cul-
be
be
quered
con-
by force.
82.
"to
'to
Dovere,
owe",
potere,
sapere,
know",
be
"make",
classed
be
must
'to
able", volere,
and
as
sometimes
modal
iaries,
auxil-
'
Doveva
I had
partire.
Avr"i dovuto
Non
could
See
Compare
One
non
Table
of
the
also
are
have
gone.
I go ?
go.
swim.
sapeva
ancora
discorrere.
The
child
Irregular Verbs.
German
complete
modal
auxiliaries
kbnnen.
mbgen.
devo
etc.,
in their
conjugations.
partire perhaps on rising to go,
say
going immediately.
would
without
to
yet talk.
not
which
ought
I cannot
so, nuotare.
II bambino
partire.
Pgssopartire? May
Vggliopartire. I will
to go.
dovrei
tire
par-
64
ITALIAN
The
Remark.
GRAMMAR.
abilityrendered in the
sometimes
idiomatically
idea
same
of
examples by sapere is
expressed by g'ssere
bugno a:
il pianofgrte.
Sono
bugna a sonare
last two
play
can
the
piano.
let",
auxiliaries in such
are
abito, "I
un
going
am
had
(i)
in
molto
bgl tgmpo,
(2)
where
in:
"There
da fare.
used
by
is
84. Avere
avere
in need
need.
of, to
to be
"to
avere
paura,
sete, to be thirsty.
avere
avere
caldo, to be
matter
was
1
For
paura?
Were
avere
you
to
vergogna,
qualche
be
cold.
be
afraid.
to be ashamed.
cosa,
note
afraid?
Ng, aveva
4.
to
be
the
with.
hungry.
ci, cf. 36,
C'e
bottles.
be":
freddo, to
avere
Avevate
sono
do.
to
avere
fame,
warm.
ci
c'1^,
followingexpressionswhere
avere
hungry.
undici,
translated
be
three
are
le
sono
g'ssere
of Avere.
Uses
verb
be
pressions
ex-
ago":
But
must
great deal
in the
is used
the
are",
vi e, vi sono,
Idiomatic
time
long
idea
in such
be"
o'clock"
bottiglie. There
There
the
express
weather".
one
is", "there
tre
sono
molto
fare, "I
fatto
hg
"to
fa, "it is
tempo
"it is beautiful
"cco is not
Vi
to
verb
the
"it is
" 1' una,
"it is eleven o'clock".
is used
it be";
is used
Fare
English by
as
fa
to
it done".
Remarks,
rendered
done", "let
fare, "let it be
have
lasciare, "to
and
make",
"to
do",
Cf.
212
(2).
fame.
No,
PERSONAL
ha?
C9s'
Non
65
PRONOUNS.
I19 nie,nte.
What
is wrong
with
you?
Nothing.
Also:
(a) In expressionsdenoting
Che
ha?
eta
How
age:
is he?
old
s"tte anni.
Ha
He
is
seven.
(6) With
"
have
to
Hg
da
and
da
infinitive to express
an
to
parlare.
I must
speak.
da partire. He
Aveva
had
{Exercises
to
go.
and
XIV
CHAPTER
PERSONAL
obligation,
"
XV.)
VI.
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL
DISJUNCTIVE
PRONOUNS.
85. There
are
(1) the
The
unstressed.
from
This
them
fact that
the
pronouns.
verb
the
that
therefore
in Italian
tonic
verb,
of
personal pronouns:
or
tonic
kinds
two
be
may
or
may
separated in
appear
without
atonic
the
a
or
tence
sen-
verb.
are
not
Remark.
may
1
be
Which
The
made
nature
clearer
by
of these
the
two
classes
of
pronouns1]
Latin
simply the different forms of one and the same
different
word, developed under
circumstances,
me
emphasized
mi.
Cf. the
different
giving me,
unemphatic
pronunciation of
"me"
in "give it to me",
and "him"
English
"give it to him",
and "give it to me,
not
to him".
are
66
"
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
Io
are
"I!
mgstro.
are
of
All
Che
showing."
am
C9sa
these
Io!
showing?"
showing?'
you
myself."
Mi
is
"Who
mostra?
"What
are
Chi
showing"
am
mgstra?
showing
English,
But in
disjunctiveforms.
showing myself" ; Che co,sa fai?" What
Bistro, I am
showing myself to
doing?' Mi ti m9Stro, "I am
you
Italian
in
rendered
the
by
"
you",
is
there
in Italian
no
laid upon
stress
conjunctive forms
the
are2:
noi, we,
io, I
therefore
Pronouns.
disjunctivepronouns
The
pronoun,
used.
are
Disjunctive Personal
86.
the
us
me
me,
voi,you
tu, thou
te, thee
eglino,6loro,essi,they
lui,esso, he
egli,3
loro,essi,them
lui,esso, him
elleno,5loro,esse, they
essa,5she (you)
ella,4le,i,
loro,esse, them
essa,5 her (you)
le,i,
se, himself,herself,themselves
87. These
They
forms
always
are
more
verb.
(b) As
Or
The
emphatic.
used:
are
less
or
or
governed by
stesso.
me
personal
are
pronouns
the
left
forms
in Italian.
3
Sometimes
shortened
into ei
Sometimes
shortened
to
la vi
5
sara.
Be
Ella, l"i,are
Seldom
used
careful
used
to
for
in modern
gli.
la: Ti raccomando
una
good carriage.
you", but essa is
get
"
or
Italian.
"
bupna s^dia.
If there
not.
"
is
one.
Se
68
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
"you",
in
for the
plural.
At
use:
tu
V9i
qSinS-
!V9i
JLoro1
Plur
Ella1
[Up
'you") is
(generallyto be translated
relative, an intimate friend,
used in addressing a near
or
a
child; also in elevated or poeticallanguage and
or
scorn
to express anger
; voi as a pluralin addressing
these
Of
two
tu
relatives,friends, or
more
or
children, also
singularsomewhat
tu
than
Its
is also
use
frequent
as
vants.
ser-
in the
in poetry, and
frequentlyemployed than
Italy it is more
in speaking with strangers.
Ella even
Excepting in
the south the ordinary form of address is Ella, plural
of the third performs
These
Loro.
were
originally
son,
such
antecedent
as
Signoria,
representingsome
Highness", Eccell"nza, Altezza,
Vossignoria, "Your
All such words
etc.
being feminine, the pronoun was
(Cf.89.)
naturallyfeminine.2
of
south
Vossignoria vuol
Ella " servita.
(a)
but
use,
Your
cenare?
She
is served
Highness wishes
(i.e.,
"you
grammatical form
form, has
Le,i,reallya dative
in
supplantingElla, especially
Loro
are
(Lor signori,Lor
come
to sup
served").
in this case,
into
common
conversation.
signore) is
the
corresponding
plural:
Loro
You
verranno.
will
come.
ella, lei,loro.
initial,
2
An
adjective or participlequalifyingElla, Lei takes
Thus
one
of the person
represented by that pronoun.
in speaking to a man:
L"i " troppo bu9no {notbu9na).
1
Also
written
with
small
the
gender
would
say
PERSONAL
DISJUNCTIVE
This
of the
use
in
originto
extended
more
speaking.
He
should
mio, che
figliucilo
tu
of you,
mia
learn
the
one
to him
eigner
for-
need
t" "
or
recognize all
of meaning conveyed by
to
practiceconfine
in
It is the
now.
himself
to
what
will
the
forms:
should
but is much
only
addressed
shades
the
the
and
sponds
corre-
person
usage,
really formal
not
of address
and
second
formal
own
to hear
but
them,
for the
is likelyever
forms
the
our
and
ordinary form
when
third
69
PRONOUNS.
diventerai?
0
son?
my
O
speranza.
my
And
figli
mi"i, voi
children, you
che
siete stati la
have
who
come
be-
been
my
hope.
L^i,1Signor Bardi,
How
state,poverino?
Come
do you
sta?
come
do, you
And
man?
poor
do
how
do,
you
B.?
Mr.
bene
Stanno
Me, te,
92.
con:
Loro
tutti?
are
often
se
all well?
you
with
compounded
"with
meco,
me",
is
Occasionallycon
etc.
Are
seco,
placed also
the
sition
prepo-
by himself"2,
before
this
pound3
com-
Vi"ni meco
(a) Esso
also be used
may
with
Come
(con meco).
me.
redundantly with
(con) noi,voi,lui,lei,loro:
noi.
Restate
con
esso
Stay with us.
lui se n' and" nel giardino.
E
esso
con
meco,
teco,
seco;
him
with
away
This
pronoun
others, the
into the
showing
"she"
he
went
garden.
is omitted
context
And
under
whether
the
circumstances
same
the
verb
is to
be
as
the
translated
subject.
I understand,
I
lui: Ho
Seco
con
inteso, parlerQ seco.
may
him.
shall speak with
Corresponding forms of the pluralare the
of noi and voi, but
not
and vpsco (compounds
poeticalnosco
rare,
"you", "he",
with
or
as
of the
3
Cf.
archaic
nos,
vos.
ITALIAN
70
of
whole
Venite
Noi
voialtri.
(or noialtri)Romani
all of you.
me,
siamo
reflexive
The
se
is
The
objectiveonly.
io medesimo.
Andr"
stessi
Loro
you
mans
Ro-
subject
rendered
the
to
pronoun
Ma
We
altieri.
proud.
are
forms
ing
speak-
with
Come
noi, voi, in
to
class of persons1
meco
altri
93.
frequently added
is
(b) Altri
GRAMMAR.
I shall go
themselves
qui. They
sono
myself.
signore,Loro medesime
said so yourselves.
l'hanno
here.
are
detto!
But, ladies!
But:
L' ha
fatto da
Sono
partitida
(or: of their
own
being in
se.
They
free
will).
gone
by
away
(herself).
themselves
"It",
94.
He
se.
the
the
in Italian2:
It is
vosotros,
Cf
Spanish
might
2
But
also be
somewhat
(86, foot-note
3):
distinct
meaning
now
of
the
simply
impersonal "it"
teco
may
be
sense:
neuter
is
In
would
ser"bbe b"lla. "That
3
This
"
expression, non
used
the
in Italian.
hearer, which
by gli
cortesia
of
"It
taineer
moun-
rendered
being rude
77).
"we",
Tennessee
courtesy to be
with thee, is courtesy"). Ella (la)is also used
27,
case
adduced.
less
Gli
it?
have
pronouns
"you'uns"
"we'uns",
The
"you".
nosotros,
raining,isn't
be nice
vero,
It is
call is rendered
'In
truth
in
sort
it is so".
La
"
(sarcastically)
literally"is it not true", is
mere
in
on
the
stantly
con-
part of
English by repeatingthe
verb.
PERSONAL
DISJUNCTIVK
for
forms
(a) With
might
be
in the
case
uncertainty
some
of
form
verbal
the
almost
the
constant
as
ject
sub-
the
where
and
emphasis (redundant
of
also
Observe
construction,
the
and
with
sake
the
repeated for
then
to
as
predicate pronouns
really understood
is
71
the
used
is often
PRONOUNS.
struction)
con-
of
use
Lei,
"you",
che
Costui
"
(91 (a)) :
nominative
as
altro
un
That
me.
is my
who
one
other
self.
Ma
te, tu
di
and
his brothers
Sta
are
me.
But
was
you
you.
are
younger
one
English
Sono
io.1
the
Le,i!
studious
lui
come
as
he
You
non
struction,
con-
with
is like the
used
made
only :
one!
I know
no
one
else
(is).
French
in
expressed,
verb
no
person
altri.
conosco
they.
is
unfortunate
(Exercises XVI
Contrast
It is
there
third
of the
pronouns
Studiosi
oftenest
expressed
verb
construction
essi.
Sono
It is I.
Sfortunata
oftener
the
to
as
one:
(b) Absolutely,i.e.,where
with
is
it, the
near
pronoun
he
uncertainty
no
there
i.e.,where
only
well
you
is
there
where
Both
cortesi.
molto
sono
polite.
very
Are
b"ne L"i ?
But
lui
che
suo,ifrat"lli
Tanto
thought
I.
than
as
He
credeva
Esso
c'est
conversation
in the
forms
moi.
than
for the
and
objective
The
in
XVII.)
writing.
third
person.
for
The
subjective
substitution
Cf. below,
(b).
is
is
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
12
VII.
CHAPTER
REFLEXIVE
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL
CONJUNCTIVE
VERBS.
conjunctivepersonal
their name
indicates,cannot be separated
as
pronouns,
of which
the verb
from
they are the object,either
direct or indirect,without
a
preposition.
The
found
forms
cusative
correspond to the unstressed acand dative cases.
They are :
particlesor
96. Pronominal
mi
te
me,
disjunctive
me,
myself,to
me,
me,
to myself
self
thy-
'
"
lo1
gli
5=3
la
lui,esso, him, it
"
a
"
essa,
l"i,
"
le
lui,to him
"=
to
le,i,
her
her
"
si
se,
"=
to
ci2
vi
"
le
"
"
from
2
used
II is sometimes
the
Ne
in
poetry.
article
selves
our-
loro, to them
and
us, to
yourself,yourselves,
to yourselves
to you, to yourself,
loro,them, to them (masculine)
(feminine)
loro,them, to them
Italian
to themselves
himself,to herself,
"
himself, herself,themselves,
"
gliorli3=
loro4
se,
(you)
(to you)
in
Both
place of
forms
especially in older
carefullydistinguished
this lo,
be
must
il,lo.
used
is sometimes
instead
of
this ci,
especially in
older
Italian.
3
Gli is the
instead
*
The
of li before
right
indirect
of
this form
to
be
called
conjunctive may
be
dis-
CONJUNCTI
these
To
97.
YK
PKRSONAT.
be
must
I'ROXOIXS.
added
the
73
verbs:
pronominal adthem, some, any,
vede.
Mi
da
Ti dicono.
He
sees
un
fiore.
parlavi?
Did
give him
talking
to
Vi
us.
to
him.4
Ci
washing
am
to
me)
He
They
saw
do.
Le
self,
him-
sees
parlano.
I seldom
Gli
ink-stand.
Si vede.
Si
self.
my-
flower.
him.
see
the
cercano.
of it.
some
me
him)
her?
di rado.
vedeva
I have
(orn'hq).
another.
Lo vedo.
speak to
people see
one
lavo.
gives
you
is seen,
he
for
He
tell thee.
They
il calamaio.
Mi
me.
They
are
looking
are
Ne
you.
ho
(some).
N.B.
all
must
emphasized these pronouns
replaced by the corresponding disjunctiveforms,
vede me
not
non
sees
te, "he
me,
you"; partir9
be
as:
To
be
lui.
con
Remarks
98. (1)
and
ne,
sometimes
are
be
Lo
the
on
Conjunctive
less often
and
used
Pronouns.
where
in
other
conjunctives,
English they would
pleonastic:
(cf. 99V
always follow the verb
used
without
a
preposition: Gli dico,
loro, or
(still more
emphatic) dico a
It must
puted.
but
dico
It is loro
junctive,
dis-
(more
phatic)
em-
lpro, "I
tell
or
them".
1
=
French
In
the
All
before
Cf. 104
This
It may
also
when
and
in
as
meaning
i.
and
lp is
both
one
represent
forms
forms
French
y.
elision,lo,gli,la, le
subject
="
when
the same
circumstances
you", "to you") under
articles; mi, ti,si,vi, ne before any vowel, ci only
monosyllabic
(these last
as
("inde).
en
function
to
are
Cf. 36.
105.
of the
a
whole
very
few
clause:
neuter
forms
Sperava
che
left to
the
verr^bbe
ma
Italian.
non
lp
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
74
"
stanco?
Are
libri.1 We
dei
I have
have
the
seen
Lo
tired?
you
Ne
am.
t"Vola
La
books.
some
sono,
abbiamo
Pho
vista.
table.
The
neck.
her
Si ruppe
Mi
lost
often
are
would
be
Glielo2
his
broken
friend
leg.
of mine
died, I
has
ci,vi, ne
He
Ci vede.
He
sees
pronouns
adverbs3
has
is
reallya dative,
English a preposition
in
I will look
as
ne
as
which
necessary
cercherg.
N' ha.
of
one
particles,
used togetherwhere
(4) Ci,vi,and
from
has
friend.
(3) Two
He
amico.
mcjrtoun
"
have
gamba.
una
by
Ci
us.
va.
Ne
some.
the
to be
distinguished
context:
He
is
going there.
vi"ne. He is coming
from
there.
(5) A
verb
pronouns
"I
sapeva,
would
you
accompanied by
maybe
only
hoped
when
would
you
come).
is
one
come,
una
conjunctive
two
did not
also
are
know
it"
in
neuter
an
in-
that
(i.e.,
idiomatic
ce
ne
perdonava
feminine
neuter
1
The
indeed,
yes
is
"he
treated
us
more
we
with
The
the
ently
appar-
Latin
adverb.
2Cf.
all alike".
explained by comparison
plural.
repetitionhere
much
mean
form
una,
101.
the
Etymologically
words
arc
identical.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
76
(b) The
glior
conjunctivepronouns
when
101) double
see
verbal
initial
their
sonant
con-
which
it
the
"and
(literally,
talk
to
form
to
Mostrandolo
to
been
having
it
shown")
come
me.
se,istato
In
obbedi"nte.
it you
showing
obedient.
were
Dammi
la
condurti
vcjglio
mano,
the infinitive
may
sentirlo
Desidero
him.
infinitive
transitive
dependent
it follows
me
may
depending
either
be
upon
united
to
or
that
sentire.
lo desidero
or
intransitive
(Since an
Give
spasso.
talk to them.
conjunctive pronoun
Remark.
us
walk.
to
you
verb
the
where
I desire to hear
take
cannot
direct object,
infinitive is intransit
dependent
Therefore
lo vedo
but
vie,ne,
venire, or
venendo,
lo vedo
vedo
never
this freedom
lo vedo
or
is not
must
che
always
be distinguished
When
(a)
always
must
1
This
Da + ci
2
In
dacci,
these
as
as
with
go
doubling
=
principalverb
the
in
the
impersonal
the
pronoun
infinitive:
composition
is not
confined
to
this
compound.
etc.
in all the
above
3=condurre
is
tje.
compounds
unaccented.
the verbal
form
is
cented
ac-
PERSONAL
CONJUNCTIVE
sentirlo.
Bisogna
One
PRONOUNS.
him
hear
must
77
lo
(not
bisogna
sentire).
(b)
the
in Italian
Where
principalverb
and
with
the
must
Andr"
go
farlo.
(c) Where
object of
which
(d) In
infinitive has
its
keeps
Gli fa
He
has
and
object attached
l^ggerlo. He
to
verb3
one
Mi
Loro
Me
io
him
loro.
loro.
He
I.e.,without
vedere
and
out
you
showed
also
may
to
to
you
take
Having pointed
you
near
Mostra-
me.
rule
not
are
common.
un-
them.
out
to
them.
him.
they
their i to
accompany
direct:
me.
to
change
infinitive
the
him.
see
you
I drew
fare
it.2
read
showing
was
dependent
usually does:
it,and
Infringements of this
last:
regularlycomes
gliaccostai.
i.
the
object,the object of
He
Mostratovi
is fare and
before
lasciare
Having pointed
Vi mostrava
it.
do
me
conjunctive pronouns
indirect object precedes the
the
Exception
tive,
dependent infini-
two
vi mostrava.
tomivi.
andr" a fare).
it:
makes
lascer9vederlo.
Where
of the
direct
placed
ioo.
noun
pro-
already a pronominal
seen
has
principalverb
indirect
is made
it (not lo
do
to
also that
pronominal
the
infinitive,
directly1:
it governs
the
between
stand
infinitive:
it takes
own
case
dependent
principalverb
Me
its
I shall go
the
its
prepositionmust
e.
preposition between
followed
are
Gli
and
it and
by lo,
the infinitive.
Cf.
ib) above.
2
have
This
is
an
extension
direct
only one
object of fa. This
3Cf. 98 (5).
of the
principlethat a
object,lfggere being in the
construction
is found
transitu
exam]
also in French.
verb
le the
can
direct
78
ITALIAN
"to
and
her"
glie,and
GRAMMAR.
written
one
as
the
forms
same
word
with
come
be-
the other
:
particle
lo
Exercises
ve
and
XVIII
ne
parlo; glienepar-
XIX.
Verbs.
Reflexive
Infinitive.
participle. vest"ndosi
vestitosi
participle.
Present
Past
1
"
The
I shall
context
speak
will in such
to him
about
show
cases
it"
"
or
I shall
the
whether
speak
to
her
meaning
about
is
it".
REFLEXIVE
VERBS.
79
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
mi
ve,sta,etc.
Imperfect.
mi
etc.
vestissi,
Tenses.1
Compound
INDICATIVE.
Past indefinite.
mi
Pluperfect.
mi2
anterior.
Past
anterior.
Future
Conditional.
vestito,etc.
sono
"ra vestito,etc.
mi
fui
mi
sar" vestito,etc.
mi
sar"ivestito,etc.
vestito,etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
indefinite.
Past
mi
sia
mi
fossi
Pluperfect.
Remarks
As
the
est
same
vestito,etc.
Reflexive
on
Verbs.
flexive
already observed
(77), all reverbs form their compound tenses
from "'ssere
+
past participle.The past participle
agrees oftenof the
with the direct object (which is of course
number
and gender as the subject)3:
103.
La
has
vestito,etc.
signora
lady
told
been
mi
disse
she
that
me
che
had
Ess"ndosene vergognata
little girlhaving been
poor
There
Remark.
reflexive and
another",
Le
dcmne
may
s'
is
s* "ra
gotten up
molto
much
amano
added
le
at
se,tte. The
o'clock.
but
in order
une
alle
seven
distinction
no
verbs,
reciprocal
be
alzata
le altre.
of form
V
to
V altro,
un
avoid
The
between
women
Cf.
78 and
103.
Or m'
$ra vestito.
one
ambiguity:
love
another.
1
'
one
80
ITALIAN
third
The
104.
GRAMMAR.
impersonal (neutral)
(b) an
(a) a passivesense;
with
used
is often
reflexive
of the
person
sense.
(a) In
the
transitive
first
the
ease
(since only
one
is
verb
transitive
with
agrees
naturallyalways
its
become
may
subject,si being
books
are
"
given
to
me.
the verb
case
often
be and
may
is
intransitive.
"we":
"people",
It is
Si dice.
Se
said,they
parla. People
ne
say.
are
talking
it.
about
dancing.
Se ne va.
People are leaving.
che
Io sperava
e-ggi si sare,bbe stati allegriinsie,me.
have
been
would
together
happy
we
hoped that
Si ballera.
no
will be
There
to-day.
The
105.
with
there
fact that
the reflexive
and
that
Where
the verb
its
were
latter
the
is often
non
si
constructions
not
stood
clearlyunder-
certain
made
pcjssonofare.
Or:
si
to
are
subjectfollows
done.
Non
they
two
of
amount
and
fusion.
con-
precedes
though si
the si
singular as
subject:
Queste C9se
be
these
are
pu"
fare
queste ce-se.
These
things
cannot
REFLEXIVE
Or
(a)
plural
si " costretti.
die.denuQve
(b) Si
tense
singular
the
When
creduto.
with
Tliere
passive
bad
was
mark
to
news.
of
change
not
in
so
verbs
reflexive
are
there
English, and
perceive",
their
abituarsi
meaning,
get accustomed
a, to
rallegrarsidi, to rejoiceover,
The
107.
verb
andarsene,
special mention,
throughout
me
ne
andava,
se
ne
andranno,
non
se
go
ne
going
am
se
vatene,
it takes
used
never
except
as
etc.3
"to
go
away",
conjunctive
two
deserves
pronouns
away.
was
going
they
will go
he
away.
away.
andatevene, go
(thou) away;
not
vadano, let them
go away.
(Exercises XX
1
Literally, "news
For
Lingua
flexive
essentially re-
to.
this
are
vado,
ne
as
which
reflexive
Many
etc.
complete
to
credu-
stato
Italian
many
are
pentirsi, 'to
as
in
are
which
verbs, i.e.,verbs
reflexives,
(="
believed.2
been
Many
106.
Si " creduto
It is believed.
It has
to).
by
as
followed
is constrained.
one
consolanti.1
P9C0
serve
may
be
may
adjective:
or
noun
Quando
Si
in
verb
81
VERBS.
little
curious
usage
Italiana, "332,
211
p.
and
gone
(ye, you)
away,
away.
etc.
XXI.)
consoling".
cf. Moise,
298.
(3) and
212
(2).
Regole ed
Osservazioni
delta
82
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
VIII.
CHAPTER
AND
ADJECTIVES
1
Adjectives and
08.
agree
their
with
PARTICIPLES.
participlesused
in number
nouns
adjectives
and gender. Generally
is indicated
by the
as
termination.1
(a)
An
masculine
made
the
of
nouns
more
or
participlequalifying two
and gender is usually
different number
plural,but it may
only with
agree
adjective or
nearest
noun
to it :
Signore,signori,do,nnedel pgpolo,operai,ufficiali,
no,nne,
e i libretti di promomano
s"rve, tutti coi ragazzi per una
d' entrata
zione nell* altra,empivan la stanza
e le scale.
of the lower
classes,workmen,
Ladies, gentlemen, women
officials,
grandmothers, servants, all holding boys by one
and the certificates of promotion in the other, filled
hand
and the stairways.
the entrance
II padre, i frat"lli
e le sore,lie sono
partite. The father,
brothers, and
sisters have
noun
(b) A plural,
gone.
take
may
two
or
more
adjectives
where
in point of fact each
singularin cases
in the
adjective should be accompanied by a noun
:
singular
Le lingue francese
e ted"scasono
lingue mode,rne. The
in the
French
109.
and
languages are
in either
modern
languages.
All
mentioned
in a, and
German
Cf. 42.
84
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
Remarks
The
in.
it has
|)una
Le
I
of
is
derid"ntiogni cred"nza lo
is
There
an
affectionate
girl.
amanti.
sono
ragazze
She
amante.
ragazza
at
the forms
takes
so
become
Participles.
present
not
the
on
dicono.
Those
who
scoff
so.
is almost
substantive.
The
112.
used
adjective,but
an
as
Ess"ndo ammalati
ill (
since
Dic"ndo
cosi
The
113.
or
they
noun,
II
two
the end
I done
which
which
essa
be
either
adjective
an
(venire,rimanere
"ssere
with
verbs
of the
I have
I
have
the
avere
of
may
into
I have
such
as
"
cf.
81) it
with
agrees
its
e'ssere:
book
is
(being)
shown.
stati mostrati.
difference
The
consideration
at
are
predicateadjective and
i.e.,with the subjectof
libro vi"ne mostratq. The
(b) Used
these
with
I libri sono
force,
non
past participle
may
(a) Used
a
verbal
verb:
is
never
invariable:
is therefore
and
with
always
is
-endo
is
past participle
verb.1
the
used
with
participlewhen
be made
clear by turning the phrase under
question. Thus, taking the examples given
I have
paragraph :
shown
shown.
shown.
of
function
(which
What
is
books
(No
shown
the books.
action)
an
Here
are
action
these?
They
here,
"shown"
arc
are
What
have
the
books
the books
qualifying
ADJECTIVES
remain
it may
such
As
85
PARTICIPLES.
AND
invariable
in
(i.e.,
the action
is done
the
line
mascu-
singular).
it is evident
But
object of
that
the
so
avere,
toihc
past participlemay
direct
with
agree
that direct
object.
usuallyagrees with
It
often
verb, and
the
personalpronoun
with an
object other
it precedes the verb :
when
pronoun
preceding
than
sonal
per-
i libri.1
H9 mostrato
i libri che ho mostrato
(or mostrati).
]j)cco
Ifccoi libri,li ho mostrati.2
The
114.
active
verb,
it
above,
of
mentioned
those
which
"'ssere,
has, however,
a
with
agree
is
reciprocalverbs
The
sense.
not
is here
verb
The
above.3
and
either
from
different
somewhat
an
reflexive
of
case
personalpronoun:
siamo
Le
dgnne
si
sono
loved
have
The
amate.
another
one
have
women
selves).
(or our-
loved
one
(or themselves).
another
the
But
direct
reflexive
is
pronoun
frequently not
the
object:
"books",
just
questions: He
as
to
answer
any
is
"
the
We
amati.
Ci
"
the
other
"Hehasdone
what?"
first is
adjective might.)
noun
or
"
Taking
what
?"
adjective,that
the
it is clear
to
the
two
that
second
verb.
1
H9
mostrati
Li
ho
that
with
3
mostrato
the
avere
Cf. 103.
unusual.
i libri is very
would
be
tendency is
invariable.
in
very
unusual.
Italian
to
make
It
is. however,
the
dent
evi-
past participle
86
ITALIAN
parlati. We
Ci siamo
this
In
GRAMMAR.
is
there
where
case,
spoken
have
to
direct
no
the
and
direct
with
Ci
receives
the
detti
siamo
(detta,detto) la
of the
not
plural,
plural:
e
have
women
le
brother
and
dgnne
la
sister
the
(a)
Before
sant' ;
able:
invari-
have
told
masculine
made
The
singular
man
and
the
Hi
be,
Saint
tutt'
due.
Both
the
handsome.
are
beginning with a
b"llibro. Un gran
Carlo.
venuti.
sorgllasono
of
Bgllo,grande, and
bugno its final vowel
vowel
We
either
nouns
more
gender,are
sono
115.
San
or
same
Forms
Un
verita.
either
come.
e
frat"llo
noun
forms
perperson
where
there is a
the truth.1
or
L* ugmo
say
same
But
action).
of two
(a) The qualifiers
II
the
difficult to
objectexpressedthe participle
agree
may
remain
that or with the subject,
or
may
another
one
verbs
these
pressed,
object exthe subject
with
usuallyagrees
participle
be
indirect object,it would
the
(or
another.
one
Adjectives.
ble,
drop their final syllabefore a singular masculine
santo
consonant
ragazzo.
Un
bugn
cane.
Charles.
beginning with a
singularmasculine
grande, grand'; santo,
;
bgll'
bgllo becomes
bugno, bugn2:
a
It is
said to one
another
the truth".
have
literally, "We
of mental
confusion, the speaker
probable that we have here a case
the
latitude of
the participlequalifies. But
not
knowing what
the Italians in this matter
lightensit for the foreigner.
2
there
is no
that
Note
Compare
apostrophe. Cf. 41, note 2.
of the
definite
article.
bglP U91110, un
Un
87
PARTICIPLES.
AND
ADJECTIVES
sant'
grand' 1191110,un
bu9n
un
uomo,
amico.
(b) Before
forms
impure
b"llosps'cchio.L'
u9mo
pluralforms
(c) The
(2)
predicatedthe regular
used:
are
Un
when
or
grande.
are:
For
bu9n
san,
bu9ni.
(3) For b9llo,
grande,
santo,
santi, grandi,
bu9no : b^lli,
bu9ni.
Remarks,
(i)
It will be
than
observed
the
latter
These
b"llois
that
others,being
the
only
regularforms.
more
irregular
irregularalso in
the
are
much
one
plural.
the
in the feminine
grande also occurs
singular,
times
ending in e1, and someespeciallyas qualifierof a noun
takes the place of grandi in the masculine
plural:
La gran Brettagna.
Una gran nazione.
Great events.
La gran via. The highroad. I gran casi.
madre
che ci
Tutti oltre alia grande patria,alia gran
una
piccola patria : la
racc9gliesotto le sue ali,abbiamo
all have
We
citta od il villaggioche ci ha visti nascere.
(2) Gran
for
us
which
her
wings,
witnessed
our
"
who
mother
the
gathers
city or
village
birth.
Also
cosa,
"a
in
the
very
expressions una
good thing", "bad
gran
b^lla
thing".
C9sa,
una
gran
bruttB
SS
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
I casi
preserve
Cucina
qualityof
Home
casalinga.
cooking, middle-class
Abitudini
homelike
food.
Una
larga camera
guttural:
the
casalinghe.
wide
habits.
Domestic
Camere
room.
cookery,
larghe.
the
on
penult
the
on
penult
ante-
wind
The
The
is fresh.
is feeble.
man
V"nti freschi.
5CC0 due u^mini
caduchi.
^
of
gusto animalesco.
un
Sente
kind
qualche sucpo
un
of
harmonious
sound
armonico
Adjectives in
117.
for
of the
nouns
II cavallo
Un
"
"
pezzo
Acque
sono
ragazze
1
Cf. 61
in
faded
legno
marcio.
and
-esco
lirici.
also
follow
the
horse
Putrid
given
Dei fioriflosci.
flower.
A
Cavalli restii.
"
bit of rotten
wood.
waters.
" sazio.
non
rules
is restive.
"
marce.
II ragazzo
classici.
"
di
some
termination:
This
" restio.
hear
you
po"mi
-io
same
fiore fldscio.
Un
Dei
lirico.
po"ma
Do
opinioned' un ugmo
layman.
Siamo
tutti laici qui.
Un
autore
classico.
Degli autori
Un
animaleschi.
Gusti
animal.
an
animal
It is an
The
boy
is not
satisfied.
Le
sazie.
foot-note.
take
In
-eschi,those
accordance
in
with
'-ico take
So
eccfntrico
i, filantrQpico
-ci, magnifico -ci, peripdico-ci, pratico -ci, problematico
pudichi.
-ci, but
antico, antichi.
Pudico
is
an
exception, forming
ADJECTIVES
89
PARTICIPLES.
AND
Quite irregularadjectivesare:
118.
'unequal";
ogni,
form
"every". Pari and impari have only the one
for both
genders and numbers.
Ogni has naturally
no
plural;it has also no formal distinction of gender.
These three are the only adjectivesin i.
(b) Qualche, "some", has no pluralform, and nouns
used with it remain
ing
singulareven
though their meanbe plural :
'equal";
(a) Pari,
imparl,
(d)
verb
singular.2
no
is parecchie.
and
Fu
flowers.
the
"'ssere,
second
of
adverb
an
time),
variabl
in-
are
La
fu
Signora Bianco
maiden
name
Un
invariable
adverbial
are
phrases
and
dabbe,ne. A well-meaning
ugmo
B., whose
Cesarotti.
was
Mrs.
and
(ExercisesXXII
of
Comparison
man,
good
man.
XXIII.)
Adjectives.
The
might
2
It
The
implication
qualche
is
"a
few",
whereas
dei
fipri
great many.
mean
is in
fact
meaning.
with
There
the
plural
is also
an
of
adverb
parecchio.
change
ITALIAN
90
with
GRAMMAR.
the
(1)
This
is
rose
more
beautiful
than
that.
than
(4)
beautiful
as
(3) This
that.
This
is the
most
that.
as
(2)
This
is
is less beautiful
rose
beautiful
most
rose
of
rose
all.
rose.1
beautiful
All these
pressed
degrees may be and usually are exin Italian analytically,
i.e.,by the use of
adverbs, the form of the adjectiveitself remaining
unchanged (cf.122, 125).
120.
Comparison
The
121.
cosi
"
come,
or
come
"
Equality.
equality is expressed by
of
comparison
tanto
of
tanto
come,
"
che,
tanto
"
quanto,2
quanto alone:
|)cosi grande
come
suo
frate.Ho.He
is
as
large
as
his
brother.
1
In
"This
rose
is beautiful"
we
have
the
so-called
"positive
degree".
2
ITALIAN
02
GRAMMAR.
(a)
All these
il
maggiore
minimo.
or
also be
adjectivesmay
massimo;
or
compared
(cf. 122).
larly:
reguThe
differentiated
become
by usage, superiore,
inferiore,being usuallyemployed to signify superior",
inferior"; piu alto, piu basso, to mean
"higher",
forms
"
"
differ in
not
tivo, but
are
from
meaning
oftener
Migliore and
sense.
than
used
peggiore
these
piu
latter
cat-
forms.
dissociated
from
so
Qttimoand p^ssimo have become
be regarded as independent
that they may
the group
adjectivesmeaning "very good", "very bad", being
thus
absolute, not comparative, superlatives.1The
and
be said of massimo
same
minimo,
'very
may
"very high,great",and
large", very small", sommo,
"
infimo,
Maggiore and
have
minore
usually
the
of
sense
be
are
of
that
Those
common,
and
superlativeby
adding this ending.
is in full
measure
without
comparing
any
interiore, intimo;
estremo;
int"rno,
esteriore,
Estfrno,
iiltimo,can
scarcely be regarded as still building groups
2
As
is natural,
absolute
adverbs
superlative:$
molto
are
ting
cut-
The
thought
other.
with
measure
in
any
absolute
That
very
They
system.
meaning.3
in -issimo
Latin
ulteripre,
of
parison.
com-
the
frequently used to form
b"llo,assai b"Uo, oltremQdo b$llo;etc.
also
ADJECTIVES
PARTICIPLES.
AND
does
Scrive
Pochissimi
He
cosi
poeti scrivono
93
change
not
celebrated
very
writes very
sweet
its
poet.
verses.
well.
so
in -dico
superlativewhich
-issimo
maledicentissimo
,
forms
These
might
and
seem
-fico
(flee)have
an
irregular:maledico,
benefico, beneficentissimo.
reallyderived
are
beneficente.
participle),
Adjectivesin -evole have
from
maledice.nte(present
similar forms:
malevole
male,
volentissimo.
comparison
The
125.
that
as
manner
same
of
of
is formed
inferiority
superiority,using
"less",instead of phi:
bella delle sorelle.
5 la meno
is the
meno,
least beautiful
sisters.
of the
Esse
than
She
in the
fgrtiche gliugrnini.They
men
sono
less
are
strong
men.
Manco1
infelice di
Less
me.
Comparison by
unhappy
than
of di and
means
I.
che.
126.2 "Than"
or
in
pronouns).
(2) Nouns
1
Manco
"not
so
This
or
is oftenest
bad",
"not
paragraph,
used
so
in
the
means
adverbial
of their
adjectives.
expression manco
male,
badly".
for the
speech.
by
pronouns
sake
includes
of
completeness,
comparison also
goes
beyond
of other
parts
the
of
ITALIAN
94
(3) Numerals
GRAMMAR.
between
(i.e.,
piu
or
and
meno
meral)
nu-
articles.
without
or
by
pronouns
(3) Adjectives.
(See also 127.)
(4) Verbs.
(5) Adverbs, and in all cases
' '
rather
than
' '
the
than
other
II vino
than
than
the
(a, 2).
II vino " piu buono
altro.
che
This
wine
(b,2).
other
Wine
dell' acqua.
chiaro
meno
"
more
(a, 1).
rather
pleasesme
means
delP altro.
Mi
"than"
where
Mi
of their verbs.
means
is less
clear
water
Meglio
than
dormire
than
P9SS0
hours
seven
che
Lavora
sette
or
b, 5).
It is better
I cannot
ore.
sleep
to
sleep more
(a, 3).
s"ipiu giovane di
Tu
(b,2,
tormentarsi.
(6,4).
dormire piu di
to worry
Non
che bello2
piu in
You
me.
che
fretta
are
than
younger
He
b"ne.
works
(a, 2).
rather
fast
well
(b,5).
Better late than
never
(b,5).
5 meglio tardi che mai.
than
fortunate
|)piu fortunato che felice. He is more
happy (b,3, or b, 5 "rather fortunate than happy").
harm
Egli ne recav" piu danno che utile. He got more
harm
than
than
good out of it (b, 1, or b, 5 "rather
good").
than
"
"
tore
non
sagace
d' Italia.
of the
2
be used
Che may
Or:
V.
is
to avoid
meno
wise
past vicissitudes
piuttqstobuono
de'
mali
presenti che
investigatornot
of Italy.
che
bello.
delle
less of the
Villari
passate
present
" indagavicende
ills than
and
nouns
them
is between
done
their
or
and
qualities
sufferedby
or
them
che
in
the
wherever
pronouns
95
di is used
that
It is evident
Remark.
of
PARTICIPLES.
AND
ADJECTIVES
comparison
between
not
in
sons
comparitions
ac-
comparisons of
in themselves,i.e.,considered
apart from
qualities
they are ascribed, between actions
beingsto whom
whole concepts.
and between
or
suffered,
comparison
II
turns
umore
suo
the
on
piu
"
changeable
more
difficult to
it is sometimes
But
than
che
mutabile
the
on
or
noun
decide
the
done
whether
the verb
V onda.
the
His humoi
is
(is).
wave
che figlio
e meno
giorno mi comparisti davanti meno
One
less than
che uo,mo.
a
day you appeared before me
son
(is)and less than a man
(is).
I due anni rappresentarono per noi piu che due s"coli
di esperi"nza. The
two
more
represented for us
years
centuries of experience (represented).
than two
Un
Where
127.
the
verbs
"
comparison
than
"is
takes
place between
either by che non
rendered
flected
inor
quel che :
Spe,ndepiu che non guadagna {or sp"nde piu di quelloche
than he earns.1
guadagna). He spends more
di
which
Words
128.
adverbs
sometimes
adjectivesand
sometimes
are
tanto,
are:
trgppo2:
lo
utjmini
Molti
Ne
P"che persone
Sono
This
is
Cf.
really a crossing of
he
156.
"
earns
and
"
He
men
say
unhappy
people have
Few
They
a
the
so.
very
am
venute.
pQ;ca distanza.
p9* piu sicuro. It is
than
more
son
andati
|)un
1
Many
infelice.
molto
sono
dicono.
went
about
it.
come.
distance.
short
little surer.
two
does not
'He
constructions:
earn
as
much
as
he
spends
spends ".
96
ITALIAN
Ne
Vi
tanti libri.
sono
How
felici.
tanto
sono
Trgppi.
Too
There
happy
so
are
are
so
phrases such
them"
I received
Iftrgppo
many.
(a) Adverbial
tale
They
it.
over
Quanti ?
books.
many
many
I received
GRAMMAR.
them")
as
lontano.
far.
them
just as
"I returned
in which
be
rendered
quali li ho
recevuti.
to
are
It is too
they
by
the
were
when
adjectives
quale:
Li
hg
renduti
tali
of
Place
Adjectives.
and
Numerals
jectives
admost
pronominal adjectives,
of size and
quantity, adjectivesof emotion,
also (usually)
:
bglloand bugno precede the noun
grandi. IJccoi migi
Hg tre libri. Questi1 libri sono
129.
grandi
Hg
libri.
ancora
molti
Mgstro
migi bgi
libri al mio
amico.
caro
130.
used
Participles
by an adverb
shape, color, and
the
5
a
libri.
un
noun
or
of
figlioamato.
well-known
fied
adjectives,
adjectivesmodia
suffix,adjectivesof nationality,
material
low
qualitiesgenerally,folas
thing.
"
una
Sono
cgsa
bgn
conosciuta.
libri italiani.
|)uno
It is
spgcchio
rotondo.
"cco
un
abito
L' ugmo
nero.
" cieco.
Un
bgll*uccgllo.
But:
Un
uccgllobellino.
-"these".
OF
PLACE
jectives qualify
sometimes
jj un
uo,mo
onesto.
]J un
ucjmo
onesto
the
and
precedes
is
He
other
follows:
honest
an
man.
is
He
simpatico.
97
they
noun
one
one
ADJECTIVES.
and
honest
an
genial
con-
man.
il
Sente
of the
perfume
the
Vedete
certain
132.
erba
verde
Only
smell
you
beautiful
the
see
the
after
x
usual
that
different
When
before
be
the
ordinarily
have
they
noun,
is usual.
than
whether
place,
take
adjectives
elsewhere
placed
their
of
out
of
number
when
meaning
literal
or
ing
mean-
Un
grande.
uomo
great
large
Un
man.
grand*
U9mo.
man.
Un
Un
galante.
ugmo
honorable
gallant
Un
man.
galantuQmo.
man.
amico.
caro
Una
friend.
dear
cara.
casa
house.
costly
Una
scrittura.
doppia
Double-entry
doppia.
|)la
sola
Do
roses?
Spring
bell'
la
pure
primaverile
rQse
grass!
green
An
delle
profumo
sola
l'ha
She
Only
Cf.
130,
also
the
is my
my
{Exercises
1
double
La
copy.
scrittura
book-keeping.
miafiglia.
sentito.
French
only daughter.
has
daughter
and
XXIV
usage
of
heard
Mia
it.
XXV.)
the
same
adjectives.
figlia
98
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER
IX.
POSSESSIVES.
133.
Possessives
their
according to
is
libro,mio
an
either
are
in the
use
is
the
whether
other
Italian
form
its function
by
|)il suo
and
one
il mio
ecco
such.
as
But
cedent
representingan anteabove case
libro) In Italian,
the possessive is the
same,
adjectiveor pronominal. In
.
of
be
"my"
words,
is treated
pronouns
pronoun
(thisbeing in the
however,
In
sentence.
adjectiveand
adjectivesor
"mine"
and
the
in
rendered
word1:
same
This is your
newero
fazzoletto,
are
handkerchief,
isn't it?
Ma
no,
134.
non
The
"
il mio.
article
being
used
most
with
cases
most
(cf.
nouns
immediately
cedes
pre-
the
The
possessivequalifyingthe noun.
nominal
prois treated as
possessive,
representinga noun,
that is,it also usuallytakes the article.
Thus
a noun,
the possessiveis seldom
without
found
an
article,and
that article being generallythe definite,the latter is
which
are:
given with the forms of the possessive,
my,
"
mine.
thy, thine
(your,yours),
Cf. French
mon
and
le mien,
which
more
resemble
the
English.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
ioo
figlie. These
mie
Queste sono
daughters of mine,
daughters).
of my
some
daughters
my
are
But:
5 Sua questa
|)la Sua casa
(2) In
this house?
own
you
Is this your
home?
phrases,such
of set
number
Do
as:
Con
Non
Per
Da
casa
On
vostra.
causa
parte mia.
Vado
in tua
137.
The
For
more
stricted
repossessiveis much
than
in English, it being replaced
article;(2) the definite article and
or
stead.
of the
Italian
in
part.
my
I go in your
vece.
use
account.
your
for other
the
there
reasons
is the
sentence
is used
could
instead
be
sessor,
posno
of the
in my
copy-book
the
hand.
il
Portami
Dammi
I take
la
However,
soprabito. Bring
Give
mano.
casa
mia
me
is often
my
me
your
used
overcoat.
hand.
for
"at
home"
without
the
article.
2Cf.
3
mano.
44(8).
Sometimes
even
the
article is omitted:
Prendo
il
quaderno
in
POSSESSIVEvS.
ai
freddo
Hg
pi"di
H9
or
ioi
pie,di freddi..
cold.1
.My
feet
are
II bambino
la
cerca
child
The
mamma.
is
mother.
accompanied
but
by
lavi
Mi
of
to
hanno
Let
"let
in
the
wash
his
him
him
wash
pronoun
is
possessive
face, he
himself
to
capelli.
possessive
placed
re-
wash
must
face").
the
broken
have
and
gender
well
"her
mother"
"her
or
made
cases
be
might
the
leg (one
my
It follows
Egli
di
non
l"i.
by
He
of
mai
third
conosciuto
knew
never
(Exercises
*Cf.
lui,
84.
his
XXVI
is
di
lui
mother;
and
2Cf.
madre
he
loves
XXVII.)
98
(2).
means
"his
in
most
the
sense
of
instead
used
are
sessor,
pos-
madre,
where
singular
person
la
padre
meaning
l"i
hair.
denoting
sua
but
di
the
noun
suo
father",
context,
di
the
that
The
the
ambiguous
ha
"his
as
with
the
her
off
cut
person
with
mother".
clear
possessive
in
number
father"
have
They
agrees
object possessed.
as
personal
whom,
gamba.
una
tagliato
The
138.
the
reflexive
not
legs).
my
Le
la
faccia.
rotto
sono
verbs
article2:
an
la
with
or
conjunctive
person
(literally,
face
his
by
the
indicating
Si
verbs,
reflexive
With
(2)
ama
hers
molto
dearly.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
102
*.""
'CHAPTER
X.
ifel"ONSTRATIVES,
RELATIVES,
INTERROGATIVES,
INDEFINITES.
adjectivesor
used
be
as
which
forms
1.
Plural.
questi
fern,
questa
queste
masc.
cotesto1
cotesti
fern,
cotesta
coteste
quello
quella
quegli,quei2
quelli,
quelle
Forms
Pronominal
questi,this
costui,this
often in
this
sense,
these
Sometimes
Notice
cotesto,
cf. that
be
must
Latin
colui, )
shortened
into
added
some
que'.
of iste.
forms
of llle.
trace
those
men,
meaning "this"
Tste,those meaning "that", with
the
[women.
woman,
coloro, those
woman.
that
[women.3
that
col"i,
To
140.
quegli )
these
men,
fellow.
this
cost"i,
Persons).
these
costoro,
man,
these_
that, those.
of
(used only
man.
contemptuous
not
Forms.
questo
2.
used
persons.
masc.
fern,
may
always
are
Adjectiveor Pronominal
Singular.
masc.
which
forms
have
They
pronouns.
either and
the
be either
139.
For
the
all have
the
some
trace
single exception of
contemptuous
sense
of
costui
frequently,have
this contemptuous
sense.
of
but
DEMONSTRATIVES.
which
is
invariable
an
pronoun,
person
which
or
representingnot
phrase:
(=that
I said
is what
said).
Remarks
usuallydrop final
inflected like b"llo (115):
cotesto
Quello is
vowel.
the Demonstratives.
on
Questo and
141.
103
;
e
quell'uomo
in quelli.
before
quest' (Jpera
;
142.
and
two
than
in
the
near
allows
of greater
of
perspicuity
Prendete
quell'altro
and give me
other
143.
questo libro
datemi
which
is
is remote
Desidera
cotesto,
pgi cercatemi
this book
piacere. Take
also used
questo and
(=i
"that"
existence
him:
from
that
for
the
But
is remote.
latter"
questifor "the
i fiori azzurri
fiori rossi),
non
for "the
i fiori rossi?
quelli(=i
former",
Desidero
questi
fiori azzurri).
adjectivesand pronouns
not used in the singularas subjectpronouns
are
the
corresponding pronominal
representing nouns,
forms being then preferred. They are, however, used
in the singularas objectivesand in the pluraleither
as
subjectsor as objects,to represent persons as well
as
things:
144.
The
forms
which
are
both
ITALIAN
104
GRAMMAR.
towards
parlato
you.
quegli altri?
con
Have
spoken
you
with
others?
those
whom
ho visto
did not
saw
hanno
non
want
voluto
parlare.
talk.
to
Relatives.
The
145.
relatives
that, which.
cui,whom,
chi,the
are:
to
whom,
whose.
by which,
whom,
(a) These
sometimes
II
that which.
are
with
all pronouns,
noun
first three
much
are
although
il
is
quale
(b) The
which, by
etc.
forms
used
with
Father
Christopher.
frequent than
more
the
others.
Remarks
the
on
is invariable.
146. Che
It is
for all
Relatives.
II
generallyused
quale, which
with
the
As
Che
is
noun
in the
as
is inflected
various
forms
of
subjector direct
it exceptingwhere ambiguity
cases.
objectche1 is preferredto
might result from its invariableness
1
only
expressions:
un
of form:
bel che,
un
gran
che.
RELATIVES.
II
you
del
quale parliamo
is the
colla
since
ambiguous,
is
who
man
ing
speak-
the
" il
The
are
The
quale abbiamo
whom
che
might
nemico.
suo
we
abbiamo
refer
of
man
vista
i"ri.
yesterday.
saw
visto
would
either to the
man
young
enemy.
la
woman
donna
che
amico.
be
the
man,
both.)
or
They
with
man
Sono
The
friend.
speaking is your
colla dgnna
ugmo
IJcco r
woman
is my
there
are
we
There
li " il mio
see
L' ugmo
whom
padre.
father.
whom
105
sort
abbiamo
lady whom
"which"
of neuter.
incontrata.
met.
we
and
It
referringto
usuallytakes the
whole
definite
article1:
L"i non
You
say
n' "
cont"nto
pleased
not
it.
about
Cui
147.
is invariable.
object,generallybut not
It is interchangeablein
It is used
with
always
della
La
preposition.2
with
cases
many
del
" mia
he is talking is my aunt.
IJccola persona cui (dicui, della quale) Le
lady
indirect
an
as
quale,
zia.
The
to whom
Here
is the
reason
on
spoke to you.
cui presto partirrisolvo.
of which
account
I19parlato.
am
resolved
to go
This
away
at once.
1
It is found
Cui
is sometimes
this usage
note
1, p.
is
106.
rare
found
and
is
instead
of
it.
il
really contrary
quale as
to
the
direct
nature
object,but
of cui.
Cf.
106
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
di cui
l"tto,or L' autore
(Jpereabbiamo
abbiamo
l"ttole (Jpere.
In this example the difference in the use
of cui and il
quale is clear. One could substitute for the latter phrase:
Ly autore
del quale abbiamo
could
l"ttole (jpere,but one
i quali (Jpereabbiamo
tto.
Cui comnot say : L' autore
prehends
le,
L' autore
in itself
il
which
which
with
with
former
the
preposition
the
expressed
be
must
latter.
the
is invariable.
148. Chi
used
where
ship.1
prepositional relation-
some
omitted
be
may
of
notion
often
more
teme
It
less
is
frequent, but
He
teme).
ama,
loves,
who
fears.
Chi
con
Consigliatevi
who
those
He
trovera.
cerca
Troverai
chi ha
had
have
seeks
who
shall find.
with
counsel
esperie,nza. Take
experience.
will find
You
who
somebody
will
help you.
(a)
"some
others", "the
chi
vi"ne.
va,
Chi
ride,chi piange.
Onde
by
Chi
149.
rendered
chi is to be
Chi
one
Some
other",
or
is invariable.
It
always
some",
the like:
coming.
going, some
are
One
the
"some
weeps.
has
sense
of
:
relationship
prepositional
gloriosaonde
glorioussoul of which
L' anima
The
1
the
It is the
notion
"to".
Latin
of the
si
we
dative, which
"of"
est
si
parla).
speaking.
are
expresses
preposition
A qui
Cf. French:
as
ce
well
the
notion
as
chapeau?
that
of
possession,
of the
tion
preposi-
108
ITALIAN
Chi
Chi
is it?
Who
"?
GRAMMAR.
queste d9nne?
sono
Who
are
women?
these
chi parlate?
Di
Di chi
questifiori?
sono
are
speaking?
you
flowers
Whose
is sometimes
Che
154.
whom
Of
sometimes
pronoun,
always invariable. As a
things,as an adjectiveit may
It is
only of
used
these?
are
jective.
ad-
an
it is
pronoun
also be used
of persons:
Che
cerca?
What
Che
persona
ha visto?
What
person
(a) Che
Che
have
you
Chi ha
visto?)
seen?
you
co,sa is
looking for?
than
(lesscommon
are
frequentlyused
for "what":
co,sa ha visto?
155.
Quale is either
is in either
It is used
Quale
case
both
dei due
adjective.
adjectiveending in
things:
or
pronoun
inflected like any
of persons
and
la?
ragazzi "
Which
an
of the
two
It
e.
boys is
there ?
jjun
ugmo
che
aspgtta.
What
Qual ugmo?
Quali ragioniha per
for thinking so ?
any
who
man
is
waiting.
man?
crederlo?
It is
What
adjectiveending
in
an
pronoun,
case
have
reasons
adjective,or
you
an
it is inflected like
o :
do you want
?
Quanto vuo,le? How much
How
seats
are
Quante s"diesonvi?
many
"all":
(a) Tutto quanto (-i,-a, -e) means
Li ha visti tutti quanti. He has seen
them
there?
all.
also be
interrogatives
except chi may
used in exclamations.
They are not accompanied by
the article as in English:
157.
All these
Cf.
121
and
128.
INDEFINITES.
Che
What
peccato!
pity!
What
1191110!
Qual
Quanti dispiaceri!
man
109
How
troubles!
many
Indefinites.
158. The
principal indefinite
the
following are
nouns
pro-
ni"nte,nulla, nothing.
altri, another
(altri
altri, ognuno,
everybody.
parecchi, several,
one
another).
piu, i phi, most, the most.
altrui,of another, to another,
of others, to others.
qualchecgsa,something, anything.
altro, something else, anyqualcuno, qualcheduno, any
thing else.
alcuno, -i,-a, -e,
some,
any.
certuno,1
certain
one.
person.
taluno,3 such
(checchessia),
checchesia
checche,2 whatever,
uno,
chicchesia,
niuno,
nessuno,
altro,gli uni
gli
one.
no
like
This,
Rare.
one.
both.
altri,4
whatever.
one
any
ever,
nobody.
1' uno
who-
everything,
all.
one,
every
veruno,
any
whatever.
chiunque,
one.
one.
every
an
ciascuno,
nessuno,
etc., is
of uno,
compound
"one".
2
from
che
+ che
Rare.
Fern.
three"
sia,
"both",
used
often
Not
checchesia
che,
Italian.
in modern
from
+ che
che
that
Observe
+
this
is formed
sia, chicchesia
from
chi
etc.
Puna
the
but
=tutti
l'altra, le
commonest
tre, "all
four"
une
le
altre.
expression
=tutti
also
Ambedue
is
quattro,
tutti
etc.
due.
means
"All
ITALIAN
HO
Remarks
denotes
always
some
of persons
used
are
altri
li"to,
Altri "
the
on
Altri1 is used
159.
GRAMMAR.
Indefinite
Pronouns.
either
subjector object,altrui
prepositional
relationship.Both
only,altro only of things:
as
One
misero.
is
the
happy,
other)
(an-
other
miserable.
Io
non
want
not
people'sproperty.
other
ha
Non
else?
and
Checchesia
160.
used
not
meaning
Did
detto altro?
anything
are
do
"
as
chicchesia
subjectof
the
' '
whatever
he
not
say
being reallyphrases
Other
verb.
phrases
qualsivoglia,
qualsiasi,tutto
are:
tell it to any
one
whatever.
dirg checchesia.
Non
I shall not
anything
Quali che siano i suoi talenti,non parla b"ne.
his talents may
be, he does not speak well.
Chiunque tema torni a casa.
Per quanti tale,nti
Whatever
abbia, non lavora.
have, he does
he may
is
161. Nessuno
niuno
or
adapted
all these
Non
vi "
Che
cgsa dice?
Most
in casa?
talents
every-day Italian
style.
phrases
(4) (a).
Is there
is
There
nessuno.
Ni"nte.
feminine, altra,is
Cf. 232
Whatever
Nulla
nulla.
is
is often used
Non
than
more
with
negatives:
nessuno
in
ni"nte than
elevated
to the
whatever.
work.
commoner
and
veruno,
Vi "
not
say
of like
also
nobody
at home?
nobody.
What
are
you
saying?
ing.
Noth-
found.
meaning
are
followed
by
the
subjunctive.
PREFIXES
Non
ne
nulla.
so
Vergogna
I know
dovere
SUFFIXES.
AND
in
nothing about
nulla
un
sono
it.
lui.
per
Shame
be used
Ho
adjectivesare
Alcuno, ciascuno,
nouns.
as
indefinite
Many
162.
nessuno,
and
who
stands.
under-
sometimes
used
may
ognuno,
also
adjectives:
as
comprato
giornaliillustrati.
alcuni
illustrated newspapers.
rime'dio.
Non trovo nessun
have
bought
some
visto
Ho
Molti
but
sono
quel tale. I
ma
partiti,
I find
have
remedy.
that
seen
tutti.
non
no
individual.
Many
have
gone
away,
all.
not
Ogni and
(a) and
qualche
are
(b).
(ExercisesXXVIII
CHAPTER
PREFIXES
AND
and
XXIX.)
XI.
SUFFIXES.
and adverbs1
adjectives,
meaning of nouns,
of prefixes
in Italian by the use
is frequentlymodified
the latter.
and suffixes,especially
and
straare
164. The prefixesarci-, sopra-, sovra-,
and adjectives. They all have a superused with nouns
lative
meaning. They are not very frequent2:
163. The
Adverbs
less often
are
than
less often
modified
than
adjectives,and
adjectives
nouns.
of
prefixes are also used with verbs, and most
them
considered
with
forms
are
produced by compounding
to word-building and
They belong therefore
separate words.
the province of the dictionary,not
to the grammar.
2
All
these
the
as
to
ITALIAN
H2
GRAMMAR.
Arcibe.Ho,very
citable;
exsoprabbondevole,superabundant; sopraeccitabile,
very
overexcitability
sopraeccitabilita,
; sopraccarico,
overburdened, overloaded; il sovrappiu,the excess
; sovrap-
are
an
very
unusual, unreasonable
hour;
They
numerous.
may
sometimes
press
ex-
so
meaning so various and
enable the foreigner
elusive that only wide reading can
their use.
ever,
They constitute,howfullyto understand
of the language.
of the great charms
one
Suffixes may
be classified accordingto their meaning
terms
diminutives, augmentative
as
expressiveof
's, as
endearment, of disparagement,or of deteriority.1
166. The
are
(those oftenest
principaldiminutives
-ino (-cino, -icino, -iccino,
used being placed first)
:
of endearment)
-olino); -etto (-osetto)(often with a sense
-ic"llo)
(-c"llo,
-ar"llo,er"llo,
; -uccio (often
; -e,llo
with a pejorative sense); -U9I0 (-9I0,
-eruglo,-ettu9lo,
minutiv
dia
noun
-iciottalo,-icolo, -iccu9lo)
; ~9tto (used as
of animals
only in speaking of the young
cf. 167); -9ccio;-ognolo, -fccio; -igno; -astro, -ticolo,
-uzzolo (allfour pejorative)3:
-uzzo,
little boy; ragazRagazzo, boy; ragazzino,4ragazzu9lo,
of
shades
Italian:
In
ragazzuccio,naughty
little boy.
diminutivi, accrescitivi,vezzeggiativi,peggiorativi
(dispregiativi)
.
2Cf.
3
171
Added
(b).
to
adjectivesof
color
"yellowish".
giallastro,
all used
-igno, and -ognolo are
asprigno, "somewhat
'
Words
that suffix
to which
were
an
is
-astro
Otherwise
diminutive:
giallo,"yellow";
it is
pejorative. -Iccio,
adjectives: gialliccio,'yellowish";
with
harsh".
added
integralpart of them:
are
accented
ragazzino, etc.
as
though
PREFIXES
Fiume,
river;
SUFFIXES.
AXD
113
little stream.
Figlio,son
(which
figliu9lo
little
figliuolino,
Braccio,
sense),
son.
bracciuglo,arm
arm;
has
narrow
of chair.
street, alley.
eaglet.
Aquila,eagle; aquillgtto,
Orso, bear;
orsacchio^to,bear's cub.
Grande
large.
large; grandino, somewhat
Caro, dear; carino, winning, Deary (epithet).
Pallido, pale; paliduccio,rather pale.
Grazioso, graceful,pleasing; graziosetto,graziosettino,
pretty, charming.
Grasso,fat; grass^ccio,
plump.
verdastro, greenish.
Verde, green;
pianino, he came
Piano, softly; veniva
quite softly,
quietly.
,
167. The
Do,nna, woman;
donnone,
the
big woman.
from
it),long-nosed.
principalsuffixes indicative
-ino, -olino, -etto, already mentioned
168.
are
The
The
context
shows
whether
of endearment
utives.
dimin-
under
the
meaning
is
endearing or diminutive.
-accio, -astro,
169. The
principal pejorativesare
diminutives
and those already mentioned
under
-azzo,
etc.):
(-ucolo,
-uzzo,
Poeta, poet; poetastro, poor poet, poetaster.2
1
Added
to
the
names
of animals
diminutive.
2
Which
-9tto is, as
stated
in
166,
ITALIAN
H4
Giovine, young
GRAMMAR.
dissolute youth.
giovinastro,
man;
St^fano,Stephen;
Stefanaccio.
Amore, love;
amorazzo,
Frate, monk;
fratuzzo,monk
The
170.
naughty Stephen.,
illicit love.
suffixes have
of bad
in many
habits.
lost their
cases
nal
origi-
meaning:
Conte, count, contessa, countess;
(not "little")count
son
il contino
and
and
daughter-in-lawof
la
(for
countess
the
"little house"
"
(Casetta,
the
"
stance,
in-
conte).
contes-
tle
lit-
house".)
(a) In the
from
same
a diminutive
originally
frat"llo,
way
diminutive
new
brother".
of
formed
means
only "brother
means
"brother",
from
it,
fratellino
In figliastro,
"stepson", there
is
in
and
a
a
"little
"
no
sense
of the diminutive
disparagement,just as there is none
in matrigna, "stepmother", or in matrina, "godmother
"
1
.
suffix
final vowel
The
171.
is
Pazzo,
testolina,little
(a) If the
g it retains
its
In
being
all these
used
"dish",
Latin.
as
an
words
element
-the diminutive
faceva
the
woman.
scendere
non
sense
final vowel
be
giu.in chiesa, a
ordinato
freschetto,avevano
suffixes have
for
woman;
little bit.
Per
peasant
preceding this
quality:
consonant
P9C0, little;pochino, a
head.
contadinetta,strong peasant
or
before
Testa, head;
usually dropped
simply
word-building.
of
the
sullix
been
incorporated,
In others,
was
la
as
probably
scod^lla,
lost
in
n6
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
XII.
CHAPTER
IMPERSONAL
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
VERBS.
DEFECTIVE
We
173.
have
(67 and
seen
VERBS.
68) that
regular verbs
endings,which vary
by adding certain
the conjugation (67) to a stem
In many
irregularverbs the
their tenses
form
with
of the
variations
The
stem
the
are
which
is invariable.1
is variable.2
stem
result of:
traction;
(a) con-
irregularverbs except
remain
regular.
All
which
Contraction
174.
is unstressed, that
Dire, to
infinitive may
of the
initial vowel
the
where
is to
certain parts
say,
of the
occur
infinitive
cially
espe-
ending
in '-ere verbs:
(contractedfrom dicere).
say
call the
form
dire itself
irregular,
yet
the fact that parts of the verb
are
quite regularly
infinitive dicere4 give
the uncontracted
from
formed
of irregularity
the whole system an appearance
:
One
cannot
He
Dic-eva.
175.
saying.5
was
future
The
and
conditional
e
the infinitive,
exhibit, where
the
1
contracted
same
In
Some
formed
from
form:
other
being
are
weak.
Irregular verbs
are
part strong.
grammarians
prefer
to
say
that
the
verb
has
several
by
the pres-
stems.
of all variations
The
Which
does
Which
is in fact
These
secret
tenses
not
are
is
exist in modern
a
reallychange
of stress.
Italian.
perfectlyregular form.
composed
IRREGULAR
But
they
and
not
be
may
be
cannot
Tenere,
would
when
contracted
say.
the
infinitive
is
I shall hold.1
Terrg.
parts of the
the stem,
on
He
117
hold.
to
176. Those
falls
Direbbe.
1 shall say.
Dir".
VERBS.
in
verb
which
the
accent
and
junctive
sub-
the singular
(exceptthe second person plural),
and the preterite
imperative,
(except the second person
singularand the first and second persons plural)are
the parts oftenest
irregular. The past participleis
also frequentlyirregular:
Trarre,
to
As
177.
with
draw
have
we
(173),Italian irregularverbs
seen
tain
singleexception of "ssere, regularin cerverbs given below
parts. In the model irregular
those which
are
regular in all irregularverbs (except
mentioned
those
under
marked
with
180) are
an
are,
the
asterisk.
(a) Trarre
ent
or
the
have
"I
1
This
to
(contracted from
mostrare
+ ho " mostrerp
preterite of avere
(literally,
show"), servire + "bbe" servirebbe ("he had to serve").
"
is because
the
accent,
which
in
the
infinitive falls
on
the
exist
not
in modern
The
Regularly formed
forms
Italian.
bracketed
from
are
less
the
frequent.
infinitive trarre.
n8
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
INDICATIVE.
Imperfect.
Conditional.
*traeva*
*traevamo
trarrei2
trarremmo
*traevi
*traevate
trarresti
trarreste
*traeva
*traevano
trarrebbe
trarrfbbero
Preterite.
Imperative.
trassi
*traemmo
*traesti
*traeste
trasse
trai
traete
trassero
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Imperfect.
*traessi
*traessimo
tragga
tragghiamo
tragghiate
*traessi
*traeste
tragga
traggano
*traesse
*traessero
tragga
(6) Venire, to
come.
Imperfect.
Conditional.
*veniva
*venivamo
verrei
verremmo
*veniva
*venivate
verresti
verreste
*veniva
*venivano
verrebbe
verrfbbero
Preterite.
Imperative.
venni
*venimmo
*venisti
*veniste
venne
vieni
venite
vennero
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
venga
venga
venga
1
(vegna)
(vegna)
(vegna)
These
Imperfect.
veniamo3
*venissi
*venissimo
veniate
*venissi
*veniste
vfngano (vfgnano)
*venisse
*venissero
regularly formed
These parts are
regularly formed
Sometimes
v"nghiamo.
parts
are
infinitive traere.
from
the
from
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
178. In these
the stem,
(1)
or,
The
verbs
which
from
present stem,
so, three
call them
prefersto
if one
modifications
three
seen
are
119
stems:
formed
are
of
the
tive;
subjunctive and the impera(2) The preteritestem, from which is formed
and
only a part of the preterite;
only the preterite,
(3) The infinitive stem, formed by a contraction of the
present indicative
and
found
often
infinitive and
irregularonly in so
contraction). To these might
(which
future
uncontracted, in the
remains
far
are
infinitive itself
the
where
as
and
they
be added:
conditional
exhibit
this
(4) The
perfect
im-
regular
Whether
the infinitive itself or only the
infinitive stem
conditional
be contracted, the imperfect
and
future
the
indicative and subjunctive,the present participle,
second
plural present indicative, the second
person
singularand pluraland the first person plural
person
finitiv
infrom this uncontracted
formed
of the preterite
are
(or imperfect stem), and so are regular in all
is in fact the
stem, which
originaland
irregularverbs.
(a) The
Latin
irregular.The
upon
forms
is not
explainand
:
irregularities
often
Italian
the
the memory
(b) The
be, but
past participlemay
etc.
,
plural present
irregularonly in the verbs
second
always,
impress
person
indicative
dare, dire
might be called
The
180.
see
tive
imperafare, stare, for which
(s'ssere1),
It may
usually follows the present indicative.
it is
be, although it is not often, irregular. Where
so, as, for
sapere,
present subjunctive:
1
Which
is
entirelyirregular.
it follows
the
ITALIAN
120
sappiate,you
know;
sapete, you
GRAMMAR.
(ye).1
sappiate,know
(c) It will be observed
in
third
their
and
in the
that
first person
others, the
many
know.
may
model
verbs
singular and
as
the
forms:
except the
simply
the
forms)
all the
conditional
and
are
v"'ngono,venga,
that
observed
future
contracted
vengo,
etc.
irregular
(which
strong, i.e.,stressed
are
on
Cf. 176.
stem.
Constructing IrregularVerbs.
179.
under
constructed
the
singular of
after these
indicative,and
present
the
first person
the
plural.
some
The
second
singular of the
present indicative gives the singularimperative. (Cf.
also 180 (3).) The first person singular
of the preterite
givesthe third persons singularand plural.
persons
'Cf.
2
be
may
3
person
180(3).
This
future
second
latter
but
the
leave
formed
Except
is necessary
from
in the
only with
verbs
infinitive uncontracted.
the
verbs
which
Otherwise
contract
the
the future
infinitive.
andare,
avere,
and
stare.
VKRBS.
IRRKOULAR
of
Irregularities
Other
and
Dire
the second
pluralof
person
Verbs.
that
fare
the
apart (cf.74).
case
fate,1and
and
as
be remarked
further
It must
(1)
considered
be
must
Certain
noted, entirelyirregular,
before
"ssere is, as
180.
121
date,
in the
indicative
in
dite
state.
future
and
tional
condi-
is
avere,
sapere,
and
volere
Pon
Put
Vie,n qua!
An
the
present
it down
here!
Come
stare
also
drop
this i
"
compound
their primary. Those
(4) Most
of
that
Cf. French
Cf
follow
verbs
the
differ from
dites, faites.
the Latin
forms.
irregularities
it in any
way
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
122
mention
givenspecial
fare, stare, etc.).
are
Defective
Impersonal Verbs.
181. A
defective
verb
of
(cf Table
is
Verbs,
Irregular
Verbs.
only certain
one
forms
of
which
An
"
etc.
often used
Verbs
impersonallyare: convenire,
"to
appear"; bastare, "to
be
fitting";parere,
enough", etc.; also "ssere and fare:
Piove?
No, n"vica. Is it raining? No,
molto.
It was
Faceva
caldo i"ri
e tonava
and it thundered
Le
Pare
seems
|)meglio
cosi.
The
It is better
defective verbs
sia
the author
(ExercisesXXXII,
1
are
snowing.
warm
day
yester-
Do
che V autore
though
as
be
great deal.
piacequesto po"ma?
Punto.
It
it is
"to
uno
were
poem?
stupido. Not
at all.
blockhead.
thus.
XXXIII,
included
in the
and
XXXIV.)
list,
alphabetical
p.
198.
GRAMMAR
ITALIAN
124
fra
contro,1against.
dopo, after.
toward.
of di before
usage
dopo
venuti
|)rimasto
Mia
senza
without
go
me.
They
danaro.
He
II loro astio
it after dinner.
after
came
me.
without
was
di
senza
money.
My
me.
daughter
me.
tanto
era
Their
Raimondo.
andare
pu"
figlianon
cannot
di
is not
personal pronoun
without.
senza,
verso,
(a) The
between.
(tra),among,
acre
wrath
lei quanto
contro
di
as
fierce
was
against
contro
her
as
against Raymond.
noi
Fra
But:
or
fra di noi,
a:
accanto,2 )
\
,
attraverso, across.
beside,
near.
avanti
accgsto, )
addgsso,3
upon
davanti, )
\ before.
dinanzi, )
(111mezzo),
m"zzo
the
dintorno
(of).
midst
near,
fino,4until, as far
Takes
Also
also di.
seen
the
Used
Ha
also
far
him
top".
Used
adverb.
an
as:
as
as.
186.
go
(of time).
entro, within
beside.
attorno, around.
around.
(intorno),
dirimpetto, opposite.
appetto, facing,opposite.
appresso,
-.
,.
front
according (to).
,
,.
_
...
(davanti), m
conforme,
allato,beside.
^f.
'
(of).
(one'sback),
about.
or
usuallyfollowed
followingprepositionsare
184. The
lui
Verso
him".
v"rsodilui,"toward
by
us";
"among
with
da
and
with
Florence"; Non
since
yesterday";
as
has
where
idioms
in many
in:
be translated,
it cannot
fever".
Andrg
1' ho
visto
Vado
fino
fino
fino
in
da
Fir^nze,
i"ri,"I
cima, "I
am
"he
have
will
not
going
to
PREPOSITIONS.
innanzi, before.
[around,inquanto,
incirca
in
in
in
in
fondo,
in the
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
)
-
at the
185. The
are
causa,
motivo,
" on
ragione,)
prepositional
la, on
(of).1
account
the
side
other
ing.
(of).
in spite (of).
dispetto,
favore,in
the
by
fcjrza,
means
favor
the
ad onore,
in honor
cambio,
in
in
luogo,\
instead
invece,
(of),with
per
much.
alP
186.
The
exchange.
(of)
j
by
m"zzo,
(of).
means
outside (of).
infugri,
di, di preferably
or
(contra),against.
dentro, within.
pre,sso, near,
behind.
di"tro,
sopra,
in m"zzo,
sotto, beneath.
contro
la, that
oltre,beyond, besides.
in the midst.
187. The
followingtake
da
da
or
giu, down.
di:
lungi,
by
this side.
lontano, )
,
(b) Giu,
''down'
per,
It will be
Cf. 183.
"
far.
also
"up", may
especiallyif they are preceded by
observed
and
by.
above.
di qua,
followingtake
close
side.
(a) The
owed
(of).
prima, before.
fuqrior
di
(of).
spite (of).
in
.
(of).
foot
appi",at
ad onta, in
notwithstand-
malgrado,
(of).
before
occasionallya.
con,
followingprepositionsand
usuallyfollowed by di :
locutions
regard (to).
in
riguardo,
risp"tto, )
al di
125
that
many
su,
of these
take
"of"
in
fol-
be
di
English.
126
ITALIAN
Correvano
giu
per la
GRAMMAR.
They
scesa.
running
were
down
the
slope.
Egli ha preso
di
su
la collina.
per
He
taken
has
the
hill
up-
road.
88.
and
Joseph.
Carico
d* anni
dJ onori.
Loaded
Idiomatic
years
and
honors.
Distinctions.
of
prepositionsis in
idiomatic.
It can
be thoroughly
all languages most
learned only by careful observation
and long practice.
different renderingsfor
The followingparagraphs show
the commoner
English prepositions.
189. The
usage
meaning
About.
190.
(1) In the
dintorno
of "around"
sense
attorn
a, intorno
a,
a:
Andava
solo
alia
attorno
chi"sa.
He
went
alone
about
church.
the
(2) In the
A
of
sense
di lui.
Parlavamo
the
"concerning"
We
(3) In
a
and
with
were
What
of
sense
are
'
di, a:
approximately "=
circa, pr"sso
"'ranocirca
hundred
Che
it?
due
ce,ntougmini. There
were
about
two
men.
ora
About
"?
Sono
le undid
pr^sso
eleven.
1
Cf.
46.
poco.
What
time
is
Verra
sul
Aveva
in tasca
fare
del
giorno.
da
ottoc"nto
lire in his
hundred
will
He
lire.
about
come
He
127
had
break.
dayeight
about
pocket.
After.
191.
Uno
tre o,re.
Dopo
Chi
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
di
Dopo
After
with
three
di me?
the
other.
hours.
will
Who
esitato
aver
me?
hai?
Che
"
time
long
after
come
lungamente
hesitated
having
wrong
after
One
After
dopo
verra
time
domandg.
What
asked:
he
is
you?
(2) In the
of
sense
to"
"according
After
l'uso ordinario.
After
fashion.
French
the
the
secondo:
=a,
ordinary
custom.
Unclassified:
(3)
Di
In
somma
after
(infine). After
day.
all.
At.
192.
Alia
5 m9rto
At
in
less often
a,
shall
at
come
in:
o'clock.
ten
last !
di venti
eta
anni.
He
died
at
the
age
of
twenty.
(or in)
La
figtta"
(3)
Sta
the
In the
dalla
house
sense
of "at
Signora
Stardi.
of Mrs.
Ci
fleet is at
He
dell*
onor
is
sea.
of
the house
"
=da:
at
ragione di die,ci
per ce,nto.
va
house.
our
S.
(4) Unclassified
A
At
The
mare.
in:
a,
ngstra.
casa
in
mio.
My
At
honor
the
rate
of ten
is at stake.
per
cent.
128
ITALIAN
Because
193.
of.
della
causa
di:
causa
GRAMMAR.
stanchezza.
sua
of her
Because
fatigue.
Before.
194.
time
(1) Denoting
nanzi
innanzi
di,
prima
(a),
di-
a:
prima di me.
Innanzi
quel tempo,
He
Parti
left before
innanzi
or
me.
quel tempo.
Before
time.
that
Dinanzi
non
me
Before
me
was
ing
noth-
created.
davanti, dinanzi:
presence
scolare
di
ferito di
It
per te,rra. He
is
grande
metri
la
He
measure
di due
pupil was
fatto da
manner
I did
traveling by
seized
lui.
di notte.
sword.
him
land.
by his clothes.
meters
two
by four.
da
it
by myself.
=accanto
was
feet.
a:
sittingbeside
(6) Unclassified:
giorno e
di, su:
of '"beside"
a
by
by post.
came
Two
=
me.
ished
pun-
etc. =per:
pie,di.Bigger by
quattro.
su
(4) Denoting
L' ho
The
wounded
was
means,
pel vestito.
afferr^
Due
He
posta.
per
(3) Denot'ng
Piu
in
da:
spada.
una
passive
teacher,
(a) Or descriptive
|)venuta
venne
by the
Lo
judge,
judge.
Fu
the
By.
195.
Lo
Before
By day
and
by night.
him.
Lo
him
I know
di vista.
conosco
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
by sight.
A due
per
capelli.
al color dei
riconosco
La
129
I know
thousands.
her
the color
by
hair.
of her
196. For.
(1) In the
of", "on
of "instead
sense
of"
account
per:
fatto per
L'
hQ
L'
ho,preso per
it for you.
I did
l"i.
him
I took
frate.Ho.
suo
for you.
Here
is one
per voi.
IJcconeuno
We
start for Pisa.
must
Bisogna partireper Pisa.
li serbo per me.
I keep my
I mi"i consigli
counsel,
own
keep my opinions to myself.
da:
(2) Denoting duration of past time
=
Dimora
for many
Rome
Li
da
cercava
for three
"
or
for"
tre mesi.
is often
He
living in
been
looking
been
has
Pistoia
for
s"i anni.
Durante
Restera
of present time
for
Pistoia per
couple of days.
them
paio
un
di
durante
:
giorni. G.
six years.
For
quattro mesi.
per,
at all in Italian
rendered
not
"ra andato
to
gone
197.
has
months.
Gemmati
had
He
years.
anni.
molti
da
Roma
He
will remain
From.
'
Partii subito di
I left home
casa.
The
Remark
separation is
2.
more
from
at
which
once.
=
fin da:
forcibly expressed by
da.
Cf.
213,
da
Fin
quel momento
spoke no more
he
(3) Denoting
198. In,
From
that
ment
mo-
of it.
=di:
cause
is
She
sufferingfrom
neuralgia.
into.
Avenne
parlgpiu.
ne
non
Soffre di nevralgia.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
130
It
marzo.
andato
in campagna.
Mettetevelo
in tasca.
(2) In the
place
or
in:
happened
He
Put
in March.
it in your
of "within"
in
giorni. They
will
sense
into the
has gone
country.
pocket.
speaking of
time
fra:
fra due
Verranno
in two
come
also
(3) Denoting place after a superlative,
of day (morning, afternoon, etc.)=di:
It is the
most
|)il piu b"lpaese del mondo.
in the
country
IJranole
days.
the time
beautiful
world.
tre del
dopopranzo.
It
(4) In description di :
IJranovestite di bianco.
They
in the
three
was
noon.
after-
(5) Unclassified:
Is he
|)a casa?
Avanti!
Come
]Jraci"coda
in white.
in?
in!
un
colla
Stava
dressed
were
(Jcchio.He
spada
alia
blind
was
He
mano.
in
one
eye.
stood
sword
in
hand.
Of.
199.
(i)=di:
Alcuni
|)un
di loro
ugmo
sono
d*
degP ingrati.
ingegno.
He
is
Some
man
of them
are
grateful.
un-
of talent.
(2) Unclassified:
II cugre
anni.
My
mi
heart
batteva
beat
come
like that
ad
of
un
a
ragazzo
di
lad of fifteen.
quindici
ITALIAN
132
Till,
203.
until.
fino a, sino
GRAMMAR.
a:
star"fino a domani
to-morrow
evening.
Vi
alia
there
stay
until
To.
204.
I19dato ad un
(2) Denoting
object
often
have
They
it to
I gave
of motion
the end
(ad before
amico.
in1 Francia.
andati
Sono
indirect
mio
L'
I shall
sera.
fallen
to
in
the house
of
France.
to
gone
the
friend.
ground.
"
or
to
person
da:
Sono
andati dal
(4) In the
Con
God
Dio
verso
have
gone
to
=ve,rso:
Mr.B.'s.
love
to
man.
(5) In
the
Dissi fra
of
sense
"
within"
I said to
me.
=fra:
myself.
Towards.
205.
Cf. 204
verso.
They
of "towards"
sense
amore
and
Signor Bardi.
Under,
206.
(4).
underneath.
sotto, di sotto:
|)sotto
la tavola.
Guardate
di voi.
sotto
Cf. 186.
With.
207.
(1) In the
of
sense
"along with
"=
con
or
insifme
con2:
Vanno
noi,
con
Vanno
or
of
a
2
In
is
so
city:
Or
used
Sono
insieme
before
andati
a.
the
a
name
Parigi.
Cf. 184
(a).
noi.2
insie,me con
of
con
They
are
country,
never
before
that
fatto
L' ha
con
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
semplice matita.
una
did
He
133
it with
an
ordinary pencil.
(3) Descriptive
=
canuti.
(dai,coi)capelli
pugnale del manico b"llo.
suo
Cammina
(4)
The
gray-haired
With
man.
handle.
beautiful
the
con:
ai
L' uo,mo
Col
da, di, or
a,
chino.
capo
In the
sense
of
'at
1
da
molti anni
Dimorava
He
with
walks
the house
noi.
He
bowed
of",
lived
head.
etc. =da:
many
years
with
death.
with
us.
(5) "With"
Fu
punito
Piangeva
He
punished
was
"on
of "from",
and
of verbs
di rabbia.
She
was
di molti talenti.
dotato
"
sense
number
specificationdi
di mgrte.
In the
(6)
after
of
He
of", and
account
adjectives=di:
weeping
is
with
rage.
endowed
with
many
talents.
(7) Unclassified:
Che fece delle f^rbici? What
did
she
do
with
the
scissors ?
Within.
208.
(1)
In the
di
Dentro
(di,a) :
dentro
me.
"
al mio
Dentro
fra
'inside of"
Within
me.
"
(2 )
of
sense
In the
Within
cuo,re.
sense
of
' '
between
heart.
my
"
"in the
course
of
"
(tra),dentro:
Fra2
Fra
209.
giorni. Within
mura.
three
Within
these
days.
Without.
of "outside
of" =fu9ri
(1) In the sense
Without
the walls.
Fugri delle mura.
(2) Denoting deprivation=senza:
*Cf. 213.
"Cf.
204
di:
(5).
walls.
ITALIAN
134
di
l'assistenza
Senza
GRAMMAR.
Without
nessuno.
the
assistance
of
anybody.
of
Use
Since
210.
used, and
English
their
di,and
is used
in
generalto
where
there
is
idea of direction
an
express
such
no
notion
in
It is used:
English.
indicate
(i) To
the
the action
Datemelo
(2)
prepositionsoftenest
is necessary.
towards, often
Fammi
the
are
no
which
da
da.
since
use
211.
a,
di, and
a,
is
questo favore
after verbs
object,
it to
to
or
for
me.
Do
me.
this favor.
me
an
that
"
performed:
Give
me.
Before
indirect
of motion,
also
of
pelling,
accustoming, attaining,beginning,comcontinuing,hastening,helping,learning,preparing,
and teaching. All these verbs
tion
direcexpress
towards some
goal. A in this case renders English
"to"
"and":
or
Andiamo
M'
vederlo.
"ra abituato
Let
us
and
go
ad andarvi.
was
him.
see
in the
habit
of
going
there.
Cominciarono
Seguitava a seccarmi.
I piccini imparavano
(3)
towards,
mio
on
scrivere.
boring
The
me.
children
were
frat"lloa l"'ggere.I
am
teaching
my
read.
to
In
went
of it.
write.
learningto
Insegno
brother
He
speak
to
general
after
verbs
which
as:
Avvicinati
me.
Come
near
me.
imply direction
Si
appgggiaal
He
muro.
after
especially
And
abituarsi,to
self
is
the
to
pensare,1
domandare,
a
sopravvivere,to outlive.
to
etc.). toccare,1to concern,
[cards,
al
Parliamo
a
a
padrone.
Ask
Oggi tocca
(4) Before
Think
loro.
the
Let
quell'ugmo.
noi.
to
(games,
play
to
Domandi
Pensate
or
son).
per-
ask, demand
to
person,
giuocare,
be
(a
to reflect.
riflgttere,
(to).
of
of
think
addicted
become
to
wall
leaningagainst the
parlare,to speak.
one's
accustom
135
verbs:
(to).
darsi,
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
of
the
fall
lot of.
master.
us
speak
to
that
man.
us.
It is their turn
to-day.
followingadjectives(which, it will
observed, express also in English the relation "to"
"for"):
the
inclinato,inclined.
attgnto,attentive.
atto,
necessario, necessary.
accustomed.
awezzo,
bugno
(in
"able".
caro,
inferiore,inferior.
apt, fit.
the
Cf.
of
sense
82, Remark).
nocevole,
nocivo,
harmful.
ngto, known.
dear.
conforme, like,conformable.
odioso, hateful.
contrario,contrary, inimical.
pericoloso,dangerous.
convenient,
conveniente,
preparato, prepared.
[ing.
corrispondente, corresponddannoso, prejudicial.
disposto,disposed.
eguale,equal.
pronto, ready.
fedele, faithful.
utile,useful.
grato, pleasing.
vicino,near.
suitable.
Only
when
proporzionato,proportioned.
prgprio,
proper,
peculiar.
simile, similar.
superiore,superior.
the verb
has
this
sense.
136
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
(5) After
of
followed
noun
limiting
or
material, in which
another
by
first (but
the
indicative
not
used,
di is
case
tive
descrip-
noun
purpose,
or
212,
of
which
noun:
barca
Una
vela.
sailboat.
"
lumaca.
Una
scala
Uno
a
sgab"llo
Una
macchina
(6) In
L"ggeread
Averselo
A
pi"di. A three-legged
tre
steam-engine.
of idioms, such as:
alta
At
potere
Di
212.
in
expresses
It is used
indicate
to
thing ill.
first.
di.
meno
aloud.
read
take
To
prima giunta.
Non
To
voce.
male.
stool.
vapore.
number
winding stairway.
Not
help.
of
possession.
possessing,also some
general a
the
able to
be
to
sense
person
which
other
article
an
istic
character-
La
del mio
casa
amico.
My friend's house.
gold ring ( ring of gold).
an"llo d* gro. A
di Sciampagna.
Vino
Un
L' ambasciatore
(a) The
is also
Un
Una
Un
of
sense
by
di
second
bambino
La
strada
Un
maestro
di
wine
Swiss
a
from
pagne).
Cham-
ambassador.
qualitypossessed,
where
the first
noun
The
scugla.
kilogram
of butter.
of tea.
cup
cinque anni.
di Roma.
di
The
cases
di burro.
t|.
of
description,
in many
chilogramma
tazza
Champagne
di Svizzera.
expressed
modified
road
A
to
schoolmaster.
is
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
di
Male
Col
the
(1) Before
used
(2) and
211
that
some
Italians
the
padre
the
cases
C"rto,fingo di
ciate.
all'
indipende,nza. He
of
state
di may
in
quale
saperlo,
mezzan^tte.
midnight.
at
be omitted
saper
non
independence.
di scrivere
stopped writing
sapete, o fingetenon
Non
to
smetteva
his father
except those
214:
Italiani
gV
richiamare
sought to recall
Sapeva che suo
In
dagger with
an
under
specified
Cerc9 di
his
be,llo. With
handle.
beautiful
(a)
del manico
pugnale
suo
knew
137
te,sta. Headache.
It is further
He
INFINITIVES.
stato
so,.1
ma
less
(and others
mon)
com-
abbisognare, j
avere
bisogno, )
abbondare,
abusare,
ill use
to
have
to
need
to abound
(of).
(in).
abuse, make
an
fun
burlarsi,to make
congratularsi,to
on
contentarsi, to
(of).
late
congratu-
something).
one's
content
self
(with).
divertirsi,to
self
upon
one's self.
inform
informarsi, to
self
one's
(of).
int"ndersi,to
(of).
(one
take
to
incaricarsi,
skill
have
understand,
(in).
lagnarsi,
) to
lamentarsi,
complain
(of).
wonder
maravigliarsi, to
(at).
one's
amuse
occuparsi,to
self
(with).
dubitare,to doubt
to trust,
fidarsi,
(of).
have
dence
confi-
(with).
to repent (of).
pentirsi,
to profit(by).
profittare,
to
ricordarsi,
(in).
impadronirsi,to
(of).
1
take
session ridere, to
posto
ridersi,
Goldoni,
II Vero
one's
occupy
Amico,
remember.
laugh (at).
make
11,3.
fun
(of).
138
ITALIAN
(3) After
adjectives,such
many
abbondante,
(in).
ammalato, ill.
capace,1capable (of).
ricco,rich (in).
"
soddisfatto,satisfied (with).
vestito,clothed (with).
(of).
degno, worthy
(with).
(of).
vugto, empty.
fecondo, fruitful.
etc.
(4) To express
dei fiori.
"
(with).
pi"no,full (of).
(of), ptjvero,
(in).
poor
Ho
contented
pago,
contento, contented
as:
meritevole, deserving.
rich
abundant,
certo,1certain
GRAMMAR.
the
partitivesense
I have
(cf
47
and
48) :
flowers.
some
"
than
the
and",facendo
del s^lito.He
bow
than
(6) Before a
Quel benedett*
un
d"jnAbbondio
went
making
away,
inclino
Don
A.
men
pro-
less profound
usual.
in
noun
apposition:
del
uomo
signor
curato!
That
blessed
curate
(7) In
Di
ter
bet-
other.
Se n'
fondo
many
adverbial
expressions,such
Di
ngtte. At night.
In Springprimavera.
Di
vista.
Da
213.
expresses
Dire
di si, di 119.
yes,
By sight, [time.
as:
To
say
no.
etc.
denotes
It also
(a) the agency
by which.
in general (b) a sense
of removal, of ration
sepa-
from:
(a)
by
|)una
macchina
fatta da lui.
It is
machine
him.
Essa
Also
She
is
praised by
incapace, incejrto.
every
one.
made
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
140
Camille
Camelia?
da
la Duse
veduto
Ha
Have
Duse
seen
you
as
Egli ti fara
da
He
padre.
will be
father to you.
adjectivesof separation,deprivation,and
(/) With
the like,as1:
ali"no,foreign,averse.
indipendente, independent.
distante,distant.
diverso,different.
lontano, far,remote.
Dependent
The
214.
followingverbs
Infinitives.
rule
i.e.,English "to"
directly,
is not
ardire,to
parere,
dare.
bastare,to
suffice.
bisognare,to
need.
convenire, to
be
desiderare,to
dovere, to
"ssere
be
called
ought,
necessary.
dare.
know.
to
sentire,to feel,hear.
vedere, to
) to be need-
see.
volere,to wish.
ful.
udire, to hear.2
observed
that
auxiliaries
modal
seem.
potere, to be able.
to be
to
sapere,
must,
mesti"ri,
)
to appear,
osare,
suitable.
d* ugpo,
"'ssere
be translated:
to
occorrere,
desire.
owe,
infinitive
dependent
of these
most
in the
wider
verbs
might
sense
of the
term.
farlo subito.
Bisogna
necessary
to
N9, non
do
it at
conviene
Desidera
It must
done
be
at
it is
once,
once.
farlo.
No, it is
partireade^sso? Do
partire alia
N9, vcjglio
sera.
not
you
desire
No,
want
to
do it.
to
proper
go
to
now?
go
in
the
evening.
1
Cf.
(b) above.
2Bramare,
rule
the
"to
doubt",
also
times
some-
I bambini
non
alle
venire
S119I
s"i.
After
verbs
under
211
215.
by
(b) "to" in
denoting duty
the
or
(212 (1)),except:
ing
to", i.e.,denot-
order
"something to",
da2:
necessity,which
arrivare
per
in
time.
good
scendere
through, courtyards
V^ngano tutti,non
salire,lunghi corridoi
nothing
is
the
Quello
has
m'
Non
a
burden
da pr^mere
ha
to
affair of
an
Stare
or
passed
be
to
all of
Come,
you!
of !
il tramonto.
We
waiting
were
he
time.
short
What
tempo.
vita.
la mia
My
life need
not
be
me.
given ! 3
Io glidava
1
temere!
da
ha
che
Quanti conti
be
stairs to
were
sunset.
do is
to
afraid
per vedere
Aspettavamo
see
c' " da
be
to
da
crossed.
be
to
leave
I must
t"mpo.
There
percorrere, cortili da attraversare.
and
ascended, long corridors
be descended
There
also "to'
da
scale
"rano
infinitive
an
of
sense
to arrive
in order
di
tioned
men-
per1;
D"vo partiresubito
once
by
of "in
sense
others
before
it.
known
have
to
those
and
otherwise
a,
which
purpose,
to
children
The
at six.
comes
ought
of motion
in the
"to"
usually
is to be rendered
(a)
He
saperlo. We
dovuto
Avremmo
discorrere.
ancora
sanno
141
yet talk.
cannot
at
INFINITIVES.
DEPENDENT
PREPOSITIONS.
I gave
da bere.
per
"ssere
It is evident
r^ndere!
da
s' ha
"to
after
that
be
about
How
him
to
of motion
verb
accounts
many
something
do
to
anything".
either
or
must
drink.
Cf. 81
per may
(a).
often
used.
be
2
Cf
avere
da
"
=
to have
to
This
construction
"
,
is often
84 (b)
.
best
translated
by
an
English
sive.
pas-
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
142
qualche 095a
you anything
Ha
Have
Yes, I
do?
to
after
prepositionplaced
meaning:
216.
its
cercare,
seek;
cercare
to
play
to
of
of (a
person); pen-
XIV.
the
Following are
AND
0,
che, that.
ma,
come,
per
as.
ne, neither
e, both
(ne
TENSES.
simple conjunctions:
anche, also.2
XXXVI.)
MOODS
CONJUNCTIONS,
of, etc.
be the turn
and
CHAPTER
(e
(a game).
at
think
a, to
(ExercisesXXXV
ask
a, to
a, to
toccare
toccare, to touch;
..
person).1
(a person);
believe in (a
reflect.
su, to
e, and
fies
modi-
often
verb
to do.
domandare
217.
great deal
be present at.
to
sare
have
fare.
da
fare?
da
and),
.n", neither
or
(0
)
0, either
or).
but.
$,
pure, yet.
se,
if,whether.
.nor).
18.
Following are
the
credere in Dio, in
Cristo.
principalsecondary conjunctions,
also words
sometimes
times
conjunctions and somerelative adverbs
and conjunctionallocutions:
But
before
and
i.
nemmeno
and
neppure
elide
the
final vowel
CONJUNCTIONS,
after,1dopo
che
MOODS
(dop chfc),
P9sciache.
che, benche,
; as
as
as
more
so
soloche.
spiteof
as, cosi
as, tanto
the
grado che.
sebb"ne.
...
for,in quanto
if, come
se,
as
in
tale, tanto
quale
.quanto,etc. (Cf. 121.)
come,
the
only,
stante
non
che, quantunque,
...
if
J43
incase,caso,incaso,casomai.
as,2 siccome
TENSES.
AND
piu che.
a.
nondimeno,
nevertheless,
ostante.
non
nor.
comecche,
either,nemmeno,
nep-
pure.
quasi.
long as, tanto, tantoche,
fin tanto.
on
zione
but
rather,
indeed,
bensi.
even,
even,
quando
anche.
except, salvo
ecc"tto che
except that,
non
che.
that,
quanto, quantunque,
per
since
(causal),giacche,poi-
(temporal),dacche.
so, so then, adunque,
so, and
dunque.
che, sicch^.3
so that, di modo
supposing that, posto che,
supposto che.
tuttavia.
if,se, quando.
1
ossia.
since
for, che.
however,
condi-
che.
non.
se
else,ossia.
rather
che, fuorche,
that,
or, ovvero,
or
condition
Cf. 126.
that"
above.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
144
perci9,
dunque,
therefore,
ancorche,
benche,
quantunque.
unless,
7
che
che,
meno
che, infino
whence,
quindi.
though,
"
"
whereas,
considerando
whether,
se,
che.
mentre
"
che,
ecettuato
non,
a.
!o che.
per
while, whilst,
meno
sino
is, cio".
che; that
that
se
yet, nulladimeno,pure,
perg.
non.
m
following
The
219.
by the indicative
subjunctive,sometimes
anche
"
"
che,
appena
di modo
soon
as
che,
as.
that.
so
following are
(cf. 232 (5)):
.
order
}"m
che,
provided
che non,
ancorche,
unless.
if.
even
che,
patto
condition
on
that.
che, before.
che, )
awegna
",
'
(che), in
dato
se,
if.
che
non,
non,
that.
unless.
until.
"
standing
,.
'
order
that.
that.
although.
if.
sebbene, although.
senza
che, granted
eccetto
finche
as
notwith-
che, I
ostante
sempreche,
case.
che,
quantunque,
alth0Ugh
bencS, J"
come
perche, in
that.
as.
junctive
by the sub-
followed
non
caso
soon
as.
condizione
meno
long
as
malgrado
that.
'
'
avanti
,,
always
The
arnnche,
se,
"
accioche,
220.
quando,
tostoche, as
finche, until.
"
(cf.233) :
tantoche,
after.
dopoche,
the
by
onde, wherefore.
if.
se, 7 even
followed
sometimes
are
provided.
che, except.
soloche,
if
only,
provided
that.
MOODS
MOODS
AND
The
TENSES.
verbal
be
good
Mi
II
secca
ol
non
(a)
made
in
(b)
with
other
after
one's
is
noun
with
not
ing
hav-
usually
to
participle.Cf.
with
pnjpriorischio
To
begin
the
be
222.
infinitive
di,
pericolo,una
is to
unbeaten
peril,an
di venire.
dove,
then
may
the
point out,
road,
be used
instead
words
them
with
orms
writes
He
after
infinitive
cept, which
road
at
that
coming.
one
as
of
the
object of
cona
verb,
Non
to
His
me
da battersi.
risk and
c) The
etc.
invece
Scrive
donde,
She bores
beaten.
be
must
Reading
" mostrare,
battuta
own
time
same
senza:
Cominciare
non
omitted
be
noun
the
as
the present
English by
any
omitted
used
article may
The
so
dove
to
(d) In the
same
nor
adjectiveor
ne
che
way
an
andare,
what
go
feel doubtful.
me
infinitive
The
the
dubitare.
fece
it
noun
gioventu.
ete,rnochiacchierare.
suo
chattering.
eglirispostomi
aver
rendered
via
utile alia
governed by
at
mav
answered
as
it
books
ceaseless
her
As
noun.
article and
accompanied by an
preposition,and as a verb
rule an object:
II l"'ggere
dei buoni libri "
may
145
Infinitive.
infinitive is
The
221.
TENSES.
AND
fare.
I do
not
know
where
do.
adverb
forms
infinitive
one
after
concept:
" with
an
146
ITALIAN
5 meglio
It is better
dirlo.
non
GRAMMAR.
to
not
say
it
"not(i.e.,
to-say-itis better").
should
student
The
instance
out
reason
the
presented.
cases
|)piu
than
do
to
It is easier to
meglio.
criticism is
(i.e.,
better
better). Therefore
the
phrase
should
be
easier
The
Neither
222.
noun
and
such
or
not:
rendered
in
categoriesmay
(1) Where
him
saw
the
ever
be used
as
noun.1
the
be
:
distinguished
is evidently a verb:
participle
going to
the
city (
him.
saw
He
was
going
city).
In this
the
case
correspondingverbal
and
noun?
Three
to
doing
it is a verbal
English present participlewhere
be rendered
must
ing
existby the only verbal noun
in Italian, i.e.,by the infinitive (cf. above, 221
with regard 0 every
(a)). The question occurs
Is the participle
English construction:
reallya
verb
the
icise
crit-
Participle.
that
The
Present
than
ats above
nor
For
form, i.e.,the
L* ho visto che
andava
citta.)
(2)
Where
the
Cf.
become
in
and
nouns,
112.
but
The
they
-ante, -ente
are
never
forms
verbs
used
where
as
not
nouns.
adjectives
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
148
Participle.
Past
The
it follows a
English past participlewhen
verb of perceiving,also g'ssere,
a
transitive, especially
tive.
by the Italian infinifare, lasciare, is to be rendered
An
English passive infinitive is also rendered
The
223.
and
by the active
often
after
the
prepositon da :
L' hg sentito dire.
Lo
vidi
Hg
fatto fare
|)un
abito.
un
killed.
him
saw
I have
is
da temere.
He
ugmo
si lasciano mai vedere.
Non
be
ammazzare.
it said.
heard
I have
had
man
to
They
made.
coat
feared.
be
let themselves
never
seen.
Credevo
done
passiveis avoided
by using the infinitive
in Italian
cases
is to be
What
Che
ferito.
severamente
gsser
?
1
in many
other
thought
was
severely wounded.
is
whole
224.
malata
Essgndo
being
mia
Guardandolo
it well he
madre
be
sure
Disse
is
mother
my
ill)I
of the
mother
come.
If he
looked
at
matter.
He
ricco.
My
cannot
sargbbe sicuro.
bgne, ne
would
pgsso venire.
non
said that
he
rich
was
man.
Vedutagli
a
bottega.
him
into
Passata
1
The
Cf. 104
tale
the
disposizione,un
brother
shop
with
of his
is much
had
who
lo
tglse con
his
se
bent
took
appagherg piiidi
chiac-
seen
him.
questa settamana,
passive
(a).
fratglsuo
less
non
m'
frequent
in Italian
than
in
English.
MOODS
Once
chiere.
myself
with
Dette
che
this
words
lo
se
padre
he
longer
no
save
content
mendicante.
him
did not
who
man
he
as
of Past
From
his
beggar.
used
father
My
soon
away.
think
Rendering
An
went
As
and$.
ne
diceva
salvarsi lui.
hard to
I shall
over
credergbbeun
would
one
appearance
voleva
is
vederlo
Mio
week
talk.
said these
had
TENSES.
AND
U91110 che
un
to
that
say
non
it
was
himself.
want
to
save
Tenses
in
Italian.
action
six months.
(a) A
vividlydescribed
Aspettavo
waited
un'
hour,
by the
piu
ora
more
or
use
in the
An
less,and
then
he
in the
An
came.
ancora.
se,mpre
when
he
action
past, but
took
place;
still
was
b"ne allora.
action
The
cagnino seguiva ordinariamente.
usually followed.
d alta voce
quando egli entr^. I
Leggevo
227.
meno,
11
aloud
more
action
10 1' aspettava
Dormivo
past is
representedas:
(1) Incomplete;
(2) Habitual;
other past
(3) Going on when some
expressedby the imperfect tense :
226.
is
an
if finished
past action
little dog
was
ing
read-
entered.
represented
in
as
past either
having taken
place
recently or not yet
w
ITALIAN
aitirelyelapsed,and
is rendered
Glien'
An
at
I have
Have
moment
indicated
definitely
not
by
I19parlato.
ha viste?
Le
GRAMMAR.
spoken
them
seen
you
him
to
it.
about
action
Gli
parlaiun
Le vidi in
Che
ottcjbre.I
be,lla
gitafeci
excursion
(a) The
made
be
indicated) your
Si,ma
hq
the
What
ful
delight-
of these
tenses
may
followingexamples:
ritrovata.
Have
Yes,
you
lost
(at a time
not
and
but
I found
it
again.
settimana
found
it
of all tenses
usage
go.
father!
my
in the usage
borsa ?
sua
The
padre !
yesterday with
by
month
in October.
them
mio
him
to
purse?
perdei la
La
spoke
saw
difference
clearer
ieri con
I took
perduto la
Ha
fa.
mese
again day
is best
before
yesterday.
learned
careful
by
reading.
The
229.
is used
future
The
Future
in Italian where
it is not
in
English2:
(1) In dependent clauses
in which
in
For
the
that
soon
future
leave
row
to-mor-
is fine.
weather
It follows
English the
the
preteritemust
as", and
of
the
be
used
after appena
ch$,
like.
215
(a).
TENSES.
AND
MOODS
la l"ttera,
ve
Quando avr" l^tto1
read the
Remark.
future
The
would
in
English
To
(2)
Sara
I shall go
riccone.
Saranno
He
be
must
che
se,ianni
(3) Sometimes
Padre
and
"
where
action
an
the
more
Germany.
to
He
meco.
rich
very
man.
have
must
been
with
imperative force:
with
madre
onorerai.
Thou
domattina.
You
shalt
dirai tutto
The
Conditional.
to
pendent
denoting result dewould
what
(i.e.,
happen in case
happen) is employed in Italian :
reserved
condition
on
wish, request,
or
I should
like to
there.
go
di dirmelo?
Would
sapre.i.Is
he at home
have
you
the
ness
good-
tell me?
to
|)in
casa?
he may
Non
be, but
I cannot
tell
it
seems
me
ought
"
do
imperfect ind:cative
The
we
to
should
future
comes
under
know
uncertainty:
I
ought
I know
is
the
same
to
know
this
her?).
sometimes
anterior
I do not
you).
The
way
Vorr"i andarvi.
Avr"bbe la bonta
where
everything
me
conditional, besides
The
230.
(a)
tell
must
morning.
to-morrow
lady (
thy father
honor
mother.
thy
Mi
Italian
six years.
me
in
suppositionor uncertainty:
express
un
I have
you.
describe
to
When
(a)):
in Germania.
Vado
it to
render^.
is used
present
be
la
151
used
rule
as
the future.
ITALIAN
152
interrogava,glirispondeva di ng.
Se m'
I should
me
answered
have
conditional
(b) The
him
avr"bberopotuto
from
distance
dal
distava
scala
had
is often
used
where
we
tense:
davanzale
bugn
un
attaccarvisi ?
How
could
Come
tratto.
ladder
The
window-sill.
the
asked
If he
no.
anterior
should
La
GRAMMAR.
was
quite
of it?
i suginon
avevan
aprile,
egli avre,bbe trovato V inv"rno, e
pensato che in America
His
vestito da estate.
1' avevan
family, putting him on
board
ship in Genoa at the end of April,had not reflected
Imbarcandolo
in America
that
suitablyfor
Gf'novasul
would
he
find
from
had
dressed
him
Imperative.
to express
imperative is used as in English,i.e.,
command.
The
a
missing persons are supplied
the present subjunctive:
The
Non
lo faccia.
Che
non
Non
domandare
Do
(you) do it.
not
Let
paiano.
che
is necessary
what
winter, and
summer.
The
231.
finir d'
them
not
quelloche
appear.
ti " necessario.
only
for you.
imperfect subjunctive
(a) The
Ask
may
also
express
mand.
com-
Cf. 232.
The
232.
has
gone
verb
subordinate
(1) After
action
expressingan
before
It follows
Subjunctive.
as
that
the
clause.
verbs
in
some
indicated
doubtful
way
by
is made
subjunctiveis usuallyfound
It is used
ve
express'
what
junctive.
sub-
in
of
command,
consent,
TENSES.
AND
MOODS
153
approval,disapproval,etc.),preference,
opinion (belief,
surprise,will,wonder, and the like:
che
Desidero
Si dice che
has
she
mi
Non
do
piace
him
to
come
soon.
that
say
England.
to
Vorr"i solamente
believe me,
only
to
I want
sia
essa
gone
siibito.
v"nga
che
credessero.
mi
wish
that
facciano
che
they
them
want
believe
would
I do
cosl.
only
me.
like them
not
to
so.
Mi
Credevo
Pensi
Bisogna che ci
I should
of
out
(2)
wish
never
They
how
write
must
che
gone.
much
me.
scrivano.
vorrej.mai
sione.
they had
ci" mi affliggesse.Think
L"i quanto
Non
surprisedthat
am
still here.
are
you
qui.
ancora
you
to think
us.
scritto
that
per
I had
pas-
written
passion.
expressionsof
In
Peccato
che
emotion
sia arrivato!
non
sentiment:
or
What
pity that
he
has
come!
not
!1
Volesse
Dio
Potessi
scoprir1'
grant it !
God
!l
arcano
Would
Could
to
but
God
discover
the
secret
that
Tu
only
it.
di cui pc;ssa fldarmi.
l'unico amico
se,i
friend
(4)
1
seen
After
in whom
a
can
You
are
the
confide.
qualifyingor
called the
ent
independexample of what is sometimes
in
clause".
or
a
subjunctive",
"subjunctive
principal
This
is
'
an
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
154
Cerco
(P
tin
looking
am
for
speak) English.
Scelga un allgggiodov' Ella pgssa stare piu tranquillo.
be quieter.
Choose
a dwelling where
you can
(a) Also after indefinite relatives such as chiunque, any
such asqualwhosoever", and indefinite adjectives
one",
speaks (=
who
servant
can
"
"
"whatever":
unque,
vggliovederlo.
Chiunque sia,non
I do
not
want
to
Whoever
he
be,
may
him.
see
he
leaves.
Lo dico accioche
that
know
they may
Quand'
sappiano la
ne
anche
the
truth
about
1*avessi detto.
non
it in order
I say
verita.
the matter.
if I had
Even
not
said it.
233.
the
doubtful
Se
padre
studiera,suo
will
father
Se
Si da
that
suo
often
padre sar"bbeccont"nto.
he does
c"rto che
per
studies,his
la pace
If he would
be
They
say
satisfied.
for
tain
cer-
is made.
peace
|)c"rto che
If he
satisfied.
be
studiasse
study (but
cont"nto.
sara
la pace
" fatta.
It is certain
that
peace
is
made.
one
In
some
of these
cases
of so-called
conjunctions
sar"i contrario
I should
alia
not
sua
is understood:
with
Were
him.
he
She
is
(as far
principalclause"
Fosse anche
un
magistrate)
(=if he were) a magistrate
"subjunctive
opinione.
agree
vista.
in
156
ITALIAN
gliattestati.
They
in to bestow
come
I should
to
have
twelve
the
boys
to
certificates.
the
in lui
avesse
se
in him
confidence
more
for
waiting
were
fiducia
Avr"i piu
GRAMMAR.
if he
had
desire
more
learn.
(a) The
compound
for the
laid down
reckoned
the
as
dubitato
Hg
would
verb:
che v^ngano.
they
whether
either
past definite
the
present
is
past time
whether
by
pending
imperfect subjunctive,deaction related in the secondary
taking place in present or in
the
given us
you
doubted
however, be followed
may,
represented as
Iddio ci ha dato la
come
had
the
or
whether
on
clause
come.
(6) The
And
doubted
I have
che venissero.
dubitato
they would
come.
Aveva
has
in
tenses
ragione,affinche
in order
reason
si vendicasse
know,
you
that
ce
we
ne
may
il Buondelmonte
have
heard
God
serviamo.
make
use
of it.
lo avete
saputo.
B.
avenged
before, how
himself.
and
(Exercises XXXVII
CHAPTER
ADVERBS.
XV.
AND
NUMERALS
XXXVIII.)
NUMERICAL
VALUES.
INTERJECTIONS.
ADVERBS.
236. Adverbs
of manner;
and
be
ADVERBS.
of
and
157
of time;
cal
(6) Numeri-
adverbs.
Adverbs
237.
Most
adverbs
by adding
of
of
Manner.
manner
formed
are
to the feminine1
-mente
from
jectives
ad-
singular:
honestly.
sincere; sinceramente, sincerely.
sinc"ro,
onestamente,
by
those
add
consonant
any
in
ending
1 and
except
e
preceded by
that
is
preceded
-mente3:
felice,happy;
felicemente, happily.
fgrte,
strong; fortemente, strongly.
facile,easy;
facilmente, easily.
difficult ; dirncilmente,
in
difficile,
difficult manner,
with
difficulty.
particolare,particular; particolarmente, particularly.
(6) Altrimenti,"otherwise
"in
like manner"
(pari),are
guarimente, "(not)
"
almost
"
parimenti
much",
remarkable
"; are
(from altro-a),and
as
showing
-mente
added
to
an
adverb.
238. Other
end
in
or
adverbs
of
fewer
manner,
in
number,
i:
b"ne, well.
cosi,thus, in this
male, badly.
volentie,ri,
gladly.
manner.
etc.
1
Mens, mente,
being
Which
but
have
one
Latin
feminine.
termination
for
masculine
and
feminine.
Cf. 109.
3
Adjectives in
mente, "softly".
-lie do
not
drop
the
e:
mplle, "soft";
molle-
158
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
used
as
in
ending
number
certain
(a)
reallyadjectives
are
l:
adverbs
pr"sto,quickly.
subito,suddenly, at
alto,loud.
basso, low.
once.
etc.
class of adverbs
Another
239.
suffix
of the
]Jcaduto
added
(-oni),
-one
Andar
brancolone
Andar
carpone.
Star
In
same
has
usually to
fallen
To
go
means
nouns:
grope
one's way.
all fours.
on
lean
by
his face.
on
To
(or tastone).
To
gomitoni.
the
He
boccone.
is formed
on
one's
elbows.
way:
cavalcione,astride.
rotolone, rolling.
ginocchioni,kneeling.
sdrucciolone,slipping.
etc.
gara,
6
locutions
Adverbial
240.
'
as
common,
are
indarno, )
competing.
F
m
.".
vain,
malincugre,unwillingly,
vice,nda,by
turns.
adagio,slowly.
)
in fretta,in haste.
invano,
dubbio, doubtless.
senza
etc.
(a)
Such
locutions
are
the
also among
found
other
classes of adverbs:
appena,
di
quando
time
di
as
to
soon
in
hardly.
quahdo, from
as,
time.
d'
ora
innanzi, henceforth.
fra poco,
per
soon.
sometimes.
talvglta,
rado, seldom.
etc.
1
Some
adjectives from
formed
live
which
the
-mente
adverb
has
been
larly
regu-
in certain
pressions:
exyet used in their adjective forms
"to
Parlar
chiaro, "to
felice,
speak plainly"; Vivere
are
happily".
ADVERBS.
Adverbs
The
241.
avanti
of Place.
of
principaladverbs
(avante), before
donde, )
place are:
ci, qua,
(also
cola,
there.
,
y where
dove,
qui, here.
comein).
159
indi, quindi,
ne,
addietro,)
} behind.
....
d'
onde, di
la, thence.
mdi"tro, j
Ci, "here"
242.
"
thence",
in
used
are
and
speaking of
the
when
never
idea
and
ne,
tioned
placealready menof place is at all emphasized.
positionwith regard
a
No,
(a)
N9, ne
from
coming
am
"Here
"ccola, etc.
is
There
it
is",
idea
for
qua
from
spoken
1
the
is used
"there".
place near
They
the
to
city?
"here
is",
she
etc.
="ccolo,
When
or
going
you
there.
Here
qui
Are
v"ngo.
IJccociarrivati.
243.
both
of
are.
place
for "here",
In
the
we
general
person
the
all
emphasized
costi
addressed,
person
is at
and
indicate
costa
li and
speaking
la
and
mote
place re-
the
person
to:
are
often
used
where
they would
in
English be superfluous.
160
ITALIAN
There
a
are
great many
" molti.
dalla citta?
Is he
No, vi torn a.
Ven'
Viene
No,
city?
Venite
is
he
qua.
li.
Andate
"
Go
that
moglie "
di la.
My
of them.
from
coming
the
it.
returning to
Fatti in costa.
Mia
GRAMMAR.
Come
here.
Go
"
way
(the
wife
is there
there.
you).
(e.g.,in the
near
way
next
room).
Adverbs
The
244.
of
Degree and
Following are
times
of
principaladverbs
of
Comparison.
comparison
che.3
of
principaladverbs
of quantity):
called adverbs
abbastanza, enough,
cosi,
are
degree (some
po,co, little.
sum-
quanto, how
ciently.
alquanto,somewhat.
tanto,
assai, very.
trgppo,too much.4
so
much,
as
much.
much.
molto, much.
etc.
Adverbs
The
245.
si,
.
I
"
gia,
of Affirmation
principaladverbs
and
Negation.
of affirmation
are:
course.
sicuro,yes indeed, of
(a)
Gia
in other
Pio,vea
2
Cf.
3Cf.
4
For
Gia
is used
cases
Pigve?
"Cf.
Si.
in
si is
assentingto
employed :
Is it
raining?
It
catinglle.Gia.
"
self-evident
course,
truth ;
Yes.
is
pouring. Quite
"
true.
121.
122
and
125.
126.
gia
del monte.
sometimes
The
sun
"
=
was
almost":
almost
II sole
touching
toccava
the
gia gia
mountain
la
cima
peak.
ADVERBS.
246. The
not.
non,
of
negation are:
mai,
giammai,
non-mai,
principaladverbs
not.
119,no,
non-mica,
non-punto,
not
non-piu,
all.
at
never.
longer.
no
nignte affatto,)
(a) Ng is sometimes
is then
which
denari
Ha
amici
ma
ng.
Saparlare, pensare
(b) Non
the
ng.
It
non.
the
statement
of fact
but
friends.
He
has
money
He
can
talk, he
stands
then
non-mica, non-mai,
not
think.
cannot
In
between.
etc., the
stands
verb
locutions
the
between
the
members:
two
Non
parla
Non
g mica
Non
lo
Non
"
dice
piu.
has
not
Lo
until I have
In
Cf. 235
2Cf.
="he
detto cosi.1
finche
value
non,
the
"until7',
credevo.
non
in
I have
che
se
che,
non
more
of
non
money
thought.
studiergfinche
Non
ha mai
negative
comparison,2 nor in
"except that", etc.:
Hg piu di denaro che
than
nignte.
Non
tardi.
farg mai
(c) Non
or
of
sense
less
always immediately precedes the verb1 unlatter is accompanied by a conjunctive pronoun,
which
in the
used
ha
ne
learned
che
non
compound
(a).
tense
127.
has
not
but
avrg imparato.
I shall
study it
it.
due.3
two".
He
the
has
only
two.
auxiliary is considered
the
verb.
l62
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
of T
Adverbs
of time
principaladverbs
The
247.
me.
are
quando,
when.
ora,
se,mpre,
always.
allora,then.
subito, at
dibu9n'ora,|
sometimes.
talv9lta,
adesso,
3
now.
domani,
tardi,late.
per tempo,
once.
tgsto,soon.
to-morrow.
ultimo,
yesterday.
i"ri,
9ggi,to-day.
prima,
last.
at
at first.1
etc.
of Adverbs.
Comparison
248. Adverbs
like
regularly compared
are
tives
adjec-
(cf. 1 19-127) :
fa cosi facilmente
Lo
"
come
Lo
fa
piu
Lo
fa
meno
"
fa
Lo
facilmente.
piu
male
manco
di
me.
"
compared irregularly:
il meglio,2
best
meglio, better
benissimo,
)
"
ottimamente,
male, badly
di tutti.
facilmente
"
followingare
bene, well
fa il
Lo
"
The
frate.Ho.
suo
facilmente.
249.
che
facilmente
fa molto
Lo
fratello.
suo
"
"
..
well
very J
il pfggio,worst
pfggio, worse
malissimo,
badly
pessimamente, { yery
molto, much
(very)
il piu, most
piu, more
moltissimo, very
ppco,
little
Che
is
visto che
meno,
adverb
an
faceva
ancpr
of
less
time
il meno,
) least,
pochissimo,
f very
in
quando
I have
piu.caldo.
much
like:
sentences
seen
little
it when
it
lo
was
1' ho
still
hotter.
2
Meglio
parve
or
the
maniera
is
il meglio
least
or
adjective-noun
an
o
il meno
bad".
some
male, "this
In
such
in such
fare
noun
alia
expressions as:
seemed
meglio
being
to him
it is
understood.
the
again
Questo gli
best
an
course,
adjective,
164
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
another
qualifyingan adjective,
adverb, or a phrase usuallyprecedes it:
due
tre viaggiatori
incontravano
a
o
Rarissimamente
mediately.
cavallo.
They
travelers
on
Appena
see
me
Essa
as
adverb
An
very
long intervals
two
trovarmi.
They
arrivati
as
soon
venuti
sono
always
She
have
They
il ragazzo
to
came
Cardinal
cardinal
the boy.
Numerals.
numerals
are
it
older.
purposely.
piu fissamente.
s"mpre
fixedlyat
more
is somewhat
done
NUMERALS
The
three
they arrived.
fatto apposta.
Egli guardava
251.
or
horseback.
L' han
looked
at
met
He
165
NUMERALS.
If the
una.1
form:
etc., follows
uno,
the
precedes it,it
it
Ventuna
Lire
is
by
weeks.
Twenty-one
and
hundred
trent-
singular;if
plural:
regularlymade
One
ventuno,
it is made
numeral,
settimana.
centuna.
modified
noun
liras.
one
are
of number,
nouns
having
lar
regu-
the
cardinals
mille,
thousand".
No
' '
Eleven
be
translated
not
counted
Nell'
tre
'
'
and
between
twelve
'
hundred
'
etc.
,
thousand
must
,
etc., and
hundred",
one
dred
hun-
one
hundreds:
mille
due.
cento
ngve
In
the
nineteen
year
two.
Both"
=tutti
due
or
due,
"
all three"
=tutti
i tre, etc.
or
numerals
(/) The
words
two
"one
and
"
hundred,
by
anno
hundred
0)
conjunctionis used
quarantacinque (centoquarantacinque).
forty-five.
and
(d)
'a hundred",
cento,
number
that
indeclinable.
are
has
when
or
the
they
second
Trentuno
or
one
shortened
as
uno,
hundred
into
is
number
trent'
The
As
an
one
or
or
written
be
may
venti
due) except
eight,in
which
case
trentotto, etc.
and
forty
on
cento
may
cen:
ordinal
as
one:
Cenquaranta, censettanta,
252.
twenty
(ventidue
one
be written
must
From
as
after
numbers
etc.
are:
gliuni, le
une.
be
66
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
ventesimo
21st
ist
primo
2d
secondo
3d
tfrzo
2d
ventesimo
30th trentesimo3
40th quarantesimo3
sesto
7 th
sfttimo
8th
ottavo
9th
nono
10th
dfcimo
110th
nth
undfcimo
etc.
etc.
200th
dfcimo
or
8th
diciottesimo
or
dugentesimo
tesimo
etc.
ottavo
1000th
millesimo
2000th
duemillesimo
19th diciannovesimoordfcimon9no
etc.
ventesimo2
20th
duecen-
or
trecentesimo
300th
sesto
dfcimo
ducen-
or
tesimo
centesimo
secondo1
dfcimo
or
ooth
centodfcimo4
115th cento quindicesimo
dfcimo primo1
or
duodecimo
6th
or
etc.
6th
secondo
ventiduesimo
5th quinto
2th
or
ventunesimo
4th quarto
primo
millionesimo
1000000th
etc.
(a)
La
ordinals
The
trentesima
ninety is
except
is
"
novanta
The
tre.
of
thirtieth
"one
are
half"
un
adjective,me' a a
minuto
ci salgo.
an
In m"zzo
up
parte di
adjectives:
three.
(b) Fractions
m"zzo
all
are
Of
meta.
una
me,zzo,
bers
num-
these
noun:
In half
minute
I shall
come
there.
solamente
Datemene
Un
quinto, J. Due
(c) "Firstly",
"
la meta.
Give
dfcimi,T2Tr.Due
"=
secondly
mieramente, secondariam
me,zzo,
primo, secondo,
nte, etc.
Undicesimo,
only half
me
dodicesimo,
also
exist.
rare.
not
allowable.
of it.
2\.
or
pri-
(which
Multiplicatives
253.
167
VALUES.
NUMERICAL
adjectives)are:
are
quadruple* etc.:
triplo,1
triple.
ddppio,double.
Una doppia vittgria.A double victoria.
(
Collectives
254.
ambedue,
ambo,
entrambo,
And
the
are
adjectives:
y
)
the
nouns
C9ppia,a couple.
una
un
paio, a pair.
un
terno,
dozzina,
dozen.
una
ventina,
score.
centinajo,4(about)
un
decina,3half
score,
ten.
migliajo,(about)
un
NUMERICAL
ahun-
[sand.
dred.
numbers.
three
una
of
combination
una
thou-
VALUES.
Dates.
In dates
255.
is
preceded by
where
the number
prepositionand
Accadde
with
be used
must
trecento
representinga
not by the name
It
ottantuno.
year
of a
it :
in
happened
1.381.
Fino
dal 18
in tre atti
12
avea
Even
presentato
in 181
he
had
1870
(a) It is frequentlyused
month
padre
suo
presented
una
trag^dia
to his father
of
on.
also where
the
name
precedes:
Nacque
il 29
giugno
del 1798.
He
born
was
the
29th
of
June, 1798.
1
Also
2Cf.
3
quadruplice,etc.
triplice,
251
(s).
of six stanzas,
stanza
of six
lines",is not
now
collective.
4
Cf. 63.
Di is used
Un
centinaio
di
u^mini.
68
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
lo meng
seco
1833
compassion for
with him to Naples.
with
him
he took
article is used
definite
(b) The
Moved
Napoli.
deir
before
numeral
the
in English,but it
as
indicatingthe day of the month
in dating letters etc., as it is in English:
is not omitted
del mese?
Quanti abbiamo
Qggi " il di"ci. What day
is it?
of the month
Allora scriviamo
Then
let
write:
us
is the
(c) Primo
days
of the
ordinal
only
used
indicatingthe
in
the
otherwise
month;
1902.
cardinals
ployed
em-
are
II1
il due
primo (di)maggio,
of
Time
the time
of
It follows
day
that
and
maggio.
numerals
with
cating
indiwith
is understood
ora, ore,
the
"
one
Sono
undici.
le
il di tre di
Day.
256. The
all.
maggio,
is
le ngve.
that,
plural:
le
Sono
mezzo.
Sono
le
(a)
cinque
II tocco
is
die,ci.
meno
commonly
of V una,
instead
used
"
one
o'clock".'
(b) M"zzo
giorno
Antimeridiano
pomeridiano
Arrivano
5
"
=
alle
in the
"noon",
"
mezzangtte
in the
morning",
afternoon", "p.m.":
=
cinque pomeridiane.
They
will
night".
"mid-
"a.m.";
arrive
at
p.m.
Li
or
ai may
aprile. "Vienna,
also be
employed:
April 5."
Vifnna
li
Numerical
Ordinals
257.
Titles.
in
used
are
169
VALUES.
NUMERICAL
titles of
numerical
the
in
as
no
English:
the Fifth.
Charles
Carlo
quinto.
Libro
Book
the
Fourth,
Sixteenth
the
was
verb
Che
is used
avere
eta
is
old
How
etremes'.
Age.
of Time.
Duration
258. The
king.
unfortunate
very
to
suo
denote
age
figlio?
Ha
cinque
anni
years
and
three
Five
son?
your
Louis
molto.
months.
Cosi
nel
adesso
rono
nell'
anni
sessantadue
Avrg
The
259.
verb
fa, or "
Dodici anni fa, or
anno
|)molto t"mpo
un
Sono
che
anno.
dodici
"Twice
"Two
and
"
Six minus
"
two
two
di
are
are
three
table
iunghezza
in
now
note
to de-
four"
four"
died
three"
.
ago.
time
ago.
long
fanno
=se,imeno
broad"
.
years
Idioms.
=due
=due
leaves
della
Twelve
Numerical
long by
e
ago.
year
anni.
He
" mo,rto.
Miscellaneous
260.
am
of time:
duration
Un
anno.
"ssere, is used
less often
fare, or
So
April.
old next
sixty-two years
sixty-secondyear.
venturo.
anno
secondo
sessantesimo
mio
shall be
my
dell'
aprile
tre, tre.
tavola
=una
larghezza di
quattro.
della
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
i7o
INTERJECTIONS.
The
261.
interjectionsand
commoner
expressions
are:
interjections
(1) Expressive of joy, admiration, approval,
used
as
and
like:
the
Ah!
Good
Oh!
Ah!
done
Well
Bene!
Oh!
Che !
Well!
What
Wretched
me
pQvero
Peccato
(or Che
Pieta!
Pity!
Den
that
What
like:
Alas!
I
Ahimisero!
!
am
pity !
Oh, poverino!
Mercy!
Woe
Alas !
being
peccato) !
Bravo!1
Good!
Oh,
thing!
poor
(3) Surprise:
OhbeUa!
Bacco
Curioso!
Man
Ehi!
Strange!
Ahi!
Per
E cosi!
b"lla!
fine state
"
of affairs!
(5) Encouragement:
Orsu!
Come
Animo!
now!
Courage!
Di
su!
Speak
out!
Via!
via!
cheimpgrta?
(6) Enthusiasm,
Evviva!
Bravi!;
2
he
Che
to
or
an
a
Viva
adjective. Thus
woman,
che
already
is oftcd
done
does
what
it matter?
Italia!
to
two
Long
persons
live
Italy!
would
one
say,
Brava!
come,
applause:
Hurrah!
is
This
Come,
it!"
Che
V abbia
to
introduce
it be
that
ITALIAN
172
it ; if the
future
is not
be constructed
to
For
GRAMMAR.
from
are
the
the construction
of
infinitive.
the preterite
see
178 and
179.
The
are
Andare,
1.
Present
Vado
Verbs
but
to
go,
va
vanno
Va'
go
andate
Vada
andiamo
vada
andiate
vada
vadano
back
The
first and
for
Subjunctive.
Present
again, to examine
again.
trasandare, to go beyond, to neglect.
Dare, to give,dato; di"dior d"tti,
dar".
Remark.
gation.1
conju-
andare:
riandare, to
of the first
Imperative.
andate
2.
Conjugation.
andiamo
vai
Like
First
the
irregularverbs
Indicative.
vo
or
four
of
accent.
Di"
bracketed
in exercises.
also
are
Forms
third
and
stare
belonging
forms.)
not
(Cf.Latin
for reference
and
preceded by
or
are
"or"
didrono.
not
are
to
here
be
alternate.
nally,
origi-
learned
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
3.
faccio
fo
or
fa' fate
fate
fanno
Like
assuefarsi,to
malfare,
one's
accustom
the
All these
f"cciano
do
to
mischief.
tame.
do
again.
soddisfare,to satisfy.
verbs
3d sing.ind.
1st and
take
pres.:
the
written
accent
disfa,rifa,etc.
Ind.
Imperative.
Ind.
stg stiamo
stetti stemmo
stai state
stesti steste
sta
stette stfttero
stanno
Like
Present
Subjunctive.
stia stiamo
sta' state
stia stiate
stia, stiano
or
stieno
stare
ristare,to
sovrastare, to stand
cease.
soprastare,to stand
over,
to
over,
to
tarry.
sottostare,to be subject.
command.
like the
accented
compounds
of dare
fare.
(a) Distare,
and
f"ccia
undo.
to
(sfare),
Remark.
and
facciate
to
rifare,to
contraffare,to counterfeit.
Pres.
faccia
mansuefare,
confarsi,to be suitable.
4.
facciamo
to liquefy.
liquefare,
self.
on
faccia
fare:
disfare
Subjunctive.
Present
facciamo
fa
Imperative.
Indicative.
fai
173
has
no
"
to be
present participle
; otherwise
it is like stare ;
and
XLII.)
also
found.
Faci, face,
are
are
regular
ITALIAN
174
Verbs
Irregular
GRAMMAR.
of
Second
the
Conjugation.
263. The
of the
second
ing
less irregular.1Of those endor
conjugationare more
in -ere, only two, godere and
temere, are
perfectly
nate
regular,i.e.,have all the regular forms without alterirregularones.
The
following are all the '-ere verbs that are perfectly
regular:
2
of the Second
(a) IrregularVerbs
264. Most
the
of these
verbs
stem-vowel, only in
-6re.
stressed
strong, i.e.,
are
and
on
junctive,
sub-
and
except in
Conjugationin
in the
of the
The
infinitive,the vowel
regularly in -uto.
perfect
contracted
antepenultbeing stressed,is never
; the imtherefore be formed
tenses
directlyfrom
may
it.
The
future and
conditional
are
in
some
verbs
Verbs
the
1
In the
Some
Sometimes
sense
of
have
the
with
"
to
weak
of all
meditate."
See
preterite.
contracted
future.
irregularverbs
68, p. 184.
tracted.
con-
having
are
of the
IRREGULAR
5. Dovere, to owe;
VERBS.
175
lacking.
Present
devi
(debbo, dfggio)
(debbi)
deve
(debbe)
devo
dobbiamo
d^vono
"
(dfbbono, dfggiono)
Subjunctive.
(deva, d^ggia)
debba
(deggiamo)
dovete
Present
debba
Indicative.
dobbiamo
"
dobbiate
d"bba
d"bbano
(d"vano, d^ggiano)
6.
Present
Indicative.
posso
possiamo
Subjunctive.
Present
possa
possiamo
pu9i potete
ppssa
possiate
p9ssono
ppssa
p9ssano
pug
7.
si"do
Present
sediamo
seggo
(seggiamo)
sedete
si"de
sifdono or sfggono
sedere
sieda
or
"
siedi
Like
sedftti,
seder".
or
Indicative.
Present
or
tive.
impera-
segga
"
"
Subjunctive.
sediamo(seggiamo)
sediate
si|dano
or
sfggano
"
possedere,to
to supersede.
soprassedere,
possess.
risedere,to reside.
(Exercise XLIII.)
II.
Verbs
and
having
plicated
redu-
Cadere,
8.
Present
cado
to
Indicative
(caggio)cadiamo
cadi
cadete
cade
cadono
Avere
Like
2
by
fall,caduto; caddi,2cadr".
belongs
avere:
The
the
dero.
aid
of
forms
179:
(caggiamo)
to
this
class, but
Subjunctive.
(caggia)cadiamo(caggiamo)
(caggiono)
riavere,
other
Present
cada
has
cadiate
(caggiate)
cadano
(caggiano)
already
been
given (74).
etc.
of the
preteriteare
to be
constructed
cademmo,
from
this,
cadeste, cad-
176
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
cadere:
Like
"
accadere, to
to fall again,
ricade*re,
scad6re, to fall off.
happen.
decadere, to decoy.
sapr".
9. Sapere,to know, saputo; s"ppi,
sappia sappiam"
sappiamo
so
Subjunctive.
Present
Imperative.
Indicative.
Present
sai sapete
sappi sappiate
sappiate
"
sa
sappiano
sanno
Tenere,
10.
to
Indicative.
Present
tengo
teniamo
tieni
tenete
(tenghiamo)
teniate
"
tifne tfngono
Like
Subjunctive.
tenga teniamo
(tenghiamo)
tfngano
tenere:
appartenere,
rattenere, to detain.
contain.
to
obtain.
to
intrattenere,to
delay.
entertain,
mantenere,
maintain,
to
sostenere, to sustain.
11.
Present
Indicative.
Imperative.
Present
v$glio vogliamo
vupi
volete
vuole
v9gliono
"
v^gli vogliate
volere
Like
Subjunctive
v^glia vogliamo
vogliate
v^gliano
"
disvolere
(svolere)not
rivolfre,to
to
wish, to refuse.
have
wish
mind
to
again, to
do again.
III.
Preterites in -si :
12.
Calere, to matter,
make
difference,caluto, calse.
Impersonal.
conditional
Present
Present
cale
1
are
Moise
not
in
gives
use.
and
Subjunctive.
c"glia
carra
Caluto
(calera)and
is also almost
carrebbe
never
(calerebbe),but
used.
they
IRREGULAR
Dolere,
13.
Present
VERBS.
to
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
dolete
d9lgono (d9gliono)
"
d^lgano (d9glianoj
dolere:
Like
condolere, to condole.
Persuadere,
14.
dolsi,dorr$.
Present
d9lgo (dQglio)dogliamo
du9li
du9le
177
to
Like
persuade,
in the
Regular except
persuasi.
persuaso;
persuadere :
dissuadere,to dissuade.
Rimanere,
15.
to
remain,
rimasto
rimarr^.
Indicative.
Present
rimango
rimaniamo
rimani
rimanete
rimane
(rimanghiamo)
rimanga
rimaniamo
rimanga
rimaniate
(rimanghiamoj
rimangano
rimangono
rimanere:
Like
to
permanere,
remain.
16.
Subjunctive.
Present
Present
Indicative.
vali
valete
vale
valgono (vaglione)
valere
to
equivalere,
of the
vagliate
valgano (vagliano)
be
equivalent, invalere,to
become
rivalere, to
worth.
same
Subjunctive.
Present
Like
(valso); valsi,varr^.
prevalere,to prevail.
one's
self
recover,
valid.
avail
again.
IV.
in -vi
Preterite
17.
Parere, to
Present
seem,
Indicative.
paio paiamo
pari parete
pare paiono
or
pariamo
appear,
paruto
Present
parso
or
parvi,parr J.
Subjunctive.
paia paiamo
paiate
paiano
or
pariamo
178
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
V.
*
Preterite in -cqui
Giacere, to lie,giaciuto;giacqui,giacer".
18.
Present
Indicative.
Present
Subjunctive.
giacciagiacciamo
giacciate
giacciano
giacciogiacciamo
giaci giacete
glace giacciono
"
giacere:
piacere,to please.
Like
tacere, to be silent.
VI.
and
Solere
of the
other
vedere
Indicative.
Present
sogliamo
s"?glio
suoli
solete
suole
s"?gliono
Vedere,
20.
Present
conjugation:
has no imperaof, sglito,2
tive,
"
to
see, veduto
or
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Present
vediamo
vedete
vede
vedono
vedere
Subjunctive.
solessi,etc.
vedi3
Like
Imperfect
Subjunctive.
sdgliasogliamo
sogliate
s9gliano
(veggo, veggio)
vedo
any
conditional.
nor
Present
from
of this
habit
in the
preterite,future,
different
somewhat
verbs
irregular
Solere,to be
19.
are
(veggiamo)
(veggono, veggiono)
"
antivedere,4to foresee.
awedersi,
to
perceive,
mark.
re-
provvedere,6 to provide.
ravvedere, to improve,
form,
re-
[again.
divedere,5to convince.
rivedere,
prevedere, to foresee.
travedere,to
{Exercises XLIV
1
Cf. Class
Used
Sometimes
XLV
shortened
into
/e' in
Future
and
conditional
familiar
see,
see
examine
indistinctly.
.)
also become
imperative singular may
4
Past participleonly anteveduto.
6
Only the infinitive is used.
6
and
to
was
accustomed."
conversation.
ve\
provvedero, provvederei.
The
180
29.
ITALIAN
Chiudere,
to
GRAMMAR
chiudere:
Like
include.
accludere,to enclose.
includere,
concludere, to conclude.
precludere,to preclude.
to
escludere,to exclude.
30.
31.
Conquidere, to
conquer,
32.
Contendere,
to
bruise,
33.
Correre, to
run,
corso;
Like
Rare.
conquiso; conquisi.
contuse-
Rare.
; contusi.
corsi.
correre.
"
accorrere,
to
run
flock,to
to
concorrere,
in haste,
com-
pete.
percorrere,
through.
to have
ricorrere,
soccorrere,
incorrere,to
scorrere,
to
occorrere,
34.
happen.
to
succor.
to pass
trascorrere,to
recourse
away.
run
over.
decidere:
circoncidere,to
coincidere,1to
to
incidere,
35.
rapidly,
pass
run
discorrere,to discourse.
incur.
to
cut
cut
round.
coincide.
to
precidere,
recidere,to
cut
off.
cut.
into.
offend.
Like
esp"llere:
to compel.2
comp^llere,
to repel.
rep^'llere,
to impel.
imp"llere,
to
explode, esplc;So;
esplgsi.
39. Esplgdere,
1
Also
regular.
Rare.
to.
IRREGULAR
40.
Evadere,
Like
evade,
to
evasi.
evaso;
evadere:
invadere,
41.
181
VERBS.
Fondere,
to
to
invade.
fondere:
Like
confdndere,1to confound.
42.
44.
45.
43.
Pret. mulse.
Defective.
Rare.
48. P"rdere,
lose, p"rso
to
(oftener perduto);
learn.
compr"ndere,to comprehend.
Radere,
Like
to
radere
shave, raso;
to retake.
riprgndere,
to surprise.
sorpr"ndere,
rasi.
sorradere, to
51.
presi.
prgndere:
to
appre*ndere,
50.
p"rsi
graze.
R^ndere,to render,
reso
(renduto);
resi
(rendei,ren-
detti).
Like
r"ndere:
to yield,surrender.
arrg'ndere,
1
Which
does
not
have
the weak
forms
exhibited
by its primitive.
82
ITALIAN
Ridere,
52.
Like
to
ridere:
arridere,
smile
to
sorridere,to
53.
Rodere,
Like
GRAMMAR
to
smile.
rosi.
roso;
gnaw,
rodere
favor.
to
upon,
corrddere, to corrode.
to
(discendere1),
54. Scendere
Like scendere:
ascendere,
55.
Sparge re,
Like
to
strew,
spargere:
Sp"rgere,to
asp"rgere,
scesi.
(sparto,poetical); sparsi.
sparso
sprinkle.
to
sceso;
to ascend.
cospargere,
57.
descend,
speso;
scatter, sperso;
spesi.
spersi.
Rare.
spargere:
to disperse.
disp"rgere,
cospargere,)
-nkle
t"ndere:
to show.
ost"'ndere,
to
st^ndere(dist"ndere)
to attend, wait.
attgndere,
contendere,to contest.
to understand.
intgndere,
59.
tend.
Like
ex-
Rare.
t^rgere:
uccidere:
ancidere, to kill.
no
Discendere
This
is the
is the
older
transitive
past participle.
Rare.
form
verb
of scendere.
; the
intransitive
is
regular,but has
183
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
II.
in
participle
Past
Mettere,
61.
Like
ammettere,
to
preteritein
-sso,
put,
messo;
misi
-si:
(messi).
mettere:
admit.
premettere,
to
premise.
to commit.
promettere,
to
promise.
to
commettere,
compromettere,
to
rimettere,to
compro-
remit.
scommettere,
mise.
framm^ttere,
manomettere,
smettere
interpose.
to
to
lay
hands
to
wager,
(dismettere),
to
quit.
sottomettere, to submit.
upon.
permettere,
to
permit.
trasmettere,
transmit.
to
III.
Past
62.
in -ssi:
in -sso, preterite
participle
annesso;
ann"ssi.
Ann^ttere,to annex,
Like
ann^ttere:
connect.
conn"ttere, to
connettei.
64. Comprimere,
deprimere,
to
press,
comprimere
to
cedei
depress,
compre.sso;
de-
opprimere,
c^ssi.1
succeed.1
compre,ssi.
to
reprimere, to
of
premuto
exists.
is
oppress,
repress.
sopprimere,to
Italian.
Generally a weak verb in modern
The
primitive primere (oftener prf mere)
pre,sso instead
or
esprimere,to express.
imprimere, to impress.
or
succ"dere,to
preciate.
c"sso;
connettuto,
c"dere:
conc"dere,to concede.1
to intercede.
interc"'dere,
Like
also
Rare.
Has
suppress.
regular, although
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
Ksctitat
iiscuaBO; jjmhhm
"
-
dis:_:e:f
Like
coz:_:r:r
incutrrr
Fendere.
66
concoaN)
past participle
:;
inspire mfnse.
split,fenduto
fendei
:e=5o:
fendftti
Eessi
Figgere figere
--
Fiertere.
Like
bend, Hesse
tc
rif.r::r:r
69. Influere
u
u
prom
in
influence,influsso
be
overe
Alsc reflettuto
reflect
to
infioss
movendo.
mcve.
1 riflettei.:
an
"
mosso:
moss.
overe
overe
Rare
kneel
muovere
affect
rim
mote.
s:mm
Scindere
-:
to
be
Mgvere
Like
rlessi.
::":::
genufl$tteretc
comm
me'sseU
::vt hide
5:~:i"rre
-:
tljggere:
[ike
fix,fisso
t:
.
sdsBQ
overe.
o
:o
overe.
scindei
remove.
fee
?::r
up.
s::?s.
.
S;::e:e
-:
scuotere
BC
perc
BCfSSO
....-.-.
scossi.
::ere
tc
otere
rise
sti
| a shake
otere
Suggere.
-:
sock
bo
snggei
boss
s_::
(up)
rticiple. Preterite
re
5_"r.
sugga.
etc
--"::
IV.
-
-_
rl
A;:orgere
in -si:
ret
". -to
accorto:
accgrsi.
accorgerr
,;:
-I.
rgere
to
e.
pe~
weak
when
gh\
t means
CI
lird
36,3
conjugation, is
Strang
oft
ener
used.
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
75.
Ass^lvere,to
assolvetti
assglto or
assolvei,
ass^lvere:
to
ris^lvere.
dissolve.
melt,
assoluto;
assglsi.1
or
Like
absolve,
Assumere,
Like
to
assunto.
assume,
assumere:
to
consumere,
to
presumere,
consume.
to
cinto
gird,
presume.
cinsi.
cinger^
(cignerj).
Present
Indicative.
Present
Subjunctive.
(cignono)
(cignano;
cingano
Imperative.
cingere:
Like
giungere (giugnere),to
(pugnere), to prick,
punto: punsi.
pungere
ar-
giunto. giunsi.
raggiungere, to rejoice.
rive,
(mungere),
mugnere
sp^'gnere^spengere),2to
milk,
to
munsi.
munto:
piangere (piagnere),to
to push,
spingere(Spignere),
stringere (strignere), to
weep,
pianto. piansi.
compiangere,
to
ex-
brush,
stretto
strinto;
or
strinsi.3
bewail.
rimpiangere,to regret.
pingere (pignere),to paint.
dipingere (dipignere), to
to
tingereitignere),
dve.
lignere (lingere),to
unto;
anoint,
unsi.
paint.
1
cf.
The
forms
strong
solvere,122,
The
This
forms
are
poetical.
For
riscUvere,
"to
determine
",
p. 191.
with
gn
are,
however,
quite as
common
as
those
with
ng
stretto.
differs
from
cingere
only
in
having
the
past
participle
86
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
gather, cogli"ndo,cglto,cglsi,
Cggliere(cgrre),to
79.
coglierg(corrg).
Subjunctive.
Present
Indicative.
Present
Imperative
present indicative.
like
cggliere:
Like
to collect.
raccggliere,
ascigglisciggliere
(scigrre,
to untie.
ere, disciggliere)
receive, wel-
to
accggliere,
come.
to absolve.
prosciggliere,
change of
with
Also
to
prescegliere,
choose
(e for
vowel
throughout) :
scegliere(scerre)to choose.
to select.
trascegliere,
be-
care.
And
1,
tggliere
(tgrre)to take, take
distggliere)
stggliere
(stgrre,
,
to
dissolve, divert
80.
Cglere,to
revere,
away.
colto
C9I0and
present indicative
81.
from.
or
cglein
culto.
Defective.
Only
Rare.
use.
shine.
No
Rare.
Like
fulgere:
rifulgere,to
shine.
Also
rare,
defective, and
poetical.
1
Here,
contractcd
as
scegli^ndo, togliendo,
etc.
from
the
un-
88
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
to turn, vglto;vglsi.
V^lgereor v(Jlvere,
Like v^lgere
:
to wrap
invglgere,
up.
awglgere (awglvere), to
to turn, revolve.
rivglgere,
wrap.
to overturn,
to devolve
(past
sconvglgere,
devglvere,
to unfold.
devoluto).
svglgere,
participle
95-
V.
in
in -tto^preterite
participle
Past
-ssi:
to afflict,
affiitto;afflissi.
96. Affligere,
97. Condurre, to conduct, conduc"ndo, condotto;
con-
dussi.
condurre:
Like
addurre, to bring,allege.
dedurre, to deduct
(dedotto
introdurre,to introduce.
dedutto).
ducere1,to conduct.
ridurre,to reduce.
indurre, to induce.
tradurre,to translate.
or
produrre, to produce.
sedurre,to seduce.
to correct, corr"tto;corr"ssi.
98. Corrgggere,
Like correjggere:
to direct.
dirigere,
rgggere 2,to govern.
to
erigere,
99.
100.
1 01.
erect.
102.
Preterite lusse.
Like
Rare.
lucere:
to shine.
rilticere,
1
not
its past
2
The
contracted
into
participle.
primitive,but
8Cf.7o(3).
or
rilucei.
infinitive
is
poetry. The
Dutto, "duct", is etymologically
only
durre.
much
Pret. rilussi
less used
in
than
corrfggere.
4Cf. 70.
IRREGULAR
189
VERBS.
103.
104.
105.
Like
ascrivere,to ascribe,
circoscrivere,
descrivere,to
to prescribe.
[scribe. prescrivere,
circum-
to
proscrivere,
describe.
to
proscribe.
sottoscrivere, to subscribe.
inscrfvere,to inscribe.
trascrfvere,to transcribe.
to destroy, dissolve,strutto;
Struggere (distruggere)
106.
strussi.
107.
Trarre
(traere),to
draw,
trarr".
Like
trarre:
attrarre,to
attract.
estrarre,to
extract.
contrarre, to contract.
protrarre, to protract.
detrarre,to
to
ritrarre,
detract.
draw
back.
sottrarre, to subtract.
VI.
Past
108.
in
participle
-sto, in -si :
or
Chigdere,to ask, chi"sto;chie,si
Like chi^dere:
to request.
rfe^^dere,
to inquire.
inchi"dere,
109.
Nascondere,
to
nascondere
Like
chiedei.
hide, nascosto;
nascosi.
"
ascondere
no.
Porre
Present
1,to hide,
Present
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
pongo
poniamo
poni
ponete
poniamo
poniate
pone
pongono
pongano
The
This,
primitive, but
the
uncontracted
ponga
less used
form,
than
nasc"3ndere.
is still used.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
190
Like
anteporre,
porre
to
intraporre,to interpose.
prefer.
(apponere),to affix,
apporre
impute.
disporre,to dispose.
oppose.
posporre,
to
postpone.
preporre,
to
prefer.
riporre,to replace.
sopporre, to place under.
(esponere, sporre),
esporre
to
opporre,
expound.
imporre,to impose.
to
to
supporre,
suppose,
in.
rispondere:
to correspond.
corrispondere,
Like
VII.
Verbs
Condscere,
112.
to
know
the
(by
senses), conosciuto;
conobbi.
Like
condscere:
ricondscere,to recognize.
sconpscere
Crescere,to
113.
Like
(discondscere)not
to
know.
cresciuto; crebbi.
grow,
crescere:
"
increscere, )
to increase.
accrescere,
,
decrescere, to decrease.
Indicative.
Present
nasco
115.
-cqui2:
Preterite.
nacqui
etc.
nacesti,
etc.
etc.
Present
or
sorry.
J
nacqui.
Subjunctive.
nasca,
nasci,
y to be
in -to,preterite
in
114.
nuQco
rincrescere1,)
Indicative.
Present
mjiccionociamo
nu9ci
nocete
nu9ce
nu9cono
nuoca
[ciono
or
119c-
in
(c) Past participle
1
Impersonal.
or
Subjunctive.
n^ccia
nociamo
"
nociate
"
nu^cano
in -ppi:
-tto, preterite
2
Cf.
giacere,18, p. 178.
[ciano
or
n9c-
IRREGULAR
Rompere,
116.
Like
191
to
rompere:
to
corrompere,
interrompere, to interrupt.
corrupt.
dirompere, to break,
to break
erompere,
VERBS.
break
irrompere, to
bruise.
forth.
in.
to burst
prorompere,
regular,preteritein -wi
participle
(bevere),to drink, bev"ndo; bevuto
117. Bere
bewi
(beveior bev^tti).
(d)
bevo
bevi
beve
Past
Present
Indicative.
or
beo
beviamo
or
bei
bevete
or
bee
bevono
Present
beva
bea
forth.
(beuto);
Subjunctive.
be(v)iamo
or
beiamo
or
beete
be(v)iate
or
beono
be(v)ano
or
118.
VIII.
Verbs
irregularin
the past
participle
only:
Assistere, to be present,
119.
Like
to
assist,assistito.
assistere1:
consistere,to consist.
to perish.
persistere,
desistere,to desist.
resistere,to resist.
to
esistere,
sussistere, to subsist.
exist.
to insist.
insistere,
Concepere,
120.
Like
to
conceive, conc"tto.
concepere
percepere,
to
Like
perceive.
esatto.
esigere:
to
transigere,
transact.
to undo,
Solvere,
Like solvere:
to dissolve.
diss^lvere,
1
Esigere, to exact,
121.
122.
soluto.
to determine.
risglvere,
verbs
are
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
192
IX.
Vivere,
123.
vivrg.
(vivuto),vissi,viver"or
live, vissuto
to
"
Like
vivere
"eat
convivere, to live together,
or
drink
together.
rivivere,to revive.
Verbs
Irregular
of
Third
the
Conjugation.1
I.
(a) Verbs
the
Cucire, to
124.
Present
cticia
a
and
o, but
Like
or
cucire
sdrucire
Empire
125.
Present
or
having
cucisco, etc.
(This verb
and
Present
junctive
sub-
inserts i before
i.)
:
or
scucire,to rip.
(sdruscire)
"mpiere,to fill,
empi"ndo,empito, empii.
Present
Indicative.
empiamo
empite
fmpiono (empiscono)
irregularforms
Like
or
cucisca,etc.
fmpio (empisco)
"mpi (empisci)
fmpie (empisce)
These
cucio
before
not
but
cucito, cucii.
sew,
indicative
tenses
are
from
Subjunctive.
fmpia empiamo
empiate
^mpiano
"mpiere.
empire:
participleadempiuto.)
to
compire (cgmpiere),
perfect. (Past participle
compiuto. Cdmpito is used as an adjective.)
For
forms
verbs
see
71.
which
do
not
show,
or
do
not
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
126.
salsi.
Indicative.
Present
or
193
salite
salgono (saliscono)
(salisce)
sale
(sagliamo, salghiamo)
saliamo
salgo (salisco)
sali
(salisci)
Subjunctive.
Present
saiga (salisca)
saliamo
(sagliamo, salghiamo)
sagliate
(salisce)
sale
salgano (saliscano)
salire:
Like
to reascend.
risalire,
assaiire,to assail.
or
127.
The
stem
diphthong
may
under
the accent
s"guo
etc.
si^'guo,
128.
udiamo
odi
udite
ode
129.
Uscire
oda
udiamo
"
udiate
"
9dono
to
(escire),
Present
go
fsco
esci
uscite
Present
Subjunctive.
usciamo
esca
"sci fscono
Like
9dano
out, uscito,uscii.
Indicative.
usciamo
Subjunctive.
Present
Indicative.
Present
"
usciate
"
fscano
uscire:
to succeed,
riuscire,
to turn
out.
Indicative.
Present
Subjunctive.
'
spaia or sparisca spariamo
spaio or sparisco spariamo
spariate
[cano
spariot sparisci sparite [riscono
or
spaiano
sparisspare or sparisce spaiono or spa"
"
Like
apparire,to
sparire:
appear,
apparso,
apparito
apparvi,
parsi,apparii.
ap-
comparire, to
parso
or
appear,
comparito,
er
comcom-
parsi,comparvi, comparii.
ITALIAN
194
Venire,
131.
come,
Present
Indicative.
Present
(ven-
veniamo
(vegno)
vengo
to
GRAMMAR.
venga
Subjunctive.
(vegna)
veniamo
ghiamo)
vieni
venite
viene
vfngono
ghiamo)
veniate
4"
(veg-
venire
nano)
prevenire, to hinder.
avvenire, to happen.
convenire, to
divenire
[come.
agree,
(provvenire)
to
proceed from.
sovvenire, to relieve.
intervene.
invenire,to find
provenire
be-
(devenire),to
intervenire,to
(vfg-
vfngano
nono)
Like
(ven-
svenire,to faint.
out.
(c) Verbs
or
Indicative.
Present
mugio (muoro)
Present
moriamo
or
muo-
muQia
Subjunctive.
(muora)
moriamo
iamo
muori
muoi
or
muore
"
mugiono
"
Dire, to
say,
(mug-
muoiate
mugiano
dice,ndo,detto; dissi,dirg.
Imperative.
dico
diciamo
dici
dite
dice
dicono
dire
Like
(sdire)to deny.
replacing
2
diciate
(benedicere), to
In all forms
diciamo
dicano
Subjunctive.
di' dite
bless.
disdire
Present
dica
addire, to assign.
benedire
(muo-
rano)
Indicative.
Present
muo-
iamo
morite
rono)
133.
or
where
the
indire, to
announce.
maledire,
to
curse.
predire,to predict.
ridire,2to repeat.
diphthong
uo
occurs
is sometimes
found
it.
Redire,
"to
return",
(poetical,)has
nothing
to
do
with
dire.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
196
wise
OtherNo past participle.
Comp"tere,to compete.
regular.
No
past participle.
converge.
146. Conv^rgere, to
Otherwise
regular.
No past participle.
147. Delinquere,to be delinquent.
Otherwise
regular. Poetical.
wise
to diverge. No past participle.Other148. Div"rgere,
regular.
found.
to extol.
Only estglle
149. Estgllere,
No past participle.Used only
to be hot.
150. F"'rvere,
145.
151.
Gire,to
152.
Present
go,
No
wound.
Rare.
gito.
Imperfect.
Indicative.
past participle.Otherwise
Imperative.
giamo
gite
gite
conditional
and
Future
Present
Subjunctive.
giamo
giate
Poetical.
ire:
Like
redire,to
return.
to
Illanguidire,
Otherwise
regular.
154.
155.
Lambire,
in the third
lece
No
other
to lick.
No
faint.
No
past participle.
person.
156. Lecere
Present
grow
to
(licere),
be lawful, lecito
Indicative
(lice)
parts found.
Poetical.
(licito).
only
VERBS.
DEFECTIVE
Olire,
157.
olivano
and
oliva
used.
Perire,
158.
indicative
imperfect
Only
smell.
to
197
No
perish.
to
wise
Other-
participle.
present
regular.
Priidere,
159.
in
the
third
Used
participle.
past
only
person.
Ri"dere,
160.
No
itch.
to
Present
to
return.
Present
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
ri"do
ri"di
ri"de
161.
Stridere,
No
shriek.
to
participle.
past
(Poet.)
rifdano
ri"da
rifdono
Otherwise
regular.
162.
Tangere,
163.
Urgere,
164.
V"rtere,
indicative
to
Has
urge.
and
only
tange.
urge,
but
urgeva,
used
urgesse.
only
in
the
imperfect.
v"rtere:
controv"rtere,
165.
only
Regular,
turn.
to
present
Like
Has
touch.
to
Vigere,
Used
to
only
be
in
to
controvert.
in
force,
the
third
to
nourish.
person.
No
past
ciple.
parti-
Verbs
conjugated in
this index
verbs
are
in
set
verbs, are
included
not
Accadere,
Accfndere,
the
Rare
manner
same
the
from
placed.
so
AND
IRREGULAR
OF
INDEX
margin.
compounds,
and
Accdrrere,
Asciplvere,
Ascdndere,
unusual
Aspfrgere,
113
57
Assidere, 27
133
Assistere, 119
97
Ass^lvere,75
Ass^rbere, 76
Assuefarsi, 3
96
Affliggere,
Algere, 22
Assumere,
61
Ammettere,
77
Astfrgere, 59
Att^ndere, 58
23
Ancidere,
109
Assalire, 126
Acquisire,143
Addurre,
88
Ascrivere, 105
33
Accrescere,
Attenersi, 10
60
Att9rcere,93
Anteporre, no
Attrarre, 107
Avfllere, 28
Antivedere,
Ann"ttere,
very
AsciQgliere,79
29
62
20
Avvedersi,
Apparire, 130
Appartenere, 10
App^ndere, 24
Apporre, 1 10
Apprfndere, 49
Aprire, 134
Ardere, 25
Avvenire,
Avvincere,
20
133
94
Avv9lgere, 95
Benedire,
Bere
133
(bevere), 117
Arr^ndere, 51
Arridere, 53
in
compound
commoner
obsolete
are
Ascendere, 54
Acc^gliere,79
Acc^rgere, 74
Andare,
The
verb
other
some
Arr^gere, 26
Accludere,
Alludere,
as
here.
21
Addire,
VERBS.
DEFECTIVE
Cadere, 8
198
OF
INDEX
Calere,
Capere,
IRREGULAR
DEFECTIVE
VERBS.
Contendere,
144
Convertire,
131
135
Convincere,
29
Circoncidere,
C9rre (c9gliere)79
Corr^ggere, 98
34
Circoscrivere,
105
Correre, 33
C9cere (cupcere), 99
Corrispondere,1
C9gliere (c9rre),79
Coincidere,
04
Coprire (cuoprire),136
Cignere (cingere),78
Corrodere,
34
16
Conv^rgere. 146
Collidere, 30
Colludere,
23
Commettere,
61
Comm(u)9vere,
Comparire, 130
Compfllere, 38
Comp^tere, 145
57
Cospfrgere,
57
Cucire,
Dare,
78
Compr"ndere,
49
Comprimere,
Cospargere,
Crescere,
70
Compiangere,
114
124
Decadere,
Decidere,
34
Decrescere,
64
Compromettere,
Concfdere, 63
Concepere,
13
Dedurr:,, 97
61
Delinquere, 147
Deludere,
120
23
Concludere,
29
Deprimere,
64
Concorrere,
^^
Descrivere,
105
Concutere,
65
Desistere,
Condolere,
13
Detrarre,
Confarsi,
Diffndere,
Confondere,
19
107
Dip^ndere,
62
Dire,
31
(costruire)
,
Consumere,
77
Contendere, 58
93
Contraffare,
119
133
Dirigere,98
Discendere
(scendere") 54
,
Disci9gliere(sci9gliere)79
(sconoscere),
,
Disconoscere
10
Cont9rcere,
Contrarre,
24
Dipingere, 78
112
Contenere,
35
Digerire, 138
41
Connfttere,
Conquidere,
Dev9lvere, 95
97
Conoscere,
1 1
53
Corrompere,
Cglere, 80
Construire
99
32
Convenire,
Cfdere, 63
Chifdere, 10S
Condurre,
Controv^rtere, 163
12
Chiudere,
AND
107
112
Discorrere,
Discutere, 65
^^
ITALIAN
200
GRAMMAR.
Essere, " 74
Disdire, 133
Disfare, 3
(smettere), 61
Dismettere
Dispfrgere, 57
Disporre, no
Estinguere, 81
(estogliere)149
Est"?llere
,
Estrarre, 107
Evadere,
40
116
Disrompere,
Dissplvere,122
Fare,
Dissuadere,
F^ndere,
66
Distare, 4
F^rvere,
150
Distfndere, 58
Fifdere, 151
67
Figgere (figere),
Fingere, 83
14
Distinguere,81
Distpgliere(distprre),
79
Distprcere,93
Distrarre, 107
Distruggere,106
Disvfllere(svfllere),
92
Divedere,
20
venire,
131
Fl"ttere,68
Fdndere, 41
Frangere, 84
Friggere, 100
Fdlgere, 85
Genufl^ttere, 68
Divfrgere, 148
Giacere,
Dividere, 36
Dolere, 13
Gire, 152
Dovere,
61
Frammettere,
18
Giungere (giugnere),78
Dticere, 97
Illanguidire,154
Illtidere,
23
Elfggere, 101
Elidere,37
Eludere,
23
Equivalere, 16
]"rgere,82
Erigere, 98
Er6mpere,
Esaurire,
Escire
Inchifdere,
116
139
(uscire),130
Escltidere,29
Esigere,
121
Esistere,120
Esp"llere, 38
Esplpdere,
Imm^rgere, 42
Impfllere,38
Impfndere, 24
Imporre, no
Imprimere, 64
39
Esporre, no
Esprimere, 64
108
Incidere, 34
IncMdere, 29
Incdrrere, 33
Increscere, 113
Incutere, 65
Indire, 133
Indurre, 97
Infliiere,69
Infrangere,84
Insistere,119
INDEX
IRREGULAR
OF
(iscrivere),105
Inscrivere
AND
VERBS.
DEFECTIVE
N^cere (nu^cere),
201
116
Instruire, 137
Occdrrere,
Int"ndere, 58
Intercfdere, 63
Intervenire,
Offfndere, 35
116
Interrpmpere,
131
Intrapprre,
Offerire
Oppprre, 1 to
Opprimere, 64
10
Intridere,43
Orire,
Introdurre, 97
Intrudere, 44
Invadere,
40
Invalere,
16
(offrire),140
Olire, 157
no
Intrattenere,
33
141
Ost^ndere, 58
Ottenere,
10
Parere, 17
Invenire, 131
Percipere, 120
Invplgere,95
Percprrere, ^^
Ire, 153
Percptere (percuptere),72
Irrdmpere,
116
Pfrdere, 48
Perire, 158
Permanere,
15
Lecere, 156
Permettere,
61
L"dere, 45
Persistere,
Lambire,
155
Persuadere,
Lfggere,
Liquefare, 3
101
Lucere,
119
14
Piacere,
18
Piangere (piagnere) 78
Pingere (pignere), 78
102
Ludere,
23
Maledire, 133
Pipvere, 119
Pprgere, 86
Malfare,
Porre
Manomettere,
61
Mansuefare,
Mantenere,
M^rgere,
(ppnere),
no
Pospprre, 1
10
Possedere, 7
Potere,
10
Precidere, 34
42
Mettere, 61
Precludere,
Mplcere, 46
Prediligere,101
Mprdere, 47
Predire,
Morire, 132
Premettere,
Pr"ndere,
29
133
61
49
Pre porre,
no
Prescifgliere,79
Nascere,
Prescrivere,
114
Nascpndere,
109
Negligere,103
Presumere,
Prevalere,
105
77
16
ITALIAN
202
Prevedere,
GRAMMAR.
Rifulgere,85
20
Rilucere,
Produrre,
Rimanere,
97
Promettere,
102
15
Rimettere,
61
61
Rimordere, 47
Prompvere (promupvere), 70
Prorpmpere, 116
Proscipgliere,
79
Rimpiangere, 78
Rimpvere (rimupvere),70
Proscrivere, 105
Rincrescere,
Protpggere, 104
Ripr^ndere, 49
Riporre, no
Protrarre, 107
Provenire
(provvenire)
Provvedere,
Prudere, 159
20
Pungere (pugnere), 78
Raccpgliere,79
Radere,
131
Risalire, 126
Riscuptere,72
Risedere, 7
Risolvere, 75 and
Risprgere,90
Risppndere, in
Raggiungere, 78
Ritenere,
Rattenere,
Ritprcere,93
Ritrarre,107
10
Ravvedere,
Recidere,
20
34
Redimere, 87
10
Riuscire,
129
Rivalere,
16
Redire, 153
Rivedere, 20
Rpggere, 98
Rivenire, 137
Rivivere, 123
51
Reppllere,38
Reprimere, 64
Resistere,
119
Rivolere,
Rpdere,
53
Rpmpere,
Riandare,
Ricadere,
Salire,126
117
Richi^dere, 108
Riconpscere, 112
Ricprrere, t,^
2
Ridere, 52
Ridire, 133
Ridolere,
Rivplgere,95
Riaccpndere, 21
Ridare,
126
Ristare, 4
50
R^ndere,
113
13
Ridurre, 97
Rifdere, 160
Rifare, 3
68
Riflfttere,
Sapere, 9
Scadere,
Scfgliere(scerre),
79
Scendere,
54
Scindere,
71
Scipgliere(sciprre),
79
88
Sciplvere,
Scommettere,
Sconpscere,
61
112
Sconvplgere, 95
Scoprire,137
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
204
(ungere),
Ugnere
78
165
Vigere,
163
Urgere,
164
V"rtere,
Vilipfndere,
24
Uscire,
129
Vincere,
94
Vivere,
16
Valere,
124
Volere,
Vedere,
11
20
V^lgere
(v"rre),
V"llere
92
Venire,
132
(v^lvere),
95
EXERCISES.
I.
EXERCISE
(For
drill in
pronunciation.)
I. Vowels.
II. Consonants.
nptte,
Pevere, b"ne, finire, mplto, npbile, tutto, temere,
noble, all, to
fear, night,
Pepper, well, to finish, much,
l'acca,
prometto, tedesco, dico, medico, dpsso, adornare, capo,
I say, doctor, back, to adorn, head, the
h,
I promise, German,
nocchiere,
caccia, accid"nte, bacchetta, bacchiata, npce,
blow
with
a
stick, walnut-tree, pilot,
hunt, accident, wand,
pagina, dugento, gente, castigo,
duchessa, arciduca, cip, pago,
archduke,
this, I pay, page, two hundred,
duchess,
ment,
people, punishcastighi,ghiaccio,casa, mese, rpsa, scpglio,scegliere,pascere,
rock, to choose, to graze,
rose,
punishments, ice, house, month,
raschiare, pesci, vpglio, paglia, gli specchi, magnifico, pgni,
the
mirrors, magnificent, every,
to
fish, I wish, straw,
scrape,
bagno, mfzzo,
bath, middle,
guizzare,z"lo,azzurro,
to
to
alzare.
lift.
Combinations.
Accent.
metallic.
207
208
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
VOCABULARY
la
lo
il ragazzo,
quante)
scolari)
gentleman (signor,
sir,Mr.) pi. i signori
la signora,the lady, pi.le signore
l'uomo, the man,
pi.gliu^mini
inglese,English,pi.inglesi(fern.
the same, cf. 109)
il signpre the
due,
siamo,
not
no,
si,yes
fssere,to be;
avere,
to have
io ho, I have
egli ha,
he
has
noi abbiamo,
are
we
hast
hai, thou
tu
art
egli ", he is
noi
["behold")
two
non,
am
tu sei, thou
(literally
are
e, and
io sono,
is,here
here
"cco,
we
have
(you) have
essi hanno, they have
voi avete, ye
are
INTERROGATIVE.
ho
io?1
sono
sei
io?,etc.
tu?, etc.
NEGATIVE.
10
tu
non
io non
sono
ho, etc.
sei,etc.
non
(1) The
Remarks.
I
Sono.
Ha.
He
Non
hanno
pronouns
are
usually
not
expressed.3
am.
has.
i libri?
Haven't
ordinary
ha,3
1
and
Tu
strangers.
form
voi
of address
are
also
much
is the feminine
used
3d
in
sing.4,Ella
etc.
2
Cf. 72.
Cf. 91.
exercises,the
For
fuller
in the
first
EXERCISES.
209
EXERCISE
fJcco un
Si,"
libro
un
i tali
ani
libri itali
II
L'
libri.
hanno
Ipcco
scolare.
libri
non
it ali
Si,sono
ha
uomo
lo
ho
scolare,e
Ij)piccola la
ani
I tali
libro.
un
Lo
americana?
ragazza
e?
For
Note
the
scolare
capitalization see
Here
English
(5)
he
and
The
(10) She
has
Is the
pupil.
The
Italians
English
"
The
indicate
Omit.
Una-scolare
have
" piccolo.
ano
libri ha
libri.
have
Italian
two
(7) Yes,
are
books.
he
is
pupil
have
English books.
Italian
I tali
are
ah
books.
(17)
pupils.
they1
(3) They1
girl a
two
not
has
pupil?
the
Is
The
books.
have
(13)
(15)
(2)
have
men
(19)
Italians.
(22) They
books?
pupil
employed
to
Lei?
Are
(21)
Italian
the
Have
Have
am
(0
no3
men
the
books
and
books.
English
Note.
man
pupils
are
(20) Yes,
Italians?
book
men
books.
scolare
books.
boy
Italian
two
girl are
you
hanno
37.
two
are
American
(S)
book.
uno
III.
Here
(2)
(6)
pupil.
has
pupil.
book.
(4)
books.
is
He
is
"
non
scolari
"
itali
scolari
the
EXERCISE
(1)
Gli
due
Ho
Gli
scolari.
sono
"
II ragazzo
No,
scolari.
due
Sono
ragazza
ani.
scolare?
uno
libri.
scolari.
sono
ragazza
o?1
an
americana2
ragazza
libri it ali
ha
i"cco
due
inglesi. La
La
libro, "
un
scolare.
Gl'
la
Ha
sono
ano.
ano
ragazzo
ani.
uno
itali
ani,
libro i tali
un
ragazza.
It ali
"
libro.
un
i t ali
sono
il ragazzo
scolare.
ha
Ipcco una
o.
No,
inglesi,il ragazzo
libri
uno
an
Americana,1
ha
II ragazzo
ragazzo.
II.
in
should
in
Italian,
the
writing
the
not
use
only accents,
diacritical
signs
used
pronunciation.
taking
In translating arrange
"
the
logical gender.
words
in order
as
etc.,
numbered.
in
monly
com-
this
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
2IO
VOCABULARY.
Note.
beginning
Before
"
of
present indicative
"to
strare,
Like
mostrare:
salutare,
dimorare,
good-
say
to
destre
live,dwell
to
like,love
to
are,
salute,
to
morning
am
verb
model
the
guardare, to look
il giorno,the day
altre
at
bupno, good
bupn1 giorno, good-day,
good-
mplto, much,
morning
il
the
il fhime, the
country, i paesi
river,i fhimi
index
[belle
utile, useful, pi. utili (fern,like
king
the
il paese,
pcchio,the
eye,
the
la mano,
masc.)
Emmanuel
Chiara, Clara
le mani
Italia, Italy
la tavola,
the
mio, my,
mine, miei;
Victor
Emmanu"le,
Vittprio
finger
glipcchi
hand,
mplta, molte
terzo, third
picture,portrait
il ritratto, the
molti,
teacher
master,
much,
very
fern,
many;
maestro,
il re, the
the
IV
Exercise
table, le tavole
1'
fern, mia,
Eurppa (fern.)
il Tevere,
the
Tiber
dove, where
mie
(does
da, with,
not
at the
of,among
house
lCf. 115.
EXERCISE
il mio
tavola.
libro.
no.
Dove
il libro
paese.
1' Italia.
altro libro.
un
il
ritratto
un
^ mprto
I.1
dimpra
nella
Si, guardo
Ecco
Emmanuele
il libro
Ho
coll' indice
Ecco
mafstro.
it alia
i loro
Hanno
il libro
Mostro
libro, Carlo
giorno, signpre
Bupn
maestro!
giorno,signor
"cco
scolari.
i miei
Saluto
IV.
d' Italia?
re
II Tevere
Dimpra
il
"
un
Dante
flume
re
libri ?
della
cogliocchi.
un
Vittprio
Dimpra
il libro
no,
Emmanuele?
in
Np,
Italia.
Ama
Dante
sulla
"
il
Guarda
del
"
della ragazza.
dell' Italia.
in Italia?
"
it alia
re
i libri.
II libro
destra.
mano
Buon
signori.
Si, abbiamo
destra.
mano
Ipil libro
d'
del
signor
libro
un
Vittprio
re
Si, ^ mprto.
L'ltalia
1' Italia?
" mprto.
bel
un
Si, amo
E
la
ITALIAN
212
GRAMMAR.
EXERCISE
dell'
Hanno
Francesi.
libri
dei
vi
Non
del
degl'Italiani
gli scolari?
sulla
delle
gran
"
spno
America
le
calamaio
gli
per
lapis,
ma
i,
an
e
dei
italiani?
dell'
Non
Dante
inchigstro
lapis
hanno
Sono
penne.
Si,
del
Qpere
con
scolari.
non
degl'
sono
I tali
dei Tedeschi
libri
Sono
un
Vi
molti
anc'he
sono
dell' emisfero
paese
paese.
vi
Si,
Vi
tavola.
penne
dei
Si, hanno
un
in
vi
Si,
cosa?
anche
Ho
dentro.
"
npbili.
gP
America,
Nord?
Italiani
italiani
altra
in
Nord
del
nell' America
sono
"cco
siamo
No,
L' America
9vest.
Italiani
Vi
Italia?
in
Siamo
VI.
Italiani
American
Hanno
dei libri italiani,
i.
No, sono
gli scolari?
della carta e dell' inchipstro. Io sono
e anche
degl'inglesi,:Hanno
il ma"stro.
II padre del ragazzo
col libro inglese" anche
maestro,
il
|pun buon maestro di lingua francese.
Insegna
francese,lingua
Ha
bella e molto music
ale.
scolari?
degli
Si,ha degli scolari
ha scolari italiani.
Non
non
americani,
" a scuola adesso, "
a
casa.
1="some
English
it"j
EXERCISE
(i)
paper
Have
and
he
any
ink?
some
books.
poet.
VII.
(2) No,
pencils. (3) I have
you
Italian
of the
a
ones."
some
He
ink;
books
too,
of Dante.
works
Frenchman?
(8)
no1
I have
(7) No, he
lived
in
I have
some
Italian
some
(5)
Dante
was
an
was
Italian;
Florence.
(9) Florence
is a city of Italy. (10) It is in Tuscany, a
province of Italy.
Tuscan.
was
a
a
(11) Dante
(12) He was
politician. (13) He
speaks as2 a2 poet and as2 a2 politician. (14) tie speaks for Italy.
(15) Italyspeaks with the mouth of Dante.
(16) They3 say3 that3
an
was
Dante
not
was
1
2
="I
noble.
have
Cf. 49
poet.
not
(3).
ink"
"
placing "not"
3
before
"have".
Si dice che.
VOCABULARY.
il
piede,the foot
il leone, the
lion
il mare,
sea,
the
il fratello,the
il
la
the directress
direttrice,
la maestra,
ocean
brother
direttore,the director
V "ssere,
the
being
V insetto,the insect
V autore, the author
EXERCISES.
la
la
la
le
spagnuolo, Spanish
cinque, five
for, since
poichfc,
sponge
le ali
the bee
1' ape
lunga,
lunghi;
human
umano,
wing,
our
lungo, long,
lunghe
lesson
the
sue
sua.
corto, short
1 ala, the
la
nostro,
the bench
la spugna,
suo
seat
la lezione, the
la
mountain
the
the
s"?dia,
la panca,
la
questo, this
pittura,1the picture
la montagna,
213
like, as
come,
study
danno, they give (from dare, irr.)
studiare,
regina,the queen
Alpe (or Alpi) the Alps
,
to
tutto, all
1
Cf.
Remark
ure, and
38,
VIII.
EXERCISE
Sulla
mia
vi
tavola
grossi e piccoli,italiani,inglesi,
libri
sono
(c).
Lo
"cco un libro di Shakespeare.
francesi,spagnuoli, e tedeschi.
V Ari9sto sono
e
autpri
autore
inglese, Dante
Shakespeare " un
Tutti
E il Goethe?
italiani.
questi autori
" un autore tedesco.
sono
fa
si.
mo
ritratti di
Dante
ritratto
un
dell' Ariosto?
una
scolari
diligenti1
Hanno
anche
Hanno
una
delle
corta
Vi
spugna.
stiidiano.
lezioni
lezione
libri.
una
Studiano
delle
geografia.
Dove
vi
delle
una
nei
lezipni di
Hanno
dei
calamai.
lezione
sono
sedie,
sono
e
penne
sono
scupla, vi
scuola
inglesi e
di
in
nostra
anche
sono
nei
anche
Ha
Shakespeare.
Siamo
Nella
molte
delle
dello
Si, sono
Nella
libri?
]"cco
lapis,
Gli
italiana.
geografia.
cinque lezioni
la settimana.
1
Observe
the
positionof
EXERCISE
the
adjective.
IX.
in1 it1.
classrooms
are
(2) There
(1) Here is our school.
many
(4) There are a great many
(3) The scholars have Italian books.
school.
of the
directress
and
the
director
tables.
are
(5) Here
(7) The
girl on the
(6) They give the lessons to the scholars.
also
is diligent.
two
bench
(S) The
boys, her brothers, are
diligent.
(9) They have long English lessons and short Italian
lessons.
(10) Here are pictures of two kings of Italy, (n) Here
ITALIAN
214
is
picture
of
the
of the
(12)
Alps.
(13)
week.
GRAMMAR.
The
scholars
in school
are
five
days
mistresses)2
also.
(3)
(2)
The
teachers
(1)
(masters
and
The
have
feet.
and
boys
Omit.
Cf.
46.
they study"
Tavole.
sttidiano.
"
VOCABULARY.
il
la
prontincia,the pronunciation
la guancia, the cheek, le guance
the shoe
la Scarpa,
[period
susuperiore, superior, upper,
polso,the pulse
the
mfdici
il singolare,the singular
il plurale,the plural
il
mfdico,
il nome,
il
the
doctor,
the thumb
ppllice,
1'
ring-finger
duke,
monarch,
the
the
figliuolo,
little
irregolare,irregular,irregolari
difficili
difficile,
difficult,
mo-
V inimico, the
enemy,
1' ucc^llo,the bird
1' "st, the
povero,
of
the
(lit.
son
good man
man
good)
the
friend,
amico,
gliamici
1' uomo
roseo,
gl'inamici
rosy,
extremity,
suna,
le
exception,1' ec-
cezioni
P "rre, the "r", V
la rfgola, the rule
"rri
rosei;
rosea,
rosee
no,
nessuni;
none,
nes-
nessune
estremita
the
p"?vera,
nessuno,
the
p9veri;
antiche
1'
V eccezione,
poor,
p9vere
east
1' estremita,
attaccare)
sinistre
narchi
il
(p. part.
i duchi
il monarca,
of
attaccati;
attaccate
attaccata,
the
il dito annulare,
il duco, the
attached,
attaccato,
name
tastare, feel
(first
conj.)
imparare, to learn (first
conj.)
vedono
vede, you see, pi.
(from
to
vedere,
see, irr.)
si unisce, is united
itself"),from
(lit."unites
unire
EXERCISES.
done
fatto, made,
of
(p. part,
always
se,mpre,
fare)
tre. three
had
215
[narily
usually, ordi-
ordinariarmente,
lftto,read
quale, what
di, of
strare)
cio". that
is,that
is to say
spesso,
non
Vedono
le
la mano?
al
braccia,
braccio
col
del
colle
membra
Io
polso del
I"cco le unghie.
il pgllice. Quanti pglliciha?
il
plurale di labbro.
Sono
eccezipni.
difficili. 5
dell'
1
Le
Hanno
tastano
ordimano
" all'estremita
dita.
Mpstri
Quale
vero?
Dite
irregolare,non
"
irregolare. E il plurale di due a?
nome
un
anche
rfgole
la
sinistro
si unisce
mano
mfdici lo
sono
attaccate
sono
La
dita?
hanno
eccezioni.
dell'
proniincia
L'
italiano?
eccezioni
La
sono
pronuncia
| difficile.
erre
the
Really
third
plural of
person
to
persons
of
one
the
whom
Used
verb.
third
the
in addressing
person
singular
used.
be
would
"
difficile
several
singolare di dita?
gambe
dito.
il
cinque
le
mani
gambe.
polso.
braccio
Le
Le
L'
unghie.
alle
il
tasto
superiori,e
forti.
sono
attaccati
pie,di
il
II dito anulare?
braccia
sono
Tasto
de,stra. Non
Le
polso.
nariamente.
le
Sono
inferiori.
membra
alle
X.
II braccio?
le braccia?
true
than
piu...di,more...
EXERCISE
Vedono1
is not
vero,
Means
as
wTell "let
learn"
us
as
"we
EXERCISE
learn ".
XI.
(2)
(1)
are
(1) Oxen
strong. (2) They have
large bones.
(3) Oxen
but men
are
are
more
stronger1 than men,
intelligentthan oxen.
are
made
(4) Many animals
(5) Men have sometimes
very strong.
(6) The ancient
gods of animals.
Egyptians made
gods of bulls
of
and
birds.
(8)
Do
is
friend
is poor.
two
see
you
the
of my
man
and
cheeks.
ancient
with
father's.
(12) Parsons
the
Greeks
large book
(10) He
often
had
has
had
on
hundreds
his knees?
two
wives.
of
gods.
(9) He
(11) He
pairs of shoes.
enemies
rosy
(7) The
are
poor.
2l6
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
monarchs
(18) No,
5
about
are
always good
That
men?
wise
three
the
not
(19)
men.
is to
the
say,
Have
three
you
kings
read
of the
East.6
1
from
Construct
the
(with art.).
forti di
Piu
word
the
given
Non
for
nessuni.
ha
son"
"little
by changing
ending.
it
="is
true?"
not
="of."
1.
VOCABULARY.
rising,sunrise (the
il collo, the
neck
quickly
lentamente, slowly
gladly
volenti^ri,
davvero, indeed, truly
altre volte, formerly
the
dog
fino a,
il levare, the
infinitive used
il cane,
il
tive,
substan-
sun
coraggio,the
courage
the
il sentimento,
Torino,
(a) (2))
cf. 51
il sole, the
as
sentiment
Turin
Spagna, Spain
la porta, the door, gate
la
the
la svoltata,
la
strada, the
la via, the
la spesa,
la
the
essa,
soon,
as
insi^me, together
to counsel
consigliare,
pensare,
to
think
sperare,
to
hope
lack
to
mancare,
to accompany
accompagnare,
sob
singhiozzare,to
road
cost
the tranquillity
tranquillita,
noi, we,
se,
street-
street
way,
la vita, the
me,
turn,
[corner
subito,
life
us
return
to
picchiare,to
knock
dimenticare,
to
passeggiare,to
she
forget
walk
viaggiare,to travel
chiamare,
call
to
meet
giovane, young
incontrare,
oggi,to-day
il mercoledi,
quando,
Wednesday
when
benchfc, although
subjunctive)
cosi, so, thus
perp,
but, however
fra, within,
to
(followed by
to
complain
stare, to be (of health),3d pers.
sing.ind. pres. sta, pi. stanno
risppndere, to reply (irr.pret.
risposi)
piangere,to weep
lamentarsi,1
abborrire,
to
to
abhor
EXERCISES.
sentire, to feel
aprire,to open
dire,
to
(irr.pret. dissi, I
say
217
capire, to understand
said)
tossire, to cough
flnire,to finish
1
un'
Mancava
alia porta.
in
Chiamerp
la
Cf. 96 and
XII.
che
mostra
seggiavo
la
Ma
Io
fra
braccia
restava
ma
me,
Coraggio!
Incontrai
alia
un
Picchierp?
porta.
no, dicevo
parti subito!
la via.
per
la
madre
te! Comin-
con
parlare.
casa,
Ma
aprire?
di
temeva
s"i upmo,
amico.5
mio
parto! Resterp
guardare
ad
lentamente
Npn
102.
del sole
lei,e
istrada
mamma
stare,
strada
anche
piangere
momento
lascia
levar
a3
ciava
al
pra
accompagnp
al collo
was
EXERCISE
mM
"ra,
svoltata
d'
mi
np,
pasuna
"
come,
"
spese.
Lascerfi pggi
quando
vi
p"nso
la
adesso
finisco
Cosi,non
for mi
M'
Le
For
lamentarmi.
senza
dire7:
per
Capisco
il momento
Com'
in casa,
before
E mi
bino
del bam-
al collo
the
of
use
benche
vowel.
="
partire.
davvero,
sciocco!
ero
i sentimenti
ancora
del
"
a
consiglier^i
viaggiassimplto quando e,ra gipvane.
mplto tutti,perd"ndo la tranquillitadella vita di casa.
viaggiamo piu!
tutti di restare
casa,
lo stesso!
"
"
"
around
and
her
neck".
di before
Cf. 98 (2).
211
(2),
(1).
212
4
5
for strada
Istrada
"A
friend
because
of mine."
ORAL
(1) Quanto
tempo
mancava
ragazzo?
(2) Chi V accompagnp
(3)
Che
(4)
Ha
(5)
Perche
cpsa
faceva
preceded by
alia
"Of
Cf. 36
in.
7
it."
al
levar
del
sole
pprta?
part^ndo, e
che
cpsa
diceva?
np?
(7) Cpsa
ancora
voleva
qualche tempo
fare?
Bv
(b).
saving."
'""
EXERCISE.
parlato la mamma?
(6) Restava
"
Cpsa diceva
in istrada?
fra se1?
quando
parti il
218
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
(10)
Che
(n)
Perche
dove?
amico?
risppse2
cosa
npn
parte
?
1' amico
per la
Spagna?
viaggiare?
Lei la casa
per
(12) Lascerebbe
le grandi spese?
(13) Teme
del
(14) Capisce i sentimenti
del partire?
moment
o
(15) Ha viaggiato mplto?
volentieri?
(16) Viaggerebbe ancpra
ragazzo?
Abborrisce
il
Viaggerebbe volentiericon
me?
(17) Quando
1
="to
From
partiremo?
himself."
risppndere preteritethird
XIII.
EXERCISE
(2)
sunrise.
before
hour
singular.
person
"
It is still an
T'
Use
second
Use
partirefollowed
before
Supply
person
si before
12
="
fear."
14
="
feared
lb
="
fears
verb.
Omit.
formerly."
"
10
verb.
more."
Is it not
="
plural preterite.
7
much."
by di.
13
no
Me.
Use
="
walk."
Lp before
Ti before
Ci before
verb.
imperfect.
16
Li before
true?"
verb.
verb.
verb.
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
220
e
dagli altri due trhimviri
agli estremi, fu da Ottavio
dei soldati
condotta
una
col9nia militare a Firenze, e a ciascuno
5
Essendo
numerosi
porzione di terreno.
venne
assegnata una
stibito molto
piu grande. Vi spno
questi coloni la citta 9 divenuta
molte traccie delle edificazioni del periodo. Cost nel lupgo
ancora
"ra
romana
dei Peruzzi
v' era
un
e
piazzettedi San Simone
anfiteatro
o
an
r o m
Firenze,fin dai primi tempi, ebbe molti diritti,
di dipendemza assoluta da Roma, e le C9se di
stato
"ra pen) in uno
in
male.
Fu alia m9rte dell' imperatore Teodosio
andavano
Roma
fra i su9i due
diviso
che V imp^ro venne
figli. Fir"nze "ra
395
dove fu signore Onorio.
della parte Occidentale
naturalmente
dove
9ggi
le
sono
city of ours."
4
Read
hold it as certain that."
"We
quaranta.
Third person
singularpreteriteindicative of venire.
Cf. 36.
dear
"This
ORAL
Cf. 251.
Cf. 81
EXERCISE.
avanti
(6)
Ch'
Gesu
(b).
nell'
anno
Cristo?
i col9ni?
(7) I"rano numerosi
(8) " divenuta grande la citta
della
di
repubblica romana?
Firenze?
del periodo?
(9)
Dove?
(10) Vi "ra un anfiteatro romano?
(11) E*a indipend^nte la citta?
diviso 1' imp^ro romano?
(12) Quando venne
(13) Di che parte e,ra Firenze?
(14) Chi fu signore della parte occidentale?
la st9ria dell' origine della
i Fiorentini
(15) Dimenticheranno
Sonvi
ancora
citta?
EXERCISE
XV.
l
the history
let us
talk about
(2) Then
sleepy? No!
of Florence.
(3) I should be2 very glad to listen.2 (4) I have
been in Florence
not
long,3 but I love it.4 (5) It is an old city,but
Columbus
old city when
it is changing5 very6 much.
an
(6) It was
7
a baby.
was
long history. (S) We should
(7) So it has had a very
(1)
have
Are
to
you
study
long time
(in order) to
(1)
know
(3)
its
(4)
(2)
historywell.
(9)
EXERCISKS.
Roman
colony
there
were
into
that the
but
that8
who
does
who
and
"
Etruscans
from
were
has
will
was
be, let
Florence?
Cambiandosi.
Omit.
We
have
spoken
knows
Fiesole? (14)
but
"
And
Florence
hope!
us
time."
"much
city,and
in Florence
="of."
(13)
(u) Listen!
They emigrated
Romans,
Greece.
Etruscan
an
been
not
from
were
(10) But
Octavius.
by
not
were
Fiesole.
know
not
Florence
to
city who
Italy. (12),Fiesole
of Florence
is
the
in
men
It is believed
brought
was
221
="
L'
listen
gladly/'
before
rendering of
the
For
Molto.
verb.
"
is
"
cf. foregoingexercise.
Che.
VOCABULARY.
Io str"pito,the
noise
il genitore,the
parent
il
piacere,the
pleasure
as
piacere, a favor, please
per
il
qui, here
li,there
cugino,
the
la zia, the
volere,
I
cousin
la
the
favor;
grazie,
grace,
thanks
grazie,
quiet
tranquillo,
piccino,little,little child
tan to, such
a,
da,
thou)
giocare (giuocare) to play
rincrescere
(impersonal) to
,
at
be
to
good, quiet
(a person)
Parla
Lei?
tanto
strfpito.
tu,
Carlino, vieni
"
cugino
ride
ridono
di se,
non
laugh
star(e) buono,
EXERCISE
amico
for
di,to be sorry
ridere, to laugh
either
.
be
sorry
ridere di, to
nor
to
vuoi
come
rincrescere
niente, nothing
nemmeno,
to
much
so
(irr.voglio,vuoi,
wishest)
(irr.vieni,come
thou
wish,
venire,
aunt
wish
to
venire
di te.
con
con
di
me?
me.
"
zia, non
Non
fa
di
loro
Dica
Cosi.
me.
No, no,
"
non
io.
XVI.
con
vederli1?
per
Starai
ride
buono
di
niente.
Io
tu.
lui.
Oh,
Mi
Essi
me!
anche
"
adesso
"
vado
Io
rincresce.2
"
ridono,
dalla
no,
cattivo!
tu?
ma
mamma,
vedo
E
II
li il mio
i
genitpri,
Ebbene,
venite
ITALIAN
222
voialtri
GRAMMAR.
buona, studierp
Grazie, signora,Lei " molto
di lpro.
lui
che " contento.
Vedete, piccini? $
"
io,senza
bene
adesso
"
Li
"
them"
="
"
sorry"
am
"
conjunctive form.
a
conjunctive form.
XVII.
EXERCISE
is
(i)
"
Non
mi
3
vede
mi
"
Translate
being
'
'
them
to
conjunctive form.
"
Exercise
Cf
Omit.
XVI
VOCABULARY.
la voce,
ad
the voice
alta voce,
assicurare,
aloud
poco
well
(p9') little
,
gia,already
preso)
EXERCISE
Dov'
"
il libro?
excuse
"
but
ma,
assure
spiegare,to explain
dare, to give (irr.)
(a thing), (irr.
sapere, to know
I
so,
know)
potere, to be able (irr.posso, I
can,
puQ, he can)
piacere,to please (irr.and often
mi piace,
used impersonally
I like)
prfndere, to take (irr.p. part.
sight
a
sight
prima vista,at (first)
la lettura,the reading
V immagine, the picture,cut
interessante,interesting
solamente, only
ebbene, well, very
allora,then
to
scusare,
la vista,the
to
"
Eccolo.
"
Datemelo.
"
XVIII.
La
ne
"
prego
Grdzie!
di
I19 avuto
Ne
parleremo un
scusarmi, poich^ npn
il
tempo.
"
Ebbene,
EXERCISES.
^ccovene
non
altro
un
assicurarvi
p9sso
bene
l"ggerload
farebbe
alta
anche
sia
interessante.
leggeremo
Lp
di poterne
cont^nto
sono
vista.
gerlo a prima
Come
che
223
voce,
lui.
capire
allora
Ma
insi^me
molto
avendolo
non
S9 che
ve
da
me
lo
potrete Ifg-
spieghierp.
"
solo!
fratello
vpstro
letto,
Vi
fara
1' ascoltera.
Gli
"
b"ne
"
Lo
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
for np
Frequently used
EXERCISE
(1)
Show
me
him
say:
hands.
(2)
XIX.
Here1
they
(3)
are.
Show
them
and
your
signore.
Use
am
"cco.
Cf. 82.
VOCABULARY.
la
grandfather
the
il nippte,
grandson
the
il gusto,
pleasure,delight
the
il npnno,
il
in
il
in
the
manner,
mpdo
da,
in such
fpndo,
the
bottom
mpdo,
the
way
la carezza,
manner
la
as
the
tiratina,
1' assenza,
the
the
course
certo, certain
[scolding
caress
contention,
absence
boldness
respectful
rispettpso,
study
the evening
la cpsa, the thing, matter,
demand
the
heart
lo studio, the
mild-
ness
la domanda,
at
fpndo,
il cprso,
la sera,
rosso,
affair
matto,
red
mad,
immoderate
ITALIAN
224
GRAMMAR.
lively
vispo, merry,
the
stesso, same,
liberare,to
very
that
mai,
"
pra,
seek
free
observe,
to
osservare,
to apply
applicarsi,
never
contentarsi,to
now
allentare,
loosen
to
contrariare,
to
accomiatarsi,
lower,
to
sbacciuccare,
to
ripigliare,
to kiss
down
cast
self
one's
take
to
leave
part, interrotto)
proseguire, to continue
p.
repeatedly
to repent
pentirsi,
resume
EXERCISE
la vpstra assenza-disse
Durante
content
self
vex
saltare,to jump
esclamare, to exclaim
abbassare,
one's
become
farsi,to
to throw
buttare,
notice
crollare, to shake
durante, during
npn
to
cercare,
XX.
il npnno
ai tre
gipvani-parlerp io
"
"
le braccia
buttate
stato
gusto
da
cpllo e
II npnno
bambino.
un
di liberarsi
un
al
quellecarezze
matto,
del
lo sbaciucchiava
se
fingendo d'
tumultupse;
si sarebbe
ben
esser
guardato
tutto,
come
fosse
se
contrariato, cercava
in fpndo ci aveva
ma
di allentare
le braccia
disse il signor
di vpi
vispo nipotino. ^Se il npnno sara1 contento
i
" mplto p r o b a b 1 e ch' io vi faccia venir
Leone, accomiatandosi
da me
Oh
a
paio di giprni. Torneremo
Firfnze insieme.
per un
J
esclamarono
al
oh
bene!
i
due
strettisi
e
lp
bene,
fanciulli,
npnno,
di
la
il
versazioni,
sera
stessa
affinch^
ripigliasse cprso
quelle conpregarono
"
"
"
"
"
'
'
to
' '
02.
Cf. 229.
EXERCISE
(1)
(2)
Cf
of stringersi.
,past participle
"
"
Oh
XXI.
Let
us
talk
EXERCISES.
studied
do
them."
about
Florentine
about
history?
225
remember
you
"
(4)
"
We
what
do
you
remember
not
have
it as
do,1grandfather ", said little Adolph. (5) " I have noticed that ",
rather
said
their
red.
grandfather. (6) Adolph
(7) He
grew
(8) More things are studied now", said he.
repented his remark.
shook
his head.
(10) But Adolph jumped on his
(9) The old man
you
"
knees
and
himself
threw
from
pleasure
those
Mr.
apply
is
Leo
ourselves
2
back."
(13)
with
Well
the
Omit.
he
But
old
study
things
of
(14)
us
go
be
"when
Let
with
us
"
let
go
him."
Florentine
cannot
Translate
"
(15)
in
shall
we
us
away
"
history when
done
freed
man
really took
we
(11) The
(12)
caresses.
"
what
"These
(16)
his neck.
about
arms
stormy
them.
in
ourselves
since
his
great
tent
con-
now;
will
We
we
come
moment."
back."
come
VOCABULARY
the
il danno,
cost
p9polo,the
people,nation,
il potere, the
race
power
caso.
unlawful
illegale,
il
famigliare, the
case
mate
familiar, inti-
friend
il verso,
il
the
invader
il Franco,
[age
mind, heart,
cour-
the
the
Longobard
Frank
1a
gente, the
la
la
race,
nation
salvatichezza, the
wildness,
rudeness
la
pieta,the piety
grandezza, the greatness
vivacita, the vivacity
la
violfnza,
la
la
vfrso,
subito,
towards
soon,
solo, alone,
verse
Longobardo,
analogo, analogous
sfortunato, unfortunate
Germany
restio, restive
il
V animo,
arms
la Germania,
scellerato, wicked
kingdom
il veleno, the poison
il sogge,tto, the subject
the
fall
the
the
il regno,
la caduta,
le armi,
fact
il fatto, the
il
damage, loss,
the violence
quickly
only
prima, at first
indi, afterward, from
there
away,
to
go
to carry
distruggere,to
off
or
away
destroy (irr. p.
part, distrutto)
ammansirsi,
to
grow
mild
226
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
to
fermarsi,
stop
to
passare,
lodare,
pass
"rano
Longobardi,
gente pagan
Guidati
superiore dell'
di Lombard!
verso
rispose il
"
dal loro f
la
eroce
to
guide
fondare,
to
found
XXII.
npnno?
caro
usciti1 dalla
bugn vf cchio,
Alboino,
re
Adolfo.
domandg
"
"
si fermarono
che
fatto
ha
Firenze.
che
Ma
in
parte
gran
breve
fu
cadde
dello
il regno
si narra,
da
nella
il
conservato
subito
|prano
"
Pannonia.
prima
Italia,
per questo
e
indi, passati gli Appennini,
a;
Toscana,
Presere
tell
praise
to
guidare,
EXERCISE
Chi
narrate,
intitolare,to entitle,call
keep
to
conservare,
to
narrare,
approach
avvicinarsi,
to
self
one's
arrichirsi,to enrich
parte
nome
si avvicinarono
in
loro
potere.
scellerato
Alboino;
famigliare, lo
veleno, datogli,
contenta!
dopo soli cinque anni di signoria. Ne sono
la feroce salvaticol tempo
s' ammansi
esclam.9 V Adalgisa. Ma
lodati per pieta,valore
re
e
dei Longobardi ed ebbero
chezza
granle
cadde
armi
dei
La loro dominazione
d' animo.
dezza
per
Franchi,
molta
vivacita
altri pQpoli barbari
domandc? con
Scusi, n9nno,
i Franchi
Adolfino
avevano
so
non
Carlomagno,
per re il fa mo
un
esclam9 V Adalgisa, divenendo
figliodel re Pipino? E, nQnno
Manzoni
intitolata
la
bella
tragfdia di Alessandro
P9' rossa
dei Longobardi, non
Si.
hi parla della caduta
A dele
" vero?
Oh i bei versi!
Oh la bella tragfdia,n9nno!
poich^
il
come
tglsedi vita
un
suo
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
As
collective
gente
EXERCISE
may
take
"
plural modifier.
XXIII.
was
talking to his grandsons about the
(i) The good old man
attentive.
(2) They were
listening,they were1
Longobards.
of the wicked
(3) A large part of Italy had fallen into the power
drawn
beautiful
to
near
Tuscany,
(4) They had
Longobards.
dominion, being2 founded
(5) But their unlawful
upon
Tuscany.
(6) The Franks, a race come
destroyed by violence.
violence, was
from
from
into Italy.
times
France
forth in ancient
Germany, came
heathen
no
were
longer a
people. (8) They had
(7) The Franks
and
a
a
king.
very wise4
king called Charlemagne, a great3 man
of
restive
wild
his
ferocity
subjects. (10) The
(9) He tamed the
of Italy, but
called
the liberators
liberation
Franks
were
invasion
and in analogous cases, only a new
in this case
means,
228
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
fronto
tra
vero?
Ha
discprso
su
miei, era un
grandissimo
santo,
gran
Ma
santo.
Ecco
Antonio
frate
il
San
sommi
discprso.
Pietro, cari
Sant' Antonio
ORAL
poeti,e difficile,
npn
faceva
predicatore che
wh
"
San
wh
II.
instincts.
generous
(3)
(4)
Emmanuel
And
he
(2)
indeed
was
fiuuiiiu!!
was
great man,
is often
He
a
"
called
honorable
more
certi santi?
XXV.
EXERCISE
Victor
EXERCISE.
(1)
un
Paolo, fratelli
fratelli miei, era
un
.
"
than
good
the
man,
man
honorable
certain
of
king."
kings.
other
Here
related
anecdote
"
word
of
word
was.
smaller
(13)
man
than
The
wisest
Victor
men
Emmanuel
is
precious
as
as
his
feel that.
XXVI.
EXERCISE
marzo
ptto giprni
l^ttera 1' ho ricevuta
potuto nsppnderti presto perche mi spno fatto male alia
La
"cco
1900.
Carlo,
cpme.
tua
cara
II babbo
ha
un
cosi
bel
temperino,
mentre
fa.
mano.
che
Npn
hp
Ed
il mio
EXERCISES.
"
un
finalmente
1' ha
detto
ho
il tuo
mio, prestami
Gli
orrore.
vero
un
orrore,
229
dato
mi
in
mano
"
spno
"
suo
line
al
me,
Santita
Leone
carrozza
in
Campidoglio
XIII
potuto vederlo.
Altavilla
vostra.
da
Sua
letto.
Buona
il
condotti,
le sorel-
fu
che
detto
Sua
passeggiata in
precisamente la sua
naturalmente
abbiamo
non
sue
guardie ma
II signor
andati dai tuoi amici gliAltavilla.
re
Abbiamo
per
Ci ha
noi.
Anche
gentile.
parlato di te e
tanto
Ho
cugini?
Maesta
Ci
al Vaticano.
bupno
moglie "
i tuoi
visto
molto
Abbiamo
simpatici.
stanno
Siamo
stato
-Sua
"
ci ha
faceva
alle
mezzo
zio Andrea
Lo
tutto.
visto
tante
visto
belle
cose
che
figlimi
famiglia.
tua
abbiamo
ma
mia
casa
i loro
comprato
Umberto,
della
detto
"
col
Non
la
ne
casa
spno
Come
abbiamo
camera
sua
stance
sono
notte!
II tuo
affmo.2
amico,
Enrico.
destra.
=mano
For
XXVII.
EXERCISE
EXERCISE
II libro
ancora
altro
che
un
che
po\
cerchi
"
Non
servira,solamente
devo
avere
per
non
c'
".
"
Non
ne
sono
sicuro, lo cercher^
No, nessun
puoi1 adoperarne qualche altro?
quello li. Bisogna ben2 trovarlo, | quello
"
preparare
la mia
lezione.
Chi
1' ha
avuto
ITALIAN
230
1'ultimo?
a
cui lo
GRAMMAR.
quello che me
imprestastii"ri1'altro?
Sara3
1' avra3
ha
Avra3
"
mai
dimenticato
di
r^nderlo?
"
possibile,
glielodomanderp, e se " davvero lui che 1' ha,
sempre
Chi non
npn glieloimpresterp piu per un
p"zzo.
pe,nsa a r^ndere
dovrebbe5
non
non
pigliarin pr^stito. Ma guarda dalla finestra,
"
Ma
lui che vifne adesso?
Me
si,e col mio libro sotto il braccio.
se il libro perduto fosse
mio.
Buon
n? rallegroper te come
giorno,
Enrico, "ccoti il libro che mi hai imprestato. Te ne ringrazio e ti
di perdonarmi la mia
dimenticanza.
Avr"i6 dovuto8 riporprfgo
visita di mio cugino, il che m' ha
tartelo gia i"ri. Ma
una
hg avuto
ieri.
in casa
fatto restare
tutto
Non
Quale cugino "ra?
lp conosci
ch'
di
da
noi P anno
tu.
$ fratfllo quello
"ra
scorso, quello che
da
fui
Ma
cui
il cane
morso.
aveva
con
tutto cip "ra un
bel cane,
E
di
chi
parlando
quello,vero?
cani, di
" quello che ho visto nel
vostro
Mio
giardino? 5 mi"" n9n I v?r0 cn? I bello?
padre me
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
dato.7
1' ha
Vieni
con
le
Tutte
e
me
lo
che
cose
mi
vedremo, quel
da7
belle.
sono
cane!
Chi
vuol
Ha
gusto
vederlo
lui!
venga8
noi.
con
the
2
"Can
not"
you
"
second
irregularpotere.
must
really."
of probability
Future
(2).
Made", from fare.
"I ought to have."
B
8
present of
"I
"
229
singular indicative
person
"it
"
"Let
him
come."
See
venire
EXERCISE
(1) Who
is
have
must
"Ought
From
not
dare.
been
he
to
borrow.
See
who."
Cf.
"
tables.
in tables.
XXIX.
EXERCISES.
(n)
said
John
noticed
has
1
="
3
7
coat, but
that
Voleva.
Use
6
Omit.
8
A.
had
nobody
other."
nobody
mia
siamo
mamma,
Rosina,
che
spero
nella
ragazzetta
sette
mente
molto
classe
terza
"
anni.
un
giovinotto,2
anche
uomo!
qui
molto
Oh
"
belle
tante
di
Naldo
li.
sei
Uomo+-ino
"You
Why
==
have
do
is
call
your
un
bambinticcio
chiasspne
"
ha
ma
mi
Perch^
mammetta!
"
young
lei,not
me
man
tu?
a' calzoncini.
e
ma
vero,
Naldinol
"
Non
sono
Vieni
(lit."have
See
yourself").
made
91.
XXXI.
EXERCISE
(1) Here
(2) Leave
piu
omino.
become
you
Tu
prossima-
avra
un
cara
Sulla
le
anc9ra
Si,
cosine!
studio, perfino
guardi
pietruzza
Ricciardetto
e
adesso,
che
vero
".
campagna?
che
piccino
E
adesso!
poverino. Eccolo
lp il primo giorno che indossa
Come
riverito,signor Rinaldo!
"
alia
arrivati
d' osservazione
piccole erbicelle,perfino
school
XXX.
impareremo
la
"of
"Translate
Di.
prpprio
meritevole
"
tutto
terra
the
of it.
spoken
ever
in
boy
subjunctive imperfect.
fi
Dovremmo.
Quel tale.
EXERCISE
Oh
(12) Every
it.
about
something
231
let
pretty-little-stream;
big-ugly-books!1 (3) The
us
walk
trees
on
are
the
bank.
getting-green.2
yesterday it
to-day! (5)
was
nasty-weather! (6) Are you pretty-well4to-day? (7) I am
(9) You are also rather(S) You are plump.
quite well,5thanks!
father.
will be a big-man, like your
(11) Here is
tall. (10) You
(13) He
pretty-little-dog.(12) He loves his little-master.
your
at the dear-little-flowers!
is afraid of the country-boy.8 (14) Look
is your little-dog? (16) He is running away,7 the
(15) But where
little-rascal!
poor(17) He is afraid of the peasant-boy's big-stick,
bad
road!
a
(19) Full of ugly-stones!
little-thing! (18) What
very-fast.8 (21) Call him, deariel
(20) The dog is running away
(4)
How3
beautiful
the
weather
is
And
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
2J2
(22)
(24)
will
He
Let
hear.
I0
rest
us
the
on
now
actio.
Bfne with
-ino.
Contadino
with
Omit
Use
"woman",
little-old- woman
The
(23)
(25)
short- grass
Translate
a-
am
are
Che.
one.
8
7Scappare.
using only the appropriate word
suffix.
diminutive
little tired.
greenish".
'
with
B"ne
bringing him.
is
Prestissimo.
from
formed
Vfcchio.
10
Reflexive.
VOCABULARY.
Pres
Infinitive.
dire,to
say,
uscire,1to
volere, to wish
1
piaciuto
parvi
parrQ
piacqui
uscito
uscii
voluto
volli
paruto
out
go
with
Compounds
"
All forms
required
or
parso
fssere.
XXXII.
EXERCISE
Note.
dissi
detto
seem
Future.
Preterite
Part.
Past
dicemdo
speak, tell
parere,1to appear,
piacere,1to please
Part.
are
to be
constructed
from
those
given
The
given in 179.
present participleand future when
not
given are regular.
(3) They have
gone
(1) He was
saying. (2) It1 pleases me.
out.
to me.
(6) Will you
(4) It had seemed
(5) They wished.2
out ?
(8) They said.
(9)
(7) Wishing and having wished.
go
(n) They might go out
(10) They would
They had said.
say.
(imperfect subjunctive)
(12) They appeared.2 (13) They would
out?
to
me.
they go
(15) Would
(14) It appears
appear.
wished3
it.
(18) They
(17) Did you say2 so?
(16) Pleasing me.
said
I
have
so.3
(21)
(20) It has pleased me.
(19) He will go out.
Would
it
to you?
(23) Did they wish it? (24)
(22) Does it seem
(imperfect subjunctive).
please you?
(25) It might please you
She
has
out.
to say it.
(27)
(26) They wished
gone
by
the
rules
Omit.
Express
in two
centemente
p9vero
e
aveva
questo
bambino
fatto
fatto:
di 9U0
in
m9do
aveva
anni
di
='*I
have
said
it.'
XXXIII.
EXERCISE
La
ways.
con
di
visto
i
scu9la, mi
una
in
piedi
una
che
procurargliene
delle
uscivano
un
paio
raccontava
sue
classi
dalle
dal
reun
scarpe,
Patronato
EXERCISES.
scarpe,
rosso
trice,
commossa
II
soldi.
bambino
II
scolastico.
di
gioia, ringraziava
sul
i tacchi
batt^ndo
il
giorno dopo
bambino
pavimento,
quelli buoni
di
vie,na
ringraziare la
di biscotti. "Ma
si
il
bambino,
questo
la
gentilepensiejo
del
quale
dice
donna
ppvera
tutto
mano.
rive-
tante
con
di scarpe,
biscotti
la
"
madre
direttrice,
pacchetto
non
saperne
conffssa
rosso
due
cont^nto,
in
pacchettino
un
paio
del
la
b-scotti?":
il
interroga
del
ringraziare
che
con
tutto
pacchettino quattro
qualche giorno
Dopo
queste
la diret-
che
nel
direttrice
vuole
scherm^ndosi, la
nulla:
i canarini
per
Direzione
in
le manda
ricevere
va
e
effusione
tanta
con
ingfnua
sua
Direzipne
in
chiamato
della
233
che
li
comprati lui con i due soldi della direttrice. Gli "ra parsa la
riconosce-nza:
non
di dimostrar
la sua
un
forma
fiore,
piiiadatta
i due
n| un' immagine, che avrejbbe pure potuto acquistare con
i biscottini,
che ess^ndo la cosa
piu desiderata per lui,gli
soldi,ma
E
dovesse
questa gentilezza
"sserlo anche
per la direttrice.
pareva
della madre, perche gli sembrava
voluto fare a nome
egli 1' aveva
aveva
"
partisseda una
rinunciato per l"iall' onore
ch'
m"glio
aveva
essa
EXERCISE
ORAL
V
(1
Chi raccontava
(2
(3
Che
eta
Era
cont"nto
(4
Come
d'
le
avere
Cosa
(8)
Ch'
"ra
Chi
aveva
(11
Con
che
nel
was
vifne
Quando
Perche
la madre
regalato
denari
ha
li
scelto
recently by
in
school
one
with
in
va
Direzione?
pacchettino?
e
perche?
i biscotti
the
of the
her1
an
feet
signora direttrice?
?
dei biscotti ?
XXXIV.
anecdote,
directress
classes
alia
comprati
aveva
EXERCISE
me
nupve?
b"lle scarpe
dice?
(9
(10
(1)
riconosc^nte?
il bambino?
aveva
ringiazipla direttrice?
essa?
Che cpsa gliregal"?
il giorno dopo quando
Cpsa ti^ne in mano
(5
(6
(7
(12
(quanti anni)
bambino
del ppvero
an^ddoto
coming
of
poor
if you
like.
(3)
school.
little
through
girl of
her
(2)
It is
She
said
six years
shoes.
(4)
fact told
that
who
The
came
there
to
teacher
ITALIAN
234
GRAMMAR.
to
(5) The child came
school a few
joy, clicking the heels of her1 new
flowers
the
shoes
on
carrying in her hand some
Catherine
of Sienna.
little picture of Saint
and
a
(7) She went
and made
her a present of them.2
into the directress' room
(8) This
show
her
to
gratitude. (9) The
appeared to her the best way
managed
picture
be
was
also
so
to
beautiful
to
the
the
them
too?
flowers.
How
Regalare
her
to
(11)
is this to
like
flowers
in
this
Exercises
takes
direct
De
Amicis'
that
it must
really more
were
beautiful
more
much;
very
object. Cf.
do
you
like
and
XXXVII,
Vlnfermigredi
Tata.
Exercise
XXXIII.
XXXV.
The
XXXVI,
flowers
be translated?
"
her
to
kindly thought
EXERCISE
Note.
the
But
the
picture,and
it seemed
and
(10)
directress.
the
than
than
beautiful
very
ones.
new
the
of the
use
prepositions found
above.
paragraphs
XXXVIII
are
an
This
and
adaptation of
{Cugre.)
vestito
da
un
giorno piovoso di marzo,
ragazzo
involto
e
un
infangato, con
campagnuolo, tutto inzuppato d' acqua
dell'
al portinaio
di panni sotto il braccio,si presentava
Ospedale dei
di suo
padre, presentando una
Pellegrinidi Napoli, e domandava
d'
viso
ovale
bruno
bel
un
un
lfttera. Aveva
p alii do, gli occhi
vedere
i
semiaperte, che lasciavan
pensierosi,e due grosse labbra
Veniva
da un
denti bianchissimi.
villaggiodei dintprni di Napoli.
lavoro
addietro
Suo padre, partito di casa
1' anno
a
cercar
per andare
in Italia e sbarcato
in Francia, era
tomato
pochi di prima a Napoli
fatto in tempo
improvvisamente, aveva
appena
dove, ammalatosi
il suo
arrivo
dirle
e
a
scrivere
un
rigo alia famiglia per annunziarle
di quella notizia,
che
all' ospedale. Sua
entrava
moglie desolata
inferma
bimba
di casa
e
una
non
perche aveva
potendo moversi
mandato
un
a
Napoli il figluolo maggiore, con
piccino, aveva
fatto
aveva
suo
padre. II ragazzo
qualche soldo, ad assistere
alia
occhiata
dieci
II portinaio, data
un'
miglia di cammino.
il ragazzo
infermiere
e
gli disse che condusse1
l^ttera,chiamp un
mattina
La
dal
"
II
il
d'
padre.
Che
padre?
ragazzo,
nome.
"
un
domando
tremante2
1' infermiere.
per
il timore
d'
una
trista
notizia,disse
236
ITALIAN
of his mother
desolation
GRAMMAR.
the
at
arrival
of the
letter.
(17) And
he
mother
dressed
in19
opened."
Translate
through
="
' '
What
the
13
Cf.
15
Cf. 216.
(3).
222
14
Use
Translate
16Cf.
10
stare
st"tte molto
spalla,ed
una
domandp subito.
Si, " mio
padre,
"
mente.
"
ragazzo,
senza
"
risppse
"
la
supra,
Omit.
' '
Reflexive.
the
Use
vpi.
participle.
present
"to
much."
="how
="recognize."
with
sink
198 (4).
XXXVII.
le
padre?
arrived.
reflexive verb
with
EXERCISE
E
"
=
face swollen."
breathe."
="to
be used?
12
entering in."
"
air.
would
pronoun
"Hehad
II
="
"
tuo
una
mpnaca.
Che
il
verra
pra
Che
"
disse
padre?"
venuto.
son
leggifragli toccp
mano
la
cos'
mfdico.
cps' ha1
supra,
ha?
E
"
s'
mio
dolce-
Coraggio"
allontanp,
dir altro.
Dppo
m"zz'
da
accompagnato
vide
pra
un
Cominciaron
vano.
al
arrivdrono
letto
questo il ragazzo
si
in
entrare
fpndo
assistfnte;la supra
la visita,
fermandosi
vicino.
levp
Prima
ch'
al
e
il
il
mfdico,
infermiere
seguiFinalmente
letto.
pgni
camerpne
un
m"dico
li
si staccasse
da
in
pie,
di,e quando gli s* avvicinp, si mise a
Fatti animo,
piangere. ^ il figliuplodel malato, disse la supra.
disse il medico.
II
c' " ancpra
1$ grave, ma
figliuplo,
speranza.
E
domandar
allpra
avr"bbe voluto
altro; ma non
osp.
ragazzo
"
comincip la
Npn
da
sua
potfndo
bere.
II malato
di ricondscerlo.
accomodava
lp guardava
Senonch^
il
le
sguardo si arrestava
piii
s"mpre
E cosi passp il primo giprno. II giprno dppo
di lui.
a lungo sppra
che glipcchi del malato
rivelassero
un
principiodi cosci"nza.
parve
Alia voce
carezzevole
del ragazzo
che
un' espressipne
pareva
di gratitu dine
nelle pupille,e
gli brillasse un momento
vaga
dir qualche cpsa.
una
se volesse
vplta mpsse un ppco le labbra come
che
Dppo pgni breve assopimento, riapr"ndo gli pcchi, sembrava
il suo
cercasse
piccolo infermiere.
Vfrso sera, avvicinandogli il
il
bicchi^realle labbra, ragazzo
credftte di veder sulle labbra gpnfie
E
un
allpra comincip a riconfortarsi, a
leggierissimo sorriso.
E
la
d'
con
confusamente,
^ssere
sperare.
inteso,almeno
speranza
E
esortava
farsi
animo.
a
gli parlava, gli parlava a lungo, e lp
suo
EXERCISES.
che, anche
gli pareva
c"rto piacere la
un
di
sovente
bench" dubitasse
non
237
il malato
comprendendo,
npn
parlava, perchfc
capito, pure
esser
ascoltasse
con
voce.
sua
Cf. 84.
XXXVIII.
EXERCISE
(1) And so passed the second1 day, and the third,and the fourth.
(2) The hours, the days passed, and the boy was always there with
his father, palpitating at his every
sigh, tossed without
ceasing
fifth
The
and
pectedly,
unexbetween
day,
(3)
discouragement.
hope
the
sick-man
his
shook
head,
as
it
that
when2
doctor
(4) The
worse.
grew
finished.4
was
rogated
inter-
(5)
The
him.
(6) In spite of2 the2
thing consoled
it seemed
to him5 that the sick-man
fact2 that he was
growing worse
looked
was6
(7) He
slowly regaining a little intelligence.
his medicine
to take
fixedly at2 the boy, he wished
always more
of the lips as if he
movement
a
only from him, and he often made
the boy continued
to watch
to say
wished
something. (S) And
the
entered
a
man
him.
(9) Suddenly about four in7 the afternoon
followed
(10) On seeing him the boy
by one of the sisters.
room,
boy
wept
and
yet
one
"
Father
turned 8 and also
!
sharp cry, the man
gave a cry
(11) "But how is this,"exclaimed
"Bfppo!
My little Beppo!
taken
to the
the father,looking at the sick-man, " they have
you
how
of another!"
bed
(12) "Oh, how
glad I am!
glad I am!"
the boy.
stammered
(14) " And
(13) And he could say no more.
still
(15) We can
well, come, let us go home.
son, I am
now,
my
reach
home
this evening."
(16) The boy turned8 to look at the
at2
moment
at that
opened his eyes and looked
sick-man, who
"
is10
him.
I cannot.
(18) There
(17) No, papa," said he, wait
that old man.2
(19) I have been11 with him about five days. (20)1
(21) He always looks at me, he looks at2 me
thought he was
you.
and then I give him
who
(22) I do not know
something 2 to12 drink.
he is,but he wants
he would
die alone; let me
stay here, dear
me,
heart.
a
(23) "Stay," said the father, "stay; you have
papa!"
of anxiety.
mother
at once
to relieve
(24) I shall go home
your
for your
needs.
(25) Here is money
Good-by, my brave son."
gave
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
4
5
8
10
form.
$.
Cf.
verb.
242.
"
Omit.
This
disjunctive form.
Reflexive
C
129.
and
Why?
Place
"he
Cf. 225.
similar
6
also
12
Cf. 215
cases
Cf. 81
"
at
are
(d).
end
Cf. 213
(a).
sort
a
7
of
Cf. 198
of sentence.
(d).
neuter.
(3).
238
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
XXXIX.
EXERCISE
hanno
lezione
d' italiano?
Quattro
Quante vplte la settimana
il
il
abbiamo
lezione
venerdi.
il
e
il
Npn
V9lte, lunedi, martedi, giovedi
il mercoledi, ne il sabato, e la Dominica
" f"sta. Quanti abbiamo
Domani
1' altro "
del mese?
l"oggi il quindici. Qggi " venerdi.
Mercoledi
Dominica.
prpssimo sara il venti luglio," 1' anniverdel po"ta Petrarca.
Ha
le "$peredel Petrarca,
sario della nascita
ho
volume.
ne
J^ il secondo.
qui un
signorina? Sissignpre,1
alia pagina dug"nto trentas"tte.
sonetto
predile,tto
l"cco il mio
Mi dica qualche cosa
della sua
vita.
L"ggo spesso il Petrarca.
sulla punta
delle dita
ma
Volentiejri,
capira che npn ppsso aver
della vita di mess"r
Francesco.
tutti i particolaripiiiminuti
Egli
Allora
in Ar"zzo.
Man!
non
ejra fiorentino?
Arfzzo "
nacque
cosi vicino
Boccdccio
a
a
Fir"nze! Neppur Giovanni
" nato
chi oser"bbe npn
chiamar
fiorentine le sue
Fir"nze, ma
nov"lle
?
Continui.
Petrarca
immortali
Bravo!
que
nacEbb"ne, Francesco
il venti luglio del milletrecento quattro.
ad Arezzo
Suo padre,
di Dante
del partitoghibellino,
amico
e anch'
esso
" ra stato bandito
dove
esercitava
ufficio pubblico. Ripada Fire,
un
mod^sto
nze,
i
del
ratosi a Pisa,affidp primi studj
figliosuo, allora in eta di sftte
anni, ad un vfcchio grammatico di quella citta. Due anni dppo,
av"ndo la mprte dell' imperatpre Enrico sfttimo tpltapgni speranza
la sua
condusse
ai Ghibellini,il padre del Petrarca
famiglia ad
trasferito la cprte pontifiAvignpne, dove Clem"nte quinto aveva
il Petrarca, che
Nel
cia.
ventitrfc
aveva
milletrecentoventisftte,
bellissima
anni, s' invaghi d' una
gipvane avignonese, chiamata
Se ella fosse stata
Laura.
avrejbbe
libera, cfrto il Petrarca npn
ad
esitato un
m
omen
to a farla sua
mpglie, ma
"ra sppsa
Ugo
V
colo
di Spde.
secondo
di
usanza
e
sf
Nulladimeno,
quel
specialdi quel paese, comincip a scrivere per l"i poesie che subito
mente
tutta la vita del Petrarca,
lp rSsero illustre. Due amori dominano
di Laura
V ampre
e
mprto il diciquello della patria. Fu trovato
otto
luglio del milletrecentosettantaquattronella sua
bibliot^ca
Aveva
la t"sta piegata sppra un
libro ap"rto, che "ra
ad Arqua.
di Virgilio.
V Eneide
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Frequently
used
for si
EXERCISE
century
born
was
signpre.
XL.
the
in Florence
golden
in the
age
month
of Italian
of
ture.
litera-
May, 1265,
EXERCISES.
and
died
who
was
in
Paris
(5)
So
when
child
and
and
1313
Boccaccio
and
and
died
last.
in
eight
three
ought to
of Boccaccio,
yean
old
and
before
days
the
and
the
almost
four-hundredth
every
The
Boccaccio
of
were
was
of
seventeen
intimate
died
friends.
one
year
(9) Every
Dante, of Petrarch,
child
Italian
1375.
Italian
of
birth
born
was
December,
(S) Petrarch
Boccaccio.
anniversary
great trio,and
Petrarch
Boccaccio
of the
dates
21st
and
for Boccaccio.
model
know
(4) Giovanni
Certaldo
(3) Petrarch,
1321.
of the
the second
was
(6) Petrarch
a
was
months
(10) The
Dante,
was
died.
Dante
(7) Petrarch
five
than
the third
was
13th of September,
the
on
younger
Boccaccio
in
Ravenna
at
239
the
does
birth
of
five-hundredth
know
them.
Dante
was
will
be
(11)
anniversary
1865.
Bernardi
Dante
lectures on
celebrated in 1965. (12) Professor
on
and
nine
Let
and1
from
to
ten.
us
(13)
Saturdays
Wednesdays
go
I
should
like
to
but
him
hear
to-morrow.
(14)
unfortunately
go,
Let
I
cannot.
this
us
I have
a
so
(1
5)
afternoon, then, to
lesson,
go
of the Uffizi Palace.
in the court
the statue of Dante
see
(16) Thank
hour
shall I expect you?
pleasure! At what
you, I will go with
to four.
(18) Well, then,
(17) At half-pastthree or twenty minutes
2
good-byl
celebrated
in
Translate
"
to ".
Arrivederla.
XLI.
EXERCISE
una
passeggiata. Che ne dite,
Com'" bfl tempo 9ggi! Facciamo
Andremo
in campagna,
li tutto il giorno.
miei ?
e staremo
figliupli
Andiamo!
Siete pronti?
io a
Sta
bfne, vado
Si, si, mamma!
quel mantellino
pr^ndere il cappfllo. Dammi1
per piacere. E
Si va un
in cammino.
adesso mettiamoci2
po'a vedere ci9 che vie,n3
nel campo
alia strada ?
vicino
coltivato
come
Queste sono
rape:
la carne
di b9ve 0 col riso,rifscono5
con
C9tte4 insieme
son
bu9ne!
di
molto
date
e
saporite; qui da noi se ne fa un gran consumo,
loro una
in tanto
alle vacche, procurano
tanto
grande abbondanza
il latte per il caff" della mattina.
Ci danno
di latte.
Ma
fa caldo
mamma?
Ecco una
bella qu^rcia. Andiamo
a
riposarci
nevvero,
Stemmo
li s9tto.
Come
si sta bene qui!
qui, sotto questa qufrcia
n'
fa.
ne
V9lta,
|, Carlino?
Si, me
gia una
ric9rdo, "ra un anno
bel giu9co con
Feci qui un
Giovannino.
in collfgioadesso
Vanno
lui e Andrea, non
stanno
phi con n9i. Me ne andrg in coll^gio
anch' io,mamma
?" Si,pensava
di fartici entrare
anche
quest' anno,
stavi
bene
al
ma
di pensarvi, non
momento
poich$ n9n
1' I19
fatto.
Stiamo
cosi
insieme, mamma
sempre
mia, far" tutto per
"
"
"
"
"
"
ITALIAN
240
imparare b"ne,
anch' io, mamma?
GRAMMAR.
il parroco
dara
mi
le
lezione.
cos!
far
Posso
"
fateci
tutt' e due, non
possibile
andar via!
Ebbe,ne, ne parleremo un' altra volta,vi si"te riposati,
ancora
un
facciamo
p9 di passeggiata.
il
Faremo
"
Cf
99
From
2
See mtetere,
(b).
c(u)9cere,99.
61.
From
venire,
From
riuscire,130.
132.
XLII.
EXERCISE
beautiful weather
two
us
The
(9)
to
rector
time
also
walk
stayed
a
1
in
take
to
all that
school
walk
walk
very
we
"
go
at home.
="
yet
often
rested
rested
were
is under
the
with
Da.
and
had
little
one4
has
me
troubled?
so
you
house.1
I cannot
(6) Yes,
me;
Future.
reallycould
3
Cf. 82.
Use
future.
to have
="
had."
XLIII.
are
friend's
sick
(4)
bear
the
I have
but
not
:i
have
4"it."
(3) Because
I must
finish
to
gone
5
there
go
thought
"
go
after
trees
few minutes.
a
(8) I ought
(7) I can2 do
I
could
do
so4 because
not
yesterday, but
my
5
and
had
I
him
the whole
to amuse
slightly-ill
well.
We
in ten
will wait.
can
(10) Very
go
I am
Now
not?
ready.6 (12) I am
(11) Yes.
on4
walked
we
it in
can
enough
(11) We
proud of
sons?
long les-
went
little."
(2) Why
other, although
with
be
may
possible."
you
Do
well
was
then.
Omit.
or
he
parents
our
well
not
was
EXERCISE
am
could
(12)
pleasant it
(17) How
he
that
so
every
when
then
Preterite.
did
day. (15) We
all day.
(16) We
games,
farther.5
had
until
home
at
every
there
beautiful
lessons
Charles
but
ago,
we
go3 home.
glad when
(13) Yes, they gave us
and
take
half
he
But
best
our
him
gave
(10)
will all do
had
and
years
away.
go
us
very
was
of it.
have3
to
time
some-
(5) Can
letter
my
first.
written
little brother
afternoon,
was
(q)
minutes, can
so
glad that
alone.
Cf. 166.
"
Use
it
" ceo.
we
you
EXERCISES.
241
EXERCISE
il cammello
Anche
qui in Europa
sa
quelliche
come
di certi
tore
a
curiosita.
nb
Perp
da'
non
sabbipsi,che
raggi
le lpro merci
ne
da
filo d'
un
all'
paese
un
lpro perp
si suole
pensarvi
pffrono al ppvero
non
erba, ne
asilo
un
i mercanti
Ma
altro,debbon
non
se
che
abbiamo
non
fatte
del sole.
cocenti
Noi
si
te-npn
tan
or
serragli,e
animali
sono
im
e.
ne'
Paiono
d' acqua,
sorso
diffnderlo
portare
fatti vedere
deserti
un
molto
important
"
i camelli.
che
paesi
animale
un
come'
ci vengon
vasti
quei
"
XLIV.
viaggiache
che
valga
d^bbono
traversarli
pure
i cammelli!
avessero
ne
questi sopportar la sete molti giorni e non
dpgliono
i
cavalli.
di
dorrfbbero per es^mpio
viaggio
Dopo un giorno
Ppssono
come
faticosissimo
P"jrtanocon
dosso.
giacciono
movimento
un
Si pup
la notte
tutta
che
chimarli, e
dovremmo
sapere
Esauriti
finalmente
che
con
anche
cadono
elemento
che
una
vplta
sabbia
piace a molti
ragipne, le
persone
navi
del
sabbia
quella
naufragate che
crudeli, battute,
era
per
dolersene.
senza
le
fanno
queste navi
su
sulla
lpro solo
alle
sedute
deserto.
dove
si vedono
un
Ma
vplte naufragio.
cocente
rasso-
sugli scpgli
coperte
mezzo
sul
cammino
dall'
sptto i
piedi.
EXERCISE
(1) We1
(4)
(5)
the camel
Europeans
(2)
is.
do
not
know
XLV.
(1)
how
(3)
important
an2
animal2
of the horse
the most
wont
to think
are
as
(2) We
useful
animal.
camels
see
(3) We
only in menageries; neverthelesss we
curiosities.
ought not to think of them as mere
(4) Many
travelers
would
be3 lost in the great sandy deserts
where
no
poor
could
horse
it not that these
beasts
made
for
seem
live,were
pocr
countries.
such
of a dry, sandy
(5) A merchant, an inhabitant
land, told me that his camel did not suffer from thirst during many
those
over
days of most wearisome
travel,and that it bore his wares
desolate
motion
of the
plains without
complaining. (6) The
camel
also very
was
agreeable to him, as to many
people. (7) By
day he traveled seated on his camel's back, and by night he lay on
the sand
which
could
defend
trees
no
by its side.
(S) There were
him
from
the scorching rays of the sun, and
his4 head
ached
times
somefrom
the heat,
(y) But it mattered
nothing to the camel;
ITALIAN
242
seemed
it
is
is
happens
shipwreck.
and
sand
were
(14)
water.
am3
(15)
If
camel
as
(17)
am
hear
about
my
not
Noialtri.
Use
badare.
to
and
at
see
the
they
the
cross
shall
generally
we
Omit.
6
="to."
last
be
not
them
desert
silent
(19)
shall
We
and
concerning2
its
it
virtues.
please
Use
7
rimanere.
Preterite.
Repeat
Use
sapere.
you
more
do.8
so.
faithful
know
to
now
called
choose
ought
the
by
be
Did
are
those
as
desert,
reason
by
last
conquered
(18)
now.
sand
the
hot
reefs
at
"
of
with
the
and
the
fall,
make
upon
cruel
desert
is,
ships
can
animals?
these
than
to
concerning2
silent
about
them
and
ship,
that
times
some-
ships
on
the
to
the
it
yet
fallen
seen
belong
"
sea
know
obliged
ever
am
wrecks
element
wished7
have
content.
(16)
to
ships
the
to
the
had
desert
that
And
interesting
which
some
The
know
not
(n)
and
like
proper
belong
ships
other
their
by
seen
there
(10)
do
safely,
curious
These
(13)
conquered
have
lying
seashore.
the
(12)
who
it
cross
can
heat.
the
Europeans
these
that
notice5
not
in6
which
ship
did
fear
inspire
to
wont
camel
he
though
as
GRAMMAR.
glL
ABBREVIATIONS.
verbs
Irregular
Where
m.,
follow
the
by
second
asterisk.
an
of
two
nouns
both
are
of
are
active
the
gender.
same
Where
or
/.,
preceded
are
neuter
dash
va.,
as
vn.,
follow
the
of
second
two
verbs
both
indicated.
indicates
the
repetition
of
the
subject-
word.
244
VOCABULARY.
ITALIAN-ENGLISH
a' =ai,
abbassare,
9cchi, to
to
cast
down
gli
"
the
adv. and
aborrire,
accomodare,
to
to
va.,
in
put
amore,
date,
accommo-
order,
to
to
accom-
range
ar-
va.,
acqua,
obtain,
acquistare, va., to
to
gain
adv., still,yet
adoperare,
va.,
use,
to
make
of
use
*andare,
affanno,
grief
adv., with
affannosamente,
courage,
take
courage
annunziare,
culty
diffi-
anulare,
ape,
affetuoso,
mind,
adj.,affectionate
va.,
in.,
[culty
adv., scarcely,with
*aprire, va.,
end
va.,
to
sharpen
/.,wing
allentare,
va., to
to
dirfi-
learn
open
arditezza, /.,boldness
aria, /.,air, look, mien
that
aguzzare,
ala,
to, to the
uneasy
old
ring-finger
affidare, va.,
announce
adj.,ancient,
*appr"ndere,
entrust
to
adj.,anxious,
affezione, /.,affection
to
anniversary
m.,
/.,bee
appena,
heart;
year
m.,
antico,
amphitheatre
m.,
to
-,
go
anecdote
m.,
m.,
"
ansioso,
m.,
to
vn.,
animo,
anno,
to
to
vn.,
analogo, adj.,analogous
anche, adv., also
anniversario,
now
tame;
love, affection
m.,
fare
adatto, adj.,suitable
to
va.,
anfiteatro,
/.,water
fall ill
to
vn.,
an^ddoto,
pany
like
mild
ancora,
accompagnare,
to
friend
m.,
become
leave
love,
va., to
are,
ammansire,
va., to take
accomiatare,
else
ammalare,
abhor
to
va.,
am
amico,
inhabitant
m.,
thing
enough,
n.,
altro,
eyes
sufficiently
abbondanza,
/.,abundance
abitante,
least
43
lower;
va.,
abbastanza,
adv., at
almeno,
prep., at, to
va.,
allontanarsi,
to
va.,
go
to
ref.,
grow
rest
rich
loosen
to
v.
to
away
arrivo,
;;;., arrival
245
at
ITALIAN
246
ascoltare,
breve, adj.,brief,short
brillare,vn., to shine
listen
to
va.,
GRAMMAR.
asylum, refuge
va., to assign
assegnare,
/.,absence
assenza,
asilo, m.,
assicurare,
va.,
assistente,
in.,
to
bruno, adj.,brown,
bue,
di
carne
beef
"
assure
who
one
in., ox;
dark
assists,
buttare, va.,
to
throw, fling
*cadere, vn.,
to
fall
attendant
an
*assistere, va.,
to
assist
assoluto, adj.,absolute
assopimento,
drowsiness,
m.,
caff",in., coffee
coma
unite
*avere,
have;
to
va.,
sonno,
"
sleepy
Avignon
re].,to approach
n.,
v.
/.,room,
camerone,
m.
room,
bambino,
baby,
m.,
cammino,
notice
to
aug.
ward
cammello,
B
badare, vn.,
inkstand
m.,
hot
calzoni,in. pi.,trowsers
cambiare, va., to change
camera,
Avignone, pr.
avvicinarsi,
calamaio,
caldo, adj.,warm,
to be
caduta, /.,fall
chamber
of camera,
big
(ofa hospital)
in., camel
in., road
f.,country
campagnuolo, m. and adj.,rustic
campagna,
child
banca, /.,bench
ban dire, va., to banish
Campid9glio, m.,the
Rome)
barbaro, adj.,barbarous
battere, va.,
to
beat, strike
Capitol (at
in., field
campo,
bfllo,adj.,beautiful
benchfc,adv.,although
be,ne,adv.,well
*bere
(bevere),va., to drink
capire,va., to understand
capp"llo,m., hat
bfstia,/.,beast
carattere,
bianco, adj.,white
carezza,
bibliotjca,/.,library
bicchi"re,m., tumbler,
carezzevole, adj.,caressing
Carlo, pr. n., Charles
glass
in., infant
canarino,
in.,
cane,
dog
in.,
canary-bird
in., character
/.,caress
bocca, /.,mouth
/.,meat
adj.,dear
caro,
carrozza,
/.,carriage
carta, /.,paper
casa, /.,house
braccio,
bimbo,
biscotto, m.,
m.,
carne,
biscuit
to be
sary
neces-
arm
ter
adj., brave, skillful; inj.,expressive cf approval
bravo,
cercare,
va., to
search, seek
certo, adj.,certain
ITALIAN-ENGLISH
and
che, rcl.
he
which,
that, how
interrog.pron., who,
and
keep
to
va.,
consumo,
us
pron.,
vise
counsel, ad-
to
m.,
each,
continuare,
one
five
num.,
that;
C19, pron.,
continue,
to
va.,
", that
"
is to
contrariare,
to
va.,
vex
/.,conversation
conversazione,
coperta, /.,cover
citta,/.,city
*coprire, va.,
/.,class
clemente, adj.,clement, mild
coraggio,m., courage
/.,crown
corona,
classe,
Clemente,
corso,
m.,
corte,
col9nia,/.,colony
thread
course,
/., conscience,
coscienza,
sciousness
con-
colonist
coltivare, va.,
to
cultivate
credere,
cominciare,
cui, rel.pron.
va.,
to
commence,
cousin
va.,
understand
at
the
conduct, take,
guide
give
davvero, adv., indeed,
truly
denaro,
confess, avow,
owe
confusamente, adv.,confusedly
to,
among,
of
house
*dare, va.,
prep., with
confessare,va., to
whom,
curiosita, /.,curiosity,rarity
to move,
va., to
of
whom,
to
,
whose
(commu9vere),
agitate
va., to buy
comprare,
*compr"ndere, va., to
such
believe
to
va.,
cugino, m.,
begin
comm^dia, /.,comedy
*condurre,
cover.
affair
C9II0,m., neck
*comm9vere
to
/. court, court-yard
corto, adj.,short
C9sa, /.,thing, matter,
object,
m.,
go
on
say
con,
the
consumption, use
isfied
contento, adj.,content, glad,sat-
col9no,
(by
adj.,noisy
chiassone,
cinque,
conservare,
consigliare,va.,
ci, pron.,
know
va., to
senses)
who
each
247
ter]'., *condscere,
interrog. pron., in-
who,
chi, rcl.
VOCABULARY.
to
in
truth,
"n., money
tooth
dente, in.,
desfrto, m.,
desert
desiderare,va.,
desolato,
adj.
to
and
desire,long for
pp.
of
deso-
248
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
destra,/.,right hand
*dovere,
va.,
must,
ought
di, prep., of
di, m.,
day
dubitare, vn.,
eighteen
diciotto,num.,
dieci,num.,
due,
*diffndere,
va., to
duke
num.,
two
defend, protect
difficile,
adj.,difficult
dimenticanza., /.,forgetfulness
dimenticare, va., to forget^^
dimorare,
live,dwell
to
vn.,
necessary,
doubt, fear
to
m.,
duca,
ten
be
to
E
e,
conj.,and
dimostrare, va.,
show, prove
dintprno, m., environs
eccezione, /.,exception
dipendfnza,/.,dependence
e,ceo,
to
*dire,va.,
to
tell,relate
say,
is,behold
rector'sEgiziano, adj.and
di-
office
elemento,
right
emigrate
emisfero, m., hemisphere
Enrico, pr. n., Henry
discourse, sermon
to
*divenire, vn.,
to
become
entrare,
*dividere,
to
divide
dolce,adj.,sweet,
soft
erre,
vn.,
/.,the
to
*esaurire, va.,
dolcezza, /.,sweetness,
esclamare,
suffer;
to
mildness
"
dolersi,
of
di, to
domani,
"
va.t to
ask
demand,
dominare,
/. Sunday
dominate,
esercitare,
mand
com-
/.,domination
to
low
exercise, fol-
business, filloffice
esitare, vn.,
hesitate
to
/. expression
espressione,
,
*"ssere,vn.,
to
be
being
wards
adv., after,after-
estr^mo,
m.,
extreme,
extremity
/.,age.
Etrusco, adj. and w., Etruscan
Eurppa, /.pr. n., Europe
eta,
for
"
estremita, /.,extremity
dgnna, /.,woman
dopo, prep, and
va.,
some
e"ssere,m.,
dominazione,
exclaim
instance
essa,
va., to
va., to
exhaust
adv., to-morrow;
Domenica,
to
"r"
ask;
enter
letter
Egyptian
m.,
element
w.,
emigrare, vn.,
va.,
is,
building
discorso,m.,
interj here
direttrice,
/.,directress
diritto,m.,
and
there
director
direttore,m.,
adv.
well
ENGLISH
ITALIAN
VOCABULARY
249
francese,adj.and
famiglia,/.,family
Francia, /. pr.
France
franco,adj.and
frate,m.,
friend
fanciullo,
m.,
*fare, va.,
to
to
put
do, make;
male
"
entrare,
"
t ;
passeggiata,to take
walk;
three
fa,
mesi
to
vento,
"
blow;
months
ago;
pp. of fare,
plete,
com-
favorite
m.,
to
stop; fermarsi
da,
a,
from
Thursday
giovedi,m
giocare (giuocare),
va.,
.
giupco, m.,
n.
and
entine
adj.,Flor-
fpndo,
m.,
river
m.,
depth, bottom,
to
play
sport
swear
ness
large-
heart,
end
adj.,heavy,
grazia, /. grace
grave,
/.,form, manner,
adj.,strong
f"?rte,
way
to
forma,
game,
giurare,va.,
to
young
man,
young
f.,
woman
finish
pr.
lie down
to
ginpcchio,m., knee
/.,joy, mirth
gigia,
giorno,m., day
youth,
/.,window
*fingere,va., to feign
finestra,
Fiorentino.
Ghi-
pr. n.,
gipvane (giovine),adj.,young
and
giovane (giovine), w.
to
and
giardino,m., garden
finale, adj.,final
finire, va.,
throw
bellinc
*giacere,vn.,
"
to
m., son,
figlio,
/.,daughter, child
figlia,
little son
m., son,
figliuolo,
/. courtesy, kindness
gentilezza,
Germania, /.,pr. n., Germany
giacchetta,/. jacket
child
genitpre,m., parent
gfnte, /.,nation, people, race
gia,adv., already
stop, pause
as
gamba, /.,!ci
'6
ghibellino,adj.
va., to
outside
fuQri,prep., without,
gettare, va.,
fede, /.,faith
ref
brother
fratello,
in.,
finished
fermare,
nice
fact
(in
hard
in.,
brother
monk,
tre
ing,
faticoso, adj.,laborious, fatigufatto,
Frank
n.,
become
farsi,ref.,to
pr.
religiousorder)
injure hur
to
,
una
"
;/.,
serious
;
thanks
Gr"cia,/.pr.
n., Greece
pi. grazie,
ITALIAN
25"
grosso,
adj.,big, full
interessante, adj.,interesting
beware!
interrogare,va.,
look
at
guardare, va.,
guardia,/.,guard
guidare,va., to guide
guizzare, vn., to glide,slide
satisfaction,
taste,
gusto, m.,
*interrompere,va.,
intitolare,va.,
to
invaghire,va.
and
love
to
interrupt
entitle
ref.,to fall in
with
pleasure
interrogate,
to
examine
ask,
guancia, /.,cheek
to
GRAMMAR.
bundle, packet
m.,
inzuppare, va.,
soak
to
1' altro,
"
va., to
mparare,
mperatore,
emperor
m.,
mportante, adj.,important
mprestare,
lend
to
va.,
adv.,
mprovvisamente,
suddenly
n, prep.,
pectedly,
unex-
in, into
nchiostro,
m.,
ate,
adj., inconsider-
to
soil with
lei
del
"
-,
to
("you")
letto,m.,
mud
attendant
nurse,
m.,
ngfnuo, adj.,ingenuous
nglese,adj.and pr. n., English
innimico, m. and adj.,enemy,
[imical
niziativa, /.,initiative
va.,
lavagna, /.,blackboard
*l^ggere,va., to read
leggifro,adj.,light
use
in
the
(you);
pronoun
addressing one
to
to
bed
lettura,/.,reading
levare, va.,
to rise,
lift;v. ref.,
to
li,adv.,there
liberare,va.,
to
liberate,set free
libero,adj.,free
libro,m., book
teach
*int"ndere, va.,
intend, mean
Leo
n.,
/.,letter
lfttera,
nsegnare,
latte,m., milk
Leone, pr.
meet
to
ndi, adv.,afterwards
nfermifre,
m.,
va.,
nfangare, va.,
lip
lamentarsi, v. ref.,to lament
lapis,m., pencil
lasciare,
va., to leave, let
dare
foolish
ncontrare,
labbro,
ink
nconsiderato,
adj.,irregular
irregolare,
Italia,/. pr. n., Italy
Lidia, /.pr.
together
understand,
Lydia
lingua,/.,tongue, language
lo,def.art. and pers. pron., him,
it,the
n.,
ITALIAN
252
naufragio,m., shipwreck
/.,ship
nave,
pers. pron., us, to us, some,
of it,for it; adv., thence
con].,neither, nor
adv., neither,
nemmeno,
ne,
nor-
even
adv.,neither,nor-either
adj. and indef. pron.,
nessuno,
nobody
no, none,
contr. of non
nevvero,
" vero
nifnte, m., nothing
nippte,m., nephew
nQ, adv.,no, not
noi, pers. pron., we, us
nominare, va., to name
che, only
adv.,no, not;
npnno, m., grandfather
npn,
"
ours
our,
notice
notizia,/.,news,
nptte, /.,night
adv.,nothing
nulladimeno, adv.,nevertheless
ad].,new
nuovo,
nulla, in.
O
oh!
inter].,
occhiata, /.,glance
o,
pcchio, m.,
eye
offer
to
dim.
ospedale,m., hospital
osservazione, /.,observation
eight
ptto, num.,
pvest,
west
m.,
country
paese, m.,
pagina, /.,page
paio, m., pair
palazzo,m., palace
pallido,adj.,pale
in., cloth; pi.,clothes
panno,
papa,
papa,
in.,
father
parfcchi,adj. pi.,several
*parere,vn., to seem, appear
parlare,vn., to speak, talk
parpla,/.,word
parte, /..part
adj.,particular
particulare,
partire, vn., to go away,
from, proceed from
come
party
vn.,
to
pass,
go
turn
of upmo,
young
patronato,
m.,
patronage;
"
cco-
lastico,protection, assistance
little man
onorabile, adj.,honorable
in., honor
(Jpera,/.,work, piece
literaryproduction
operaio,m., workman
dare
to
vn.,
ogni, adj.,every
onore,
horror
m.,
passare,
9ggi, adv.,to-day
man,
orrore,
partito,m.,
*ofrrire,va.,
omino,
osare,
neppure,
npstro, poss.,
ne,
either,not
GRAMMAR.
paved
floor
of
work,
pellegrino,m.,
penna, /.,pen
pensare,
pilgrim, stranger
va., to think
ITALIAN-ENGLISH
VOCABULARY
253
poeta,
adj.,thoughtful,pensive
pensieroso,
poi,adv., then
ref.,to repent
pentirsi,.?'.
per, prep., for, by, through, to,
in order
to
lose
to
poiche,adv.,since, because
politico,m., politician
police,m., thumb
polso,in., pulse
p9polo, ;;/., people, nation, race
portare,
pardon,
to
va.,
/;/., poet
give
for-
pQvero,
to be able ; m.
adj., poor;
m.,
bit, short
*piacere,vn.
per
to
"
ure;
please; m. pleasplease,kindly
strand
piaggia,/.,shore,
*piangere (piagnere)vn. to weep
piano, m. and adj.,plain
mar/.,small square,
piazzetta,
ket-piace
[one
picchiare,va., to knock
little
small;
m.,
piccino,adj.,
little
adj.,
piccolo,
piede,m., foot
piegare,va., to bend, bow
pieta,/.,piety,pity
pietra,/.,stone
pietruzza,/.,dim. of pietra
,
pigliare,va.,
to
take;
"
in pr$s-
tito, to borrow
pregare,
va.,
to
*prfndere, va.,
va.,
to
preparare,
presentare,
not
piii,
ple
peo-
adv., little,few,
much
poesia,
beg
pray,
to
take
prepare
to
va.,
present;
/.,poetry, poem
v.
ref.,presentarsi,to appear
prfstito,
Di., borrowing
adv.,
quickly
presto,
prezioso,adj.,precious
prima, adv., before, at first
primo, adj., first
principio,m.,
procurare,
beginning
va., to
procure,
help
give
adj.,ready,
pronto,
prompt
f.,
proniinzia, pronunciation
pr9prio, adj., proper,
peculiar;
to,
cause
to
proseguire, va.,
prossimamente,
to
pursue
adv
,
soon,
shortly
pr9ssimo, adj.,near,
adj. and
poverino,
adv., really
piovoso,adj.,rainy
piu, adv. and m., more;
majority, the most, most
poco,
power
time
,
periodo,m., period
perQ, conj.,therefore, but
persona, /.,person
pezzo,
dear
dim., poor,
Petrarca,
"
best
vn.
*pote"re,
gerous
pericoloso,adj., perilous,dan-
carry
adj.,possible;il mio
possibile,
my
perfino,adv., even
to
va.,
next
pupilla,/.,pupil of
pure,
conj.,yet,
the
eye
still also
GRAMMAR.
ITALIAN
254
Q
qualche, adj., some,
few;
any,
pron.,
who,
adj., how
all;
many,
how
much,
day of
what
mese,
n.,
del
the
month
riconfortarsi,
*riconoscere,
*rincrescere,
ragazzo,
m.,
to
boy
tremble, shake,
one's
joice,
re-
/.,turnip
rassomigliare,vn., to resemble
re, m., king
va., to bring, give
recare,
rapa,
adv., recently
a
regalare,va., to present, make
present of
regno, m., kingdom
rfgola,/.,rule
*r"ndere, va., to render, give
to
to
stay
return
to
senses.
rice
riso, m.,
rispettpso,adj.,respectful
*rispondere,vn., to answer
ritratto,m., picture,portrait
*riuscire,
to
out
succeed,
to
vn.,
turn
be, become
rivelare, va.,
to
reveal
rivere,nza, /.,reverence,
respect,
salute
riverire,
va.,
to
revere,
salute
Roma,
rosso,
adj.,red
back, make
restio,adj.frestive
take
resume,
recall
fly for
tell,relate
recentemente,
resort,
to
va.,
ripigliare,
again
adj.,fifth
va.,
renounce,
shelter
fifteen
raccontare,
sorry
to
to
to
thank
to
va.,
give up
riparare, vn.,
qufrcia,/.,oak
qui,adv.,here
di,
"
be
to
vn.,
ringraziare,va.,
rinunziare,
num.
laugh;
to
four
quattro,num.,
quello,adj.and dem. pron., that,
one
recognize
to
va.,
vn.,
laugh at
rigo,m., line
quinto,
take
adj.,fourth
quarto, num.
quasi,adv., almost
quindici,num.,
ref., to
v.
riconoscenza, /.,gratitude
*ridere,
is it?
that
receive
to
va.,
Richard
riconoscfnte, adj.,grateful
abbiamo
"
Ricciardo, pr.
re-open
courage
which, what
quando, adv., when
quanto,
to
ricevere,
volta, sometimes
"
*riaprire,va.,
sabato,
m.,
Saturday
sabbia, /.,sand
honor,
ITALIAN-ENGLISH
VOCABULARY.
sabbioso, ad j.,,
sandy
sentire, va.,
saggio,adj.,wise
senza,
saltare, vn.,
salutare,
jump
to
to
va.,
morning
255
feci hca:
to
prep., without
/.,evening
s^rie,/..scries
sera.
good-
greet, say
serraglio,m.,
to
ness
salvatichezza, /.,wildness, rude-
enclosure,
menag
eric
servire, va.,
to
serve
sete, /..thirst
santita, /.,holiness
saporito, adj.,savory
sftte,
/.,week
s^ttimo, adj.,seventh
sfortunato, adj.,unfortunate
sbarcare,
edly
repeat-
disembark
to
va.,
*scegliere(scerre)
,
si pron.,
choose,
va., to
select
scellerato, adj.,wicked
schermire,
ward
to
vn.,
off;
one's
self
sci9cco, adj.,stupid
scolare, m., scholar,
pupil
longing
scolastico, adj., scholastic, beto the
scorso,
adj. and
past,
Mrs.
sir,Mr.
signoria,/.,rule, government
simpatico, adj., sympathetic,
singhiozzare,vn.,
singolare, adj. and
sinistro,adj.,left
solamente,
sole, m.,
conj.,if;
s"colo, m.,
"
non
century,
*sedere,
che, except
to
sit,to
seat
to
one's
to
seem,
sleep;
m..
aver
to
"
sleepy
va.,
sopra, prep.,
to
support,
on,
upon,
sorflla,/.,sister
appear
ually
contin-
be
bear
semiaperto, adj.,half-open
adv., always,
accustomed,
sonnet
sopportare,
vn.,
be
sonno,
sfdia,/.,seat
segno, m., sign
*seguire,va., to follow
s"mpre,
penny
sun
sonetto, m.,
self
sembrare,
soldier
wont
solo.
age
num.
vn.,
m.,
singular
adv.,only
m..
*sol|re,vn.,
excuse
adj.,second
secpndo, adv.,according to
secondo,
m.,
pp. of scorrere,
soldo,
se,
sob
to
to
certain
schools
last
va.,
people, they
scrittore,m., writer
scusare,
self,one,
si,adv., yes
sicuro, adj.,sure,
congenial
rock, reef
sepglio,Di.,
seven
num.,
settimana.
sorriso
sorso,
smile
m.,
gulp, drink
m.,
sptto, prep
sovente,
under
,
adv.,often
over
fer,
suf-
256
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
testa,
and
m.
/.,head
Tevere, pr.
"., Tiber
timore,
fear, apprehension
m.,
toccare,
touch
to
va.,
*t9gliere (torre),va.,
explain
to detach, leave
staccarsi, v. ref.,
stanco, adj. tired, fatigued
*stare,vn.,to stand, to be
stile,m., style
to bind,
va.
*stringere(strignere)
draw together
studiare, va., to study
studio, w., study
at
subito, adv., suddenly, soon,
to
tornare,
take,
to
vn.,
return,
come
back
trasferire,
va.,
all at
sublime
to
away
tratto, m.,
once
sublime, adj.
contention.
scolding
take
adj.,third
num.
tiratina, /.,debate,
spiegare, va.,
t?rzo,
transfer
to
time;
turn,
ad
un
"
once
suo,
hers
traversare,
/.,sister,
superiore, adj.,superior, upper
svoltata, /., turn, corner
(of
street)
suora,
tremare,
a
such
tastare,
va.,
tristo,adj.,sad, bad
m.,
triumvir
find
to
va.,
Torino, pr.
tutto,
to
thirty
trenta, num.,
trovare,
many,
tremble
to
vn.,
triumviro,
tagliare,
va., to cut
tanto, adj.and adv.,so much,
n., Turin
adj.,all
touch, feel
father, daddy
word)
tata, m.,
tine
(infanuccfllo,m.,
bird
tivola, /.,table
ufficio,m.,
ultimo, adj.,last
tedesco, adj.and
umano,
tsmperino,
m.,
pr.
n.,
German
penknife
/.,earth
terreno, in., ground, land
t"rra,
cross
three
tre, num.,
nun
va., to
office,charge
adj.,human
Umberto,
unghia, /.,nail
uno,
ind.
art.
one
uomo,
m.,
man
and
num.,
a,
an,
ITALIAN-ENGLISH
/.,
usanza.
*uscire.
out,
go
out
come
viaggio.
take
to
*valere,
/.,
/
prep.,
next
near,
violence
visit
,
have
suffice,
the
viso,
adj.,
/.,
vista,
vast
face
;;z.,
vispo,
worth
adj.,
vasto.
and
adj.
visita,
to
be
power,
"
trip
violenza,
vague
vn.,
un
useful
adj.,
fare
journey
;;/.,
vicino,
vago.
traveler
ui
,
to
adj.,
utile,
257
viaggiatore,
custom
use,
vu.,
VOCABULARY
lively
merry,
sight;
prima
at
"
Vaticano,
pr.
vfcchio,
adj.,
*vedere,
va.,
veleno,
venti,
adj.,
vestire,
to
va.,
adv.,
real
at
more,
away
viaggiare,
vn.t
to
pass.,
road
much
more,
m.t
vgstro,
travel,
journey
zia.
/.,
zio,
m.t
willingly,
time;
alle
sometimes
times,
volume,
dress
way,
/., turn,
volta,
desire
adv.,
volenti^ri,
be)
towards
/., street,
via,
(to
voice
/., will,
vgglia,
come
true,
prep.,
verso,
/.,
voce,
twenty
num.,
vero,
via,
to
/., vivacity
vivacita,
see
Friday
vn.,
sight
/.. life
vita,
poison
m.,
venire,
(first)
Vatican
ancient
old,
to
m.,
venerdi,
the
n.,
aunt
uncle
volume
your,
yours
gladly
v9lte,
ENGLISH-ITALIAN
VOCABULARY.
abhor,
va.,
be
able, to
aborrire
"
(= weapons)
arrival, arrivo, m.
potere
vn.,
/.
assemza,
absolute, adj.
arrive, arrivare,
assoluto
as,
ache, dolere,
afraid, to
"
temere,
va.,
aver
hour
un'
"
ora
fa
how
do)
in.
divertire, trattenere,
va.
altro
ref.
vn.
va.;
come
you
to
ten
"
di"ci anni;
aver
(=
how
do
you
sta
altro,
un
because, conj.,perch^
become, *farsi,v. ref.
bed, l"tto,in.
bee,
/.
are
fame,
aver
and, conj.,e
anecdote, an"ddoto, m.
anniversary, anniversario, m.
apply, applicar,
hungry,
n.,
old,
years
prep., da
*parere,
in.
voce
amphitheater, anfiteatro,
appear,
thirsty,hot, cold,
anxiety, pena,
m.
"
alone, adj.,solo
aloud, adv., ad alta
author, autore,
back, dosso, m.
bank, sponda, riva, /.
to
be, *" ssere,
vn.;
all,adj.,tutto
almost, adv., quasi
amuse,
assicurare, va.
assure,
baby, bambino,
air,aria, /.
among,
adv., siccome
aunt, zia,/.
paura
aofo,
vn.
*ascendere, *salire,va.
ask, domandare, va.
vn.
be
armi, /.pi.
ascend,
accompagnare
va.,
accompany,
le
arms
ape,
/.
begin, cominciare,
si a, v. ref.
*metter-
va.;
26o
ITALIAN
demand,
/.;to
domanda,
mandare,
GRAMMAR.
do-
"
excellence, eccellenza, /
exception, eccezione, /.
va.
departure, partfnza, /.
dependence, dipendenza, /.
exclaim, esclamare,
deserve, meritare,
explain, spiegare,va.
eye, 9cchio, m.
excuse,
va.
desolate, adj.,deserto
scusare,
va.
va.
destroy, *distruggere,va.
die, *morire, vn.
difficult,
adj.,difficile
difficolta,/./ with
difficulty,
affannosamente,
"
"
fact,fatto,m.
adv.
director, direttore,m.
faith,fede, /.
directress,direttrice,/.
faithful,adj.,fedele
fall,*cadere, vn.; caduta, /.
familiar, adj. and n., familiare
dog,
cane,
m.
family, famiglia,/.
far,adj. and adv.,lontano; adv.,
lunge
fast, adv., prfsto, sollecitamente
father, padre, m.
in.
door, p"?rta,/.
dry, adj.,arido
duke, duca,
in.
per
feel,sentire,tastare,
vn.
pr.
n.,
egi-
ziano
either, conj.;
nor
"
neppure,
nemmeno
empire, imp"ro,
end, fondo,
flight(ofstairs) branco,
floor,pavimento, m.
,
nemico, inimico,
enough, adv., abbastanza
enrich, arrichire,va.
enemy,
m.
n., etrusco
every,
ognuno,
ciascuno
pr.
n.,
pron.,
n.
foot, piede, m.
for,prep., per;
adv., mai
and
n.
flower, fj.ore,
m.
m.
fiorentino
vn.
entitle,intitolare,va.
ever,
feign,*fingere,vn.
few, adj.and n., qualche; p9chi,
m., pQche, /.
find,trovare, va.
finger,dito,m.
finish,finire,va.
first,adj.,primo; adv., prima
five,cinque, num.
fixedly,adv., fissamente
m.
in.
enter, entrare,
va.
ogni,
conj.,pdich^
formerly, adv., altre vQlte,/.pi.
fortunate,adj.,fortunato
ENGLISH-ITALIAN
va.
adj.,quarto
half, adj.,mezzo
261
VOCABULARY.
hand,
francese
n.,
m.
happen, *accadere,
happy, adj.,felice
hat, cappfllo,m.
have,
/.
mano,
*avere,
head, capo,
gain,acquistare,va.
giu9co,m.
game,
gate, pprta. /.
at, guardare, va.
gaze, to
generally,adv.,generalmente
gentleman, signore, w.
German,
adj.and pr. n., tedesco
Germany, Germania, /. pr. n.
girl,ragazza, /.
give,*dare, va.
glad, adj.,contento
gladly,adv., volentieri
"
to
"
"
gold, Qro,
golden, adj.,d'Qro,m.
good, adj., bu"?no, dabbene
(placed after noun) ;
day,
bugn giorno;
by, addio; to
"
"
governor,
heart, cu9re,
heat, calore,
m.
heel, tacco,
m.
hemisphere, emisfero,
Henry, Enrico, pr. n.
here, adv., qui, qua;
his, pass.,
va.
m.
m.
is, ecco
"
suo
history,st9ria,
/.
home, casa, /.
honorable, adj., onorabile,
ono-
revole
hot, adj.,caldo
house, casa, /.; at the
/.
of, da,
"
prep.
m.
grazia,/.
father,
grand, adj., grande;
son,
nipote,m.
m.;
n9nno,
grass, erba, /.
gratitude,riconoscenza, /.
great, adj., grande; greater,
maggiore; very great, sommo
greatness, grandezza, /.
Greece, Grfcia, /.pr. n.
green, adj.,verde
grace,
"
ground, terreno, m.
guide,guidare,va.
sentire,
governatore,
"
m.
hear, *udire,
away,
hope, sperare, va.; speranza,
out,*uscire, horse, cavallo, m.
m.
"
va.
an-
vn.
do
vn.
if,conj.,se;
as
"
ill,adj.,malato;
come
dim
se
somewhat
.,
ill,sickly,malatuccio
inter j.,davvero
indice, m.
(finger),
inhabitant,
abitante,
ink-well, calamdio,
m.
w.
insect, insftto,m.
inspire,inspirare,va.
instinct, istinto,
m.
interesting,
adj.,interessante
interrogate,interrogare, va.
262
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
like,adv., come
intimate, adj.,intimo
invader,
invasore,
like
m.
love),
to
amare,
va.;
piacere,
irregular,adj.,irregolare
Italy,Italia,/. pr. n.
vn.
lion,leone,
m.
lip,labbro, m.
J
John, Giovanni, pr.
journey, viaggio,m.
jump, saltare,vn.
literature,letteratura,/.
little,
adj.,piccolo,piccino; adv.
and adj. poco
lively,adj.,vispo
long, adj.,lungo
look,
at, guardare, va.; to
n.
"
"
va.
keep, conservare,
kindly, adj.,buono
king, re, m.
kingdom, regno, m.
kiss, baciare;
repeatedly,
for, cercare,
lordship,signoria,/.
lose, *p|rdere,va.
"
sbacciuccare,
va.
knock, picchiare,va.
know,
by the senses,
"
re;
va.
love,
amore,
m.
love,
amare,
va.
va.
recognize, *riconoscere;
mind, *sapere
by
n.
adj., matto
mad,
make,
lack,
lower, abbassare,
*conosce-
the
"
vn.
mancare,
*fare, va.
m.
upmo,
man,
lady, signpra,/.
manage,
fare in modo
land, terreno,
manner,
modo,
m.
language, lingua,/.
last, adj., ultimo, scorso;
m.
at
"
"
adv., finalmente
di
"
tare,
maggio,
may,
to
take
"
accomiatarsi, ref.
lecture, fare un discorso,parlare,
vn.
m.
mi
me,
*intfndere,
mean,
medicine,
va.
medicina,
/., medici-
nale, in.
vn.
left,adj.,sinistro
meet,
leg, gamba, /.
lesson, lezione,/.
menagerie, serraglio,m.
merchant,
letter,l"ttera,/.
mere,
adj.,puro,
mild,
to
lie,
"
down,
life,vita,/.
*giacere, vn.
incontrare,
ref.
va.
mercante,
grow
m.
semplice
ammansirsi.
"
v.
ENGLISH-ITALIAN
north, nprd,
military,adj.,militare
mind,
animo,
minute,
minuto,
notice,
misfortune, disgrazia,/.
denaro,
month,
mese,
m.
va., badare
osservare,
infermiere,
nurse,
m.
111.
111.
m.
(people),i piii,
mother,
madre, /.
object,cpsa, /.
oblige,obbligare, va.
pi
most
motion,
movimento.
observe,
/.
ocean,
movimento,
movement,
m.
"
quan-
(=
to
be
obliged),*dovere,
vn.
stesso
me
me,
nominare,
va.;
npme,
va.
narrare,
"
bisogno,"/.
mai,
in faccia
to, affinche
"
ordinarily,adv.,ordinariamente
origin,origine,/.
other, adj. and pron., altro
ought (expressing duty), *doveie,
need, necessitl, /.
adv., non
-aprire,va.
"
order, in
never,
to
opposite, prep.,
or, con].,0, pd
(finger-nail)unghia, /.
narrate,
uno
-a;
indef.art. and num.,
ad
uno
one
una
vplta
by one,
solamente
adv.,
only,
adj. and
aperto ;
pp.,
open,
one,
name,
on,
how
tanto
"
over,
vn.
prep., per
mai
adj.,nu9vo
night, nptte, /.
adv.,np, non;
no,
nobody, nessuno,
new,
nessun
altro
pron.,
ten
"
much, adj.,molto;
so
m.
often, adv.,spesso
Mr., signor(e)
Mrs., signora
to;
mare,
of, prep., di
*mpversi, v. ref.
move,
va.
osservare,
occidental, adj.,occidentale
m.
mountain, montagna,
mouth, bpeca, /.
none,
(sl),
now,
adv., piu
more,
nail
;;/.
frate, m.
monk,
must
America,
vn.
m.
monarca,
money,
quaderno,
nothing, niente,
m.
misery, mis^ria, /.
monarch,
book,
note
mio
North
in.;
del Nprd
America
;;/.
mine, poss., il
263
VOCABULARY.
nessuno
adj.,nessuno
m.;
"
painfully,adv.,affannosamente
pair, paio, 111.
pale, adj. pallido
palpitate,palpitare,vn.
carta, /.
paper,
,
else,
parent, genitpre,m.
264
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
part, parte, /.
pass,
vn.
passare,
/.
pen, penna, /.
pencil,lapis,m., matita, /.
people, pppolo,m., gente, /.
period,periodo,m.
picture, pittura,/.,ritratto,
immagine, f.
piety,pieta,/.
plain,pianura,/.
play, giocare (giuocare),va.
fare bene
pleasant,to be
please,*piacere,vn.
pleasing,adj.,piacevole
pace,
peace,
"r"
race,
g"nte, /.
ragged, adj.,stracclato
raise, levare,
m.,
"
range,
va.
v.
ref.
allungarsi,
raggio,m.
read, *lfggere,va.
reading, lettura, /.
ready, adj. pronto
really,adv., davvero
ragione,/.
reason,
ray,
pleasure,piacere,m.
plump, adj.,grassotto
recall,ricordarsi,v. ref.
recently,adv., recentemente
poet, pofta, m.
poison, veleno, m.
recognize,*riconoscere,
rector, parroco,
politician,politico,
poor, adj.,pQvero
m.
potere,
praise,lodare,
relate, raccontare,
va.
preacher,predicatore,
precious,adj.,prezioso
to
regalo, dono, m.;
present,
fare un
make
regalo,un
a
"
dono
press,
pulse, polso,m.
pupil,scolare,m.
Q
regina,/.
queen,
quickly,adv., stibito
quiet adj. tranquillo
,
m.
va.
regain,riacquistare,
in.
m.
va.
red, adj.,rosso
m.
reef, sc(?glio,
ritratto,m.
portrait,
power,
m.
va.
osservare,
remember,
va.
ricordarsi, vn.
va.
repeat, ripftere,
reply,*rispondere,vn.
republic,repubblica,/.
adj.,rispettoso
respectful,
v.
ref.
rest, riposarsi,
restive,adj.,restio
va.
ripigliare,
resume,
right,diritto,m.
right,adj.,destro; adv., a destra
dito anulare, anulare,
ring-finger,
m.
rise,levarsi, v. ref.
river,fiume,
m.
adj.,rgseo
ENGLISH-ITALIAN
fila,f.
row,
/.;("=dominion)
r"gola,
rule,
*cprrere;
singular,singolare,w.
sink, *imm^rgersi, v. rcf.
sister, sorella; =nun,
signona. /.
run
scappare,
away,
"
sit
same,
adj.,stesso
sand,
sabbia, /.
/.
sleep,spnno, "u.
aver
sleepy,to be
spnno
slowly,adv.,lentemente
small, adj.,piccolo
that, affinch^
so, adv., cosi;
safely,adv., sicuramente
salute, salutare,
"
va.
"
sandy, adj.,sabbipso
Saturday, sabato, m.
*dire, va.
some,
pron., alcuni
school, scupla, /.
something, qualche
scolding,tiratina, /.
scorching,adj.,cocente
sometime,
*vedere,
seek,
sorry,
va.
*parere, sembrare,
seem,
September, settembre,
vn.
the
*rincrescere,vn.
"
Spanish, adj.
pr. n.,
gnuplo
speak, parlare,vn.
spite,in
malgrado
/.
sponge,
spugna,
=park,
piazza, /.
square,
stair, scala, f.
balbettare,vn.
stammer,
she, pron.,
ess,a
ship,nave,
/.
staring,adj., fisso
statue, statua, f.
make
gare,
shoe,
naufra-
"
statute,
vn.
/.
spalla,/.
show,
mostrare,
sick,adj.and
res
stick, bastpne,
stone,
in.
tare,
vn.
m.
pietra,/.
stop, fermarsi, v. ref.
va.
m.,
statuto,
stay, *stare,
Scarpa,
shoulder,
malato
sasso,
/;/.,
ruscello, in.
side, lato, m.
stream,
sigh,sospiro, m.
sight,vista, /.
street, strada,
/.
street-corner,
svo^tata,
silent, to be
Simon,
"
*tacere,
since, conj.,poiche
spa-
"
sharp, adj.,acuto
shipwreck, to
giprno
m.
series, sfrie,
/.
shake
be
to
and
va.
cercare,
/.
seashore, spiaggia, /.
see,
cpsa,
other, un
or
"
p V altro
m.
mare,
sea,
v.
/.
ref.
sej
slate, lavagna,
sad, adj.,triste
supra,
(down), accomodarsi,
six, num.,
vn.
say,
265
VOCABULARY.
vn.
/.
strong, adj.,fprte
266
ITALIAN
GRAMMAR.
throw,
style,stile, m.
subject,soggetto,m.
sublime, adj.,sublime
such, adj. and adv., tanto
thumb,
del
sole
m.
superior,adj.,superiore
giurare,vn.
swear,
swell, gonfiare,vn.
swollen, adj.,gpnfio
toss, agitare,va.
table, tavola, /.
take, *pr"ndere, *t9gliere,va.;
to
walk, fare una
a
pas"
tragedy, trag^dia,/.
tranquillity,
tranquillita,/.
travel, viaggiare,vn., viaggio,m.
traveller,viaggiatore,m.
tree, albero, m.
trio,trio,m.
seggiata
teach, insegnare,
teacher, maestro,
va.
m.,
lagrima, /.;
tears, scoppiare
maestra,
burst
to
in
/.
into
lagrime
tell,raccontare, narrare,
than, adv., di, che
and
dem.
quello,quel tale;
triumvir, tritimviro,m.
trouble, *affliggere,
affannare,va.
true, adj.,vero
truly,adv., davvero
Turin, pr.
va.
n., Torino
*v9lgere,va.
Tuscan, adj. and pr.
turn,
va.
thank, ringraziare,
thanks, grazie, /.pi.
that, pr.
si
Tiber, Tevere,
"
va.
m.
pgllice,
thus, adv., co
suffer,*soffrire,va., patire,vn.
rise,il levare
sole,m.;
sun,
tear,
gettare, buttare,
two,
num.,
n.,
toscano
due
adj., quel,
"
is,cio"
that, rel.,che
understand, capire,va.
their,poss., loro
then, adv., allora, ppi; conj.,
unexpectedly, improvvisamente
unfortunate,
adj., sfortunato;
dunque
ly,adv.,sfortunatamente
"
"
is,
"
are,
unite, unire,
va.
", vi sono
thin, adj.,magro
thing, cosa, /.
usually,adv.,ordinariamente
vi
think,
pensare,
us,
vn.;
credere,
va.
third, adj.,terzo
thirst,sete, /.
verse,
this,dem., questo
very,
thought, pensi^ro,m.
vex,
three, num.,
Victor
tre
verso,
m.
adv., molto;
contrariare,
Emanuel,
Emmanuele
adj.,stesso
va.
pr.
n.,
Vittprio
INDEX.
Heavy-faced figures refer to paragraphs.
2ii
da,
pi.,p. 38,11.1 ;
feminines
in, 50, 56; pi. of
o nouns,
63, 64; sign of
masc.
feminine
sing.,42, 50; use of
a, masculine
noun
36 (a), p.
n.
123,
bupno
sere
abstract
accent,
31,
role
accentuation,
which
n.
acute
ad
of
conj.
176;
249
addpsso,
n.
p.
pounded
com-
ai in
n.
be
to
translated,
2.
n.,
forms
109,
Rem.
Rem.
2;
adv.
from,
118;
131,
of,
1
in
p.
109;
used
as
1 1
157,
n.
3.;
irr.,
gree
de122,
and
238,
237,
n.
1,
239;
and
superlative,p.
of, 163,
1.
dates, p. 168,
magno,
n.
n.
1.
(2),
44
ex.
1.
(1), Rem.
51
altri added
to
altrimenti,
237
ambiguity
of
noi, voi, 92
(b).
(6).
possessiveavoided,
138.
analytical
and
synthetic
parison,
com-
120.
aspron.,ioc,
-lie, formation
121,
modification
3;
Alessandro
of,
of
243;
affirmation
absolute
n.
Alpe,
33.
36 (a).
not
124,
of,
use
Oi
-frrimo adj.,
(a); adj. sometimes, 128;
form
p.
of
-issimo
92,
pron.,
240;
comparison,
244;
(c) and
accent,
108;
to
112,
forms
verbal
from
n.
17,
words
1
242,
manner,
ing
fall-
2.
for a,
p.
p.
added, p.
with
76,
30;
suffix
of
4;
35;
of irr. verb,
stem
on
(b),
of
34,
239,
ner,
man-
333,
32,
241,
and
"s-
(1), 51
44
(1); 50 (3).n-
place,
125,
by
238,
237,
64, Rem.
a, p.
nouns,
15S, n. 1.
adverbs, classes of,236; of
3.
adv., 238(a),
as
p.
a, ad,
of, 5;
value
prep., 211;
used
213;
(3); by
an
dare
used
to
express
sive
progres-
action, 81 (1/)(1);
duty.
andarsene,
81
(1), (2).
107.
269
to
press
ex-
INDEX.
270
-ando, pres. part, in,
-ante, pres.
for -ando
n.
112.
in pres.
-ante
part., p.
49,
comes
; -ante, -ente, part, in, bep. 146,
noun,
antimeridiano,
n.
1.
{ante
a.m.
diem),
meri-
256 (b).
in,
apposition,nouns
(2).
49
arci-, 164.
def., omitted
in exclamation,
with
omitted
cejnto,
cal
(c); in numeri-
3.
44,
n.
augmentative suffixes,167.
auxiliary verbs, 74; tables
57-
PP-
58;
use
76, 77,
synopsis,
77
(a)and (b),
dovere,
aux.,
avere,
74;
vb., 235
in
83; modal
auxiliary
214;
auxs.,
as,
as,
(a).
description,44 (7);
lish
(a), 80; translating Eng"to
be", in idioms, 84;
avere
da, 84 (6); irr. of, 180
79
n.
; to denote
of
113
age,
(6),
258.
255
Carlo
magno,
n-
of
(2),Ex.
44
(c) and
1.
c"nto, without
(/).
(4), 251
art., 49
(0vbs.
in, 70 (1).
of, 16.
vbs.
n.
vowels
of
n.
2;
reg.
p. 52,
1.
146;
(fr),p.94,
to
127;
neuter,
as
p. 104,
che
1;
p.
non,
question
170,
n.
2.
(a); inter.,153.
-chiare vbs., 69 (3).
and
place of, 242,
ci, adv. use
243-ciare
251
(e),
vbs., 69 (2).
ci9,140.
4-
bravo,interj.,asadj.,p.
170,
n.
4.
and
accent,
use
of, 34.
of ch in learned
1,
comparison,
n.
introduce
chi, rel.,145,
n.
words,
rendering of,
P- I09.
days
(c).
cl instead
254.
ployed
em-
circumflex
B
"both",
speaking
implying doubt,
verbs
251;
-care,
126
oned
reck-
15,
171
116
characteristic
of,
suffix. 124.
numerals,
vbs.
ch, value
2.
cc,
in
month.
-cere,
audacie, p.
(a),16;
(2); masculines
in, 59; feminines in, 60.
capitals,use of, 37.
c"n
2
assimilation,p. 25, Rem.
(c).
-astro,with adj. of color, p. 112,
n.
(a).
-ca, adj. in,
n.
titles,257.
14. 15
before
def.,
(a); in-
superlative,122
157;
Rem.;
cardinal
of,
c, value
8; rules for, 9.
INDEX.
masculines
-co,
in, 62;
116, p. 44, n.
collectives, 254.
of, 119,
of
3.
degrees
equality, 121;
120;
and
by
123,
of
che, 126;
125;
(2),p.
119;
of
superiority,122,
di
correspondence bet
and English, 38.
comparison
124;
cotesto,
of, 139
use
3.
of, 1 42.
use
crossingof two
constructions, p.
riority,
infe-
95, n. 1.
of inflected cui, 145, 147, p. 105,
of adv., 248,
vbs., 127;
n.
102,
Italian
wren
costui, contemptuous
of ad
comparison
adj. in,
27
n.
n.
p. 106,
2;
1.
249.
compound
[180(4).
irregularityof,
77vbs.
compound
compounds, syllabicationof, 29
(0,Ex.
53, 66.
nouns,
with
compounded
da
(b);
116,
175, p.
63,
n.
from
n.
6;
inf.,
of, 230,
use
for
anterior
(b).
conjunctions, simple,
simple
tense, 230
217;
ondary,
sec-
followed
218;
subj.,219,
conjunctive
by
233.
220,
pron.,
pp.
76, 77;
table
99;
and
replacing poss.,
change of
(b), 101;
ment
agree-
art.
(8), 137
form
of, 99
44
(2);
of
seq.
cided
contraction, 36; of inf.,174; de-
by
ear,
past part., p.
pi.fut., p.
50,
p.
of, 213;
n.
of
definite article,forms
or
139;
pron.,
(1), (2),
141,
140;
142,
forms
of,
remarks
143,
with
139
on,
pounded
com-
144;
art., 43;
art.
with, 45 (3).
di, before
preceded
pcrs. pron.
by prep., 183; prep, followed
2;
of
3d
after
vbs.,
of articles
after
adj.,212
prepositions,43.
Madama,
used
Madamigella, p. 31,
2;
distributively, 44
(1); in
in expressions of
dates, 255;
time, 256; replacing poss., 44
(8), 137 (1), (2); with che,
146 (a) and n. 1.
dei takes gli,p. 27, n. 3.
demonstratives
either adj.
are
n.
2;
use
n.
of
n.
of, 40;
with
45;
1;
ofunonot
by, 187;
215 (6).
(e).
n.
3;
da, 84
avere
="to",
118
30,
49,
indicated, p. 28,
with
prep,
of, 44,
3.
conditional
(3);
followed
pronouns,
formed
13.
"as",49
days
conditional
of,
dabbene,
92.
p.
d, value
use
compound
con
tenses
omitted,
212;
47,
212
use
of,
(1) (a);
ception
(2), p. 32, Ex(b); ="on",
45 (7);
48,
212
212
(3); of partitive,
(4) ; of comparison,
INDEX.
272
126
in
95, Rem.,
(a), p.
adv.
(5);
(7).
212
expression,
diacritic signs,35.
-dico, adj. in, 124 (a).
212
diminutives,
with,
duration
45
(2), Rem.
suffixes,166.
diphthongs,
83, Rem.
28.
(1), (3).
180
ble
disjunctivepers. pron, 85; taof, 86; use of, 85, 87, 88,
90,
91,
92,
where
used
objects,98 (5).
two
doubling of
pron.,
99
initial
cons,
(b) and
n.
of vowel, 99
dropping
irr.
114;
of,
in
conj.
(a);
fore
be-
suffixes,171.
time,
259;
time
of
in
day,
1;
(a),114;
(p. 60); vbs. compounding
used
vbs.
stead
in-
of, 81.
95;
93,
forms
of
aux.
113
dire,irr.of, 178(6),
89,
of
expressions of
diminutive
as
ing
173, 178 (b),179, 180; denot-
used
art.
of both
used
persons
2; used
and
things, p. 67, n.
redundantly with meco, etc.,
92 (a).
euphony in placing adj.,131 ; in
suffixes,171 (b).
-evole, adj. in, 124 (a).
f, value
e, value
of, 5,
9;
and
for ph in words
12;
of Greek
before,
of,
origin,p. 26,
Rem.
42,
of
50;
ed for e,
pi.,63, 64.
masc.
36 (a).
Italian, p. 66,
elision,36, p. 73,
n.
Ella,Lei
elleno
n.
anche,
neppure,
"
=
you",
seldom
in
suffixes
with
in pres.
da, and
a,
in, 184
n.
fractions,252 (b).
front vowels, 6.
modern
of,
nouns
(a).
124
(d).
from
future, formed
91.
used
endearment,
n.
fino used
fu, 118
Italian, p. 66, n. 5.
emotion, subjunctive of, 232
49,
p.
2.
of,54;
-fico,adj. in,
and
3 ; of
in
masc.
denoting
of time, 259.
feminine, formation
5.
n.
nemmeno,
142,
use
duration
ei=egli,p. 66, n. 3.
egli,ella used of both persons
and things,p. 67, n. 2.
used
in modern
eglino seldom
che,
(3);
116,
n.
6;
inf.,175,
p.
of, 229.
use
(2).
168.
part., p.
in,
in.
pres. part,
g,
value
of,
doubled,
suffix, 124,
14,
15,
171
15
Rem.;
(a).
(b), 16;
before
INDKX.
-ga,
7J
infinitive,conj. pron.
with,
II
of,p. 26,
h, omission
in
and
-care
Rem.
-gare
("i)
;
vbs.,
69;
counted
by,
251
99,
for
Rem.
prep.,
not
art.
(d).
214;
used
44
(9);
with,
rendered
as
noun,
English,
(e);232
by subj.,
(1); rendering Eng. past part.,
221
I
223.
insieme
used
with
con
with
and
(a).
a, 184
261.
interjections,
(6); gender
of nouns
interrogatives, forms
of, 152;
ending in, 51;
used
in exclamations, 157.
pi. of nouns
ending in, 57;
interrogativevb., 72.
prefixed before impure s, p.
-ire vbs., taking either termination,
n.
4;
sign of masculine
123,
do
plural,42, 50; to indicate pro71 (6), 71 (c); that
nunciation,
not take -isco forms, 71(a).
61, 69 (2), 70;
value of, 5, 22.
-io,plural of nouns
in, 55, Rem.
-iare vbs., 69 (4).
2, p. 44, n. 1 ; of adj. in, 117.
il for lo,p. 72, n. 1.
of, 173;
irregular verbs, stem
forms from, p. 102, n. 3.
models
struction
of, 177 (a), (6); conille,
il quale,145; distinguished from
of, 179.
-isco endings, 71.
cui, 147 (a).
-issimo, adj. in, 124.
impari, 118 (a).
iste, forms pron., p. 102, n. 3.
imperative, force of future, 229
it," translation
(3); irr.,180 (3); use of, 231.
of, 94 and n.
imperfect tense, 73; imperf. ind.
3
(a); g before, 15
'
for conditional,
230 (a).
vbs., 181;
conj.
with, 99, Rem.
(a) (p.
impersonal
pron.
76).
j, semi-consonant,
6,
n.
n.
1.
1;
value
credere, p. 142,
inchoatives, Latin, p.
indefinite
syntax
n.
50,
article, forms
table
of,
p. 2,
23,
pronunciation of
6.
n.
of,
44,
1.
p.
p.
bets;
alpha,
(a).
41;
of, 49.
of, 12.
161,
1, value
160:
lasciare,
n.
2.
Rem.
conj. pron.
(e)(p. 77).
with,
99,
INDEX.
274
Latin
gender,
retain
nouns
week, def.
p.
(6);
38,11.1.
letters of
alphabet, 3.
ne
168,
n.
n.
2,
p.
of months,
n.
44
(12).
of, 45 (2).
relatives,names
near
n.
junctional,
con-
218.
n9 for non,
(11)
44
2.
1.
lo,neuter, p. 73,
5.
adverbial,
248;'
locutions,
with,
art.
1.
246 (a).
loro,
n.
p. 72,
(a);
with, 135
art.
conj.,
4.
non
vero,
nosco,
p. 70,
69, n.
p.
n.
3.
2.
"3f,12.
value
m,
madama,
p. 31,
n.
2.
madamig^lla, p. 31; n. 2.
(1).
pi. of, p. 45, Rem.
mago,
and
in comparison, 125
manco
n.
1.
(1).
(2), (a),55, Rem.
Ex.
(c)
Vergine, 44 (2),
50
mano,
Maria
and
n.
Lat.,
meco,
feminine
nouns
ending,
p.
developments of,
two
mfglio,p.
n.
n.
; as
adj. noun,
nouns
of, 251
(6).
(10),251-261.
numerals,
44
numerical
idioms, 260.
O
suffix,237.
o,
5, 8;
and
au,
open
Latin
molto, 128.
monosyllables,by contraction,
3;
of, 5, 8; diphthongized
forms, 69 (5),70 (3);
in
dropped
questo and cotesto,
141 ; for a in imperf.,p. 50, n.
o, value
4;
1.
adv.
mille without
n.
in verbal
1.
91,
as
p. 6,
55,
59,
in
92.
-mente
42,
(2) (6).
50
65, n.
p. 162,
39,
2.
masculine
me,
number,
1 1
representing
8;
sign
in
of
syllables,
monoline
mascu-
singular,42, 50.
jective,
objective forms used for sub-
95.
253.
multiplicatives,
od for 0,
36 (a).
107,
n,
value
names
44
(5); of
days of
n.
149;
derivation
1.
-one,
-one,
-oni
open
0.
order
of, p.
as
adv.
suffix, 239.
5, 8.
of two
conj. pron..
100.
276
INDEX.
provincia,p.
n.
44,
2.
pseudonimo,takes lo, p.
purity
n.
n.
27,
vowels,
of Italian
p.
3.
4,
impure, 36 (6).p.
adj. before, 115 (b).
s, 19;
1.
santo, forms
of, 12,
q, value
sc, value
p. 8,
n.
2, 162.
n.
seco,
'
'the
mer",
for-
questo, use
",
",
of,
use
former
latter
Rem.;
with,
114;
5-1 51;
in
92
(a),
249
to
form
used
sovra-,
164.
always
pressed
ex-
express
81
(a).
with,
104.
of
n.
1,
progressive action,
per, 81
(a),p.
reg.
141,11.
1.
of
vbs., 68;
irr.
178, p. 116, n. 2;
stressed stem, 176, 178 (d).
stra-, 164.
su,
(6); followed
(b).
subj. imperf.
lative,
super-
of
n.
1.
by
per,
command,
187
231
(a), 232.
subj. pres.
n.
for
imperative, p.
51,
5.
subj.,use
(c).
instead
235.
vbs., 173,
past part,
to form
to
stem,
with
Italian, 150*
repetitionof adv.
rimanere
164.
stare
possessive with,
I37 (2); synopsis of, 102, 106.
relative, indefinite, subj. after,
(4) (a).
232
relative clause, rendered
by inf.,
subj. in, 232 (4).
224;
relatives, 14
234,
sopra-,
past
(a), 98.
vbs., compound
114;
167,
105
reflexive
78, 103,
of tenses,
spia, 50 (1),Exc.
stare, irr. of, 180
103,
"ssere,
collective, p.
constructions
143.
not
sequence
143.
reciprocal yds.,
99,
3.
si,
143.
with,
(e)(p. 77).
sestina
sieno
of, 142,
n.
143.
"the
and
92
n.
21.
se, 93-
Rem.
142;
of, 20,
128, 156.
121,
-sciare,vbs., 69 (2).
3.
1;
of, 115.
irr. of,
sapere,
n.
27,
subordinate
of, 232,
233.
232
(1).
of
passive, 81 (c).
"ssere
suffixes, 163,
meaning
165-172;
in, 170;
with
loss
of
adv.,
INDEX.
163,
n.
p. in,
(a) and
249
1,
277
(b).
superlative,subj. after,
for su, 36 (a).
sur
ofimperf.dropped, p.
12;
v,
n.
(3).
44
surnames,
(3).
232
5.
conj. pron.
vedere,
syllabication,
29.
forms,
synthetic
123,
Rem.
124.
used
form
of,
t, value
instead
99,
of "ssere
to
passive,81 (6).
verbal
222.
221,
noun,
13.
128.
tanto,
with,
venire
50,
p. 54,
vi, adv.
teco, 92.
n.
and
2.
place and
of,
use
242,
there
243-
Rem.
2.
titles,44
"
vocative,
", rendering
to
(1), 214,
215.
tocco, fori'
256 (a),
una,
voiced
consonants,
voiced
s,
voiceless
troppo, 128.
forms
two
Rem.
26,
p.
(4).
25, Rem.
vowel,
n.
su
accented,
vowel,
p.
10,
(3).
2.
end
nouns
followed
n.
by
(1),p. 39, n. 5.
before, 36 (a), p.
p.
123,
ble,
ta-
2.
nantal,
conso-
1;
in,
5.
p.
5;
1.
u,
n.
Italian
vowel,
word,
same
p.
s, 19.
p. 69,
vosco,
of, 91.
1.
19.
truncation, 36.
use
p.
voiceless consonants,
triphthongs, 28.
tu,
(a),45 (1).
of, 91.
voi, use
(2), 212
211
,
(2),Exc.
44
p.
Rem.
25,
(6);
nouns
w,
uno,
-a, 251
(a);
by
ventuno,
251
(a).
noun
occurring
2;
in
Italian
phabet,
al-
pronunciation of,
3(a).
weak
vbs., p. 116, n. 1.
rendering of, 151,
"what",
154
(a).
230
unde, form
not
107,
n.
r.
modified
trentuno,
etc.,
x,
not
occurring
2;
in
Italian
phabet,
al-
pronunciation of,
278
INDEX.
Eng.
(a);
Rem.
25,
or
replaces,
"you",
p.
(a).
(2)
rendering
of,
p.
n.
50,
2,
91.
Y
z
.
not
y,
2;
in
occurring
Italian
pronunciation
phabet,
al-
of,
z,
zz,
fore"
(o).
i
1
value
P-
of,
27,
n.
26;
3.
il
or
lo
be-